Soalan Peperiksaan Semester Disember 2008/2009: Fakultikejuruteraan Elektrik UTM

30000010208721
SOALAN PEPERIKSAAN
SEMESTER DISEMBER
2008/2009
FAKULTIKEJURUTERAAN
ELEKTRIK
UTM
FAKULTIKEJURUTERAANELEKTRIK
SOALAN PEPERIKSAAN SEMESTER DISEMBER
SESI 2008/2009
BIL KODMATA PELAJARAN NAMA MATA PELAJARAN MUKASURAT
1 SEE 1003 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
2 SEE 1023/ SEE 2033 CIRCUIT THEORY
3 SEE 1223/ SZE 1233 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
4 SEE 2043 SIGNAL AND NETWORKS
5 SEE 2053 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
6 SEE 2113 CONTROL: MODELLING AND SIMULATION
7 SEE 2253 / SEE 3253 /
SZE2253
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT
8 SEE 2523 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD THEORY
9 SEE 3113 / SZE 3133 CONTROL: ANALYSIS & DESIGN
10 SEE 3223 / SZE 3413 MICROPROCESSOR
11 SEE 3263 / SEE 4213 ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
12 SEE 3423 FUNDAMENTALS OF POWER SYSTEM
13 SEE 3433 ELECTRICAL MACHINES
14 SEE 3533 / SZE 3533 COMMUNICATIONS PRINCIPLES
15 SEE 4012 / SZE 4012 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
16 SEE4103 CONTROL SYSTEM
17 SEE 41 13 MODERN CONTROL SYSTEMS
18 SEE 4433 / SEE 5433 /
SZE 4463
POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES
19 SEE 4443 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS
20 SEE 4453 POWER SYSTEM CONTROL
21 SE13133 ANALOG & DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS
22 SEI4153 TRANDUCERS & APPLICATIONS
23 SEL 4233 / SZE 4283 MICROELECTRONICS I
24 SEL 4263 / SZE 4263 COMPUTER SYSTEMS AND MULTIMEDIA
25 SEL 4373 IC TESTING TECHNIQUES
26 SEL 4533 MIKROPENGAWAL
27 SEL 4743/ SZE 4213 BASIC DIGITAL VLSI
28 SEM 4333 REKABENTUK SISTEM MEKATRONIK
29 SEP 4003 PHYSIOLOGY AND INTRODUCTION TO MEDICINE
30 SEP 4043 CLINICAL ENGINEERING
31 SEP 4123 INTRUMENTATION AND MEASUREMENT IN MED.
32 SEP 4253 MEDICAL TOMOGRAPHY
33 SEP 4263 BIOMEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING
34 SET 3573 MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
35 SET 3583 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
36 SET 4523 OPTICAL COMMUNICAnON SYSTEMS
37 SET 4533 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
38 SET 4543 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION
39 SET 4593 ACOUSTICS ENGINEERING
40 SEU 2012 ELECTRONICS
41 SEU 2052 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY FOR MANAGEMENT
42 SEU 2123 INSTRUMENTAnON AND CONTROL
43 SEU 3003 ELECTRONICS
44 SEU 3053 TEKNOLOGI ELEKTRIK
45 SEI4143 COMPUTER PROCESS CONTROL
46 SEM 4153 ROBOTICS TECHNOLOGY FOR AUTOMAnON
CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
.!IIM
FINAL EXAMINATION SEMESTER II
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 1003
BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
MS. FARIDAH BT RUSSIN
SEC / SEE / SEM/ SET
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
4 MAY 2009
INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE
ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.
ALL WORKING NEED TO BE SHOWN CLEARLY.
THIS EXAMINATION BOOKLET CONSISTS OF 9 PAGES INCLUDING THE FRONT
COVER
2
SEE 1003
Ql (a) (i) State Kirchhoffs voltage and current law. Use simple circuit to illustrate
the laws. [5 marks]
(ii) State Ohm's law. [2 marks]
(b) Consider a circuit shown in Figure Ql(b).
(i) If i = -8 A, determine current flowing through each element.
[8 marks]
(ii) Calculate the power received or delivered by the current dependent
source. [2 marks]
0.5 VI
.....
SA
30
...
+
30V 20 20 40 VI
30 i
Figure Q1(b)
3
SEE 1003
Ql (C) Consider the circuit shown in Figure Ql(c). By using nodal analysis technique
(i) Determine Vab. [6 marks]
(ii) If the 6 n resistor is short circuited, determine the new value OfVab.
[2 marks]
a
8A
b
Figure Ql(c)
4
SEE 1003
Q2 (a) (i) Discuss the steps taken in solving electric circuit using mesh analysis.
[3 marks]
(ii) Describe the source transformations technique.
[3 marks]
(b) Find i in the circuit shown in Figure Q2(b)
[10 marks]
60 20
40 30 80
20
20
Figure Q2(b)
(c) For the circuit shown in Figure Q2(c), determine i and va using mesh analysis.
[9 marks]
50
70
5A
i 30
2iA
+
20 Vo
Figure Q2(c)
5
SEE 1003
Q3 (a) Explain clearly why we replace capacitors with an open circuits and inductors
with short circuits in dc steady-state analysis. [4 marks]
(b) The circuit in Figure Q3(b) is operating under steady state dc conditions.
Find:
(i) iI, i2, VI and V2. [8 marks]
(ii) the total energy stored in capacitors and inductors. [3 marks]
3n
sn
Figure Q3(b)
(c) The switch in Figure Q3(c) has been opened for a long time. At t = 0 s, the
switch is closed.
(i) Find the expression of i(t) for t 0 s and sketch the waveform.
[8 marks]
(ii) Determine the instantaneous value ofv(t) at t = 0.5 Il
S
.
[2 marks]
ImH
i(t) t=O
2n
+
In
2n
In
- vet) +
1 k!l
3mA
3k!l
Figure Q3(c)
6
SEE 1003
Q4 (a) Describe with your own words how to construct a phasor diagram for the
circuit shown in Figure Q4(a) and draw the phasor diagram.
[5 marks]
R
I
Figure Q4(a)
(b) For the circuit shown in Figure Q4(b), if vl(t) = 20 cos lOt and V2(t) = 15 sin
lOt,
(i) Determine the total impedance, Zr as seen by the two sources and draw
the impedance triangle.
[7 marks]
(ii) Determine i(t), il(t) and i2(t).
[6 marks]
15 n i(t)
i
2
(t)
ij(t)
Ion
I 1
+
SmF SmF
rv
Vj(t)
2H
Figure Q4(b)
7
SEE 1003
Q4 (c) Determine V Figure Q4(c) using nodal analysis.
[7 marks]
+
so
-j40
sa
Figure Q4(c)
8
SEE 1003
Q5 (a) Consider a circuit shown in Figure Q5(a-i). The phasor diagram for the circuit
is shown in Figure Q5(a-ii).
(i) Based on the information given, determine the types of element A and
element B. Explain your answer. [4 marks]
(ii) If II
1
1= 2 A, IVsl = 10 V and ()= 30, determine the impedance of
each element in unit ohm (n). [4 marks]
Figure QS(a-i) Figure QS(a-ii)
(b) A certain circuit element is known to be a resistor, an inductor or a capacitor.
Determine the type and value (in ohms, henrys or farads) of the element if the
voltage and current for the element are given by
[5 marks]
(i) vet) = 100 sin(200t +30) V
i(t) =cos(200t +30) A
(ii) vet) = 50 cos(100t +50) V
i(t) = 2sin(100t +60) A
(c) Consider a circuit shown in Figure Q5(c). Determine I using mesh analysis
[12 marks]
-j40
30
so
Is= 4L90 A 20
Figure Q5(c
I I CONFIDENTIAL
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
!rIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 1023 / SEE 2033
CIRCUIT THEORY
DR. MOHAMED AFENDI BIN
MOHAMED PIAH
DR. ZOLKAFLE BIN BUNTAT
DR. MOHD PAUZI BIN ABDULLAH
DR. TAN CHEE WEI
MR. ABD JAAFAR BIN SHAFIE
MR. ALIAS BIN MOHD YUSOF
MR. NIK DIN BIN MOHAMAD
MS. ZANIAH BT MUDA
SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM/ SEP / SET /
SEW /SWB
01 /02/03/04/05/06/07 / 10
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
20 APRIL 2009
COVER
2
SEE 1023
Ql. (a) A linear two terminal DC circuit can be replaced by a Thevenin equivalent
circuit consisting of an equivalent voltage source, V
TH
and an equivalent
resistance, R
TH
If the direct current (DC) circuit consists of dependent
sources only, describe the steps/procedures to obtain the Thevenin
equivalent circuit.
[5 Marks]
(b) Find the Norton equivalent at terminals a-b in the circuit of Figure Qlb.
[15 Marks]
io 60
,-----""---,,,,-----0 a
+
+
O. 3vo +
12 cosl0t V ru
4i
o
50mF
1H Vo
'--------------e---__-------<l------ob
Figure Ql(b)
(c) When a maximum power is transferred to R2 resistor in Figure Ql(c), the
voltage across R2 is 4V. Use Thevenin theorem to determine the value of
the supply voltage, Vs and the value ofR
2
.
[5 Marks]
120
V
s
+
Figure Ql(c)
3
SEE 1023
Q2 (a) (i)
What do you understand by "power factor correction". For an
inductive load, what type of element should be connected in parallel
with the load to improve the power factor. [3 Marks ]
(ii) Draw power triangle diagram showing the components of AC power
for:
a. Lagging power factor
b. Leading power factor.
[3 Marks]
(b) A two-branch parallel circuit has branch impedance ZI = ( 2 - j5 ) 0 and
Z2 = ( I +j 1 ) O. If the 2 0 resistor in the ZI consumes 32 W;
(i) Draw the phasor diagram of voltage across the branch, the current
flow through each branch and the resultant current. Use the voltage
across the branch as the reference phasor. [ 4 Marks ]
(ii) Obtain the power triangles for each branches and combine them to
obtain the total power triangle. [ 6 Marks ]
(c) For the circuit shown in Figure Q2(c), Load 1 consist of resistor, R = 1000
series with inductor, L = 150 mR. Load 2 is a capacitor, C = 10 f.l.F.
(i) Find the current, i(t). [2 Marks]
(ii) If a load impedance, ZL is connected in parallel with the load 2,
determine the load impedance, ZL that maximizes the average power
drawn from the source. [ 3 Marks ]
(iii) Find the current flow through the load impedance, ZL. [ 4 Marks ]
Figure Q2(c)
4
SEE 1023
Q3. (a) Explain briefly what do you understand by:
(i) Half power frequencies
(ii) Quality factor
[5 Marks]
(b) For an ideal parallel RLC resonant circuit as shown in Figure Q3(b):
(i) Derive the lower half-power frequency, f] and upper half-power
frequency, f
2
in terms of circuit elements.
[6 Marks]
(ii) Show that the bandwidth in Hertz (Hz) is given as _1_
21lRC
[2 Marks]
+
Is v
R L
Figure Q3(b)
(c) A series RLC circuit is designed to resonate at angular frequency,
COo = Ixl0
5
rad/s, has a bandwidth, BW of 0.2f
o
and draws 32 W from a
24..fi V (peak value) source at resonance. Find:
(i) the value of R.
[3 Marks]
(ii) the bandwidth, BW in Hertz.
[ 1 Mark]
(iii) the quality factor, Q of the circuit
[ 1 Mark]
(iv) the inductance, L and capacitance, C of the circuit.
[5 Marks]
(v) the lower half-power frequency, f
l
[2 Marks]
5
SEE 1023
Q4. (a) How can first-order or second-order circuits be identified by inspecting the
circuit diagram?
[3 Marks]
(b) Consider the circuit shown in Figure Q4(b). If the resistance, R =250, the
response of the circuit is overdamped. What will happen to the response of
the circuit if:
(i) the value of resistance, R is 100 O?
[2 Marks]
(ii) the value of resistance, R is 50 O?
[2 Marks]
+
1 A
1000 pF v R
t =0
Figure Q4(b)
(c) The switch in Figure Q4(c) has been closed for a long time. It is open at (=0.
[8 Marks]
(ii) Determine the characteristic equation of the circuit for t > O.
[6 Marks]
(iii) Determine the complete response v(t) and then i(t) for t > 0
[ 4 Marks]
t= 0
120
...-------- e---'I/II'V----------,
i
-
24 V +
60 IH
40
Y4 F
+
v(t)
Figure Q4(c)
6
SEE 1023
Q5 (a) The two-port parameters can be calculated or measured by short-circuiting
or open-circuiting the appropriate input or output port. Show that the hybrid
parameters can be obtained by using this method.
[5 Marks]
(b) Determine the z parameters for the two-port network shown in
Figure Q5(b). Is the two-port network symmetric? Justify your answer.
[10 Marks]
40
b
-
+
+
60
Figure Q5(b)
(c) Network A and network B in Figure Q5(c) are two-port networks. Given
the impedance (z) parameters of network A and transmission (T)
parameters of network B are as follows:
[Z]=[4.S -0.4]0 [3
4.2 ; [r]= IS
-0.4
(i) Find the z parameters for the overall network of Figure Q5(c).
[6 Marks]
[4 Marks]
V
s
I I
I CIRCUIT A h
+
+
V
2
CIRCUIT B
Figure Q5(c)
R
L
7
SEE 1023
Conversion of two-port parameters
Jadual Penukaran Parameter
y z h T
y
Y11
YZI
Y\2
Yzz
zzz
~ z
- ZZI
~ z
- ZlZ
~ z
ZII
~ z
1
-
hi)
~
h
ll
-h\2
h
ll
~ h
h
ll
T
zz
T\2
-1
-
T
IZ
- ~ T
T
IZ
Til
T
IZ
Z
Yzz
~ y
- YZI
~ y
- YIZ
~ y
Yll
~ y
Zil
ZZI
ZIZ
zzz
~
h
zz
-h
Z1
h
zz
h
lz
h
zz
1
-
h
zz
Til
T
ZI
1
-
T
Z1
~ T
T
Z1
T
zz
T
ZJ
h
1
-
Y11
YZ I
YII
- Y1z
Yl\
~
Yll
~
zzz
-ZZI
zzz
~
zzz
1
-
zzz
h
ll
h
ZI
h
lz
h
zz
T
IZ
T
zz
-1
-
T
zz
Til
T
ZI
~ T
T
zz
T
ZI
T
zz
T
IZ
T
zz
T
L
- Y
zz
YZI
- ~
--y
YZI
-1
-
YZI
.:.2'J.l
YZI
~
ZZl
1
-
ZZl
~
ZZI
zzz
ZZI
- ~ h
h
Z1
- h
zz
h
ZI
- h
ll
h
Z1
-1
-
h
ZI
Nota: Parameter T = transmission Parameter
8
SEE 1023
Trigonometric Identities
Rumus Trigonometri
1) sin 8 = kos (90
0
-8) = - kos (90
0
+8)
2) sin 8 =sin(l80
0
-8)
3) sin (-8) = -sin 8
4) kos (-8) =kos 8
5) tan 8 =-tan(l80
0
-8)
6) sin (a 13) = sinakosf3 kosasinf3
7) kos(a 13) = kosakosf3 +sinasinf3
8) tan(a 13) = tan a tan 13
1+tan a tan 13
.20 (l-kos20)
9)
SID
2
10) kos
2
0 = (1 + kos20)
2
11) sin 28 =2sin 8 kos 8
12) kos 28 = kos
2
8 - sin
2
8
13) sin
2
8+kos
2
8= 1
14) sin(wt + .7l"/2) = kos mt
15) kos(mt - m'2) =sin wt
Integrals
Pengkamiran
1)
!dt =
2)
ilOdt =1Otl
e
3)
!tdt =
4)
!sin t dt =-kos t
5)
i . dt - kos 7l1: I'
SID 7l1: = 0
.7l"
6) rsin wt dwt =-kos wtl
7)
!kos t dt =sin *
! sin 7l1:
8) kos 7l1: dt =-
.7l"
9)
rkos wt dwt = sin wtl
\ CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 1123
INSTRUMENTATION & ELECTRICAL
MEASUREMENT
ASSOC. PROF. DR. SALLEHUDDIN BIN
IBRAHIM
DR. YUSRI BIN MD YUNOS
DR. NURUL MU' AZZAH BT ABDUL LATIF
MR. HERMAN BIN WAHID
MR. MOHD IBRAHIM BIN SHAPIAI
MR. MUHAMED SULTAN BIN
MOHAMED ALI
MDM. MONA RIZA BT MOHD ESA
SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET /
SEW
01 / 02 / 03 / 04 / 05 / 06 / 07
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
1 MAY 2009
THIS EXAMINAnON BOOKLET CONSISTS OF 9 PAGES INCLUDING THE FRONT
COVER
SEE 1123
- 2
Q1 a) 1. Give the definition of metrology as defined by the Bureau of Weights and
Measures. [2 marks]
11. Define the following terminologies and give an appropriate example to illustrate
these terms:
1. Drift
2. Precision
3. Stability
4. Repeatability
[8 marks]
b) 1. What is calibration? [1 mark]
11. Where is calibration done? [2 marks]
iii. State 3 reasons for calibrating an instrument. [3 marks]
c) The quantity for power loss per unit meter, W, of a wire is given by,
where f= frequency, B
m
= maximum flux density = maximum flux/area, d = diameter
of wire, p = resistivity of material = (resistance x area)/length and k, 1, m and n are
constants.
Find the values ofk, 1, m and n. Length (L), Mass (M), Time (T) and Current (I) must
be used as base quantity. A few dimensions of quantity are given as follow:
[Power] = [ML
2
y-3]
[Flux] = [ML
2
T
2
r
J
]
[Potential voltage] = [ML
2
T
3
r
J
]
[9 marks]
SEE 1123
- 3
Q2 a) Describe briefly about the Quantum Hall effect. Your description should include:
1. Diagram of a Quantum Hall setup [2 marks]
11. Operation [4 marks]
lll. Sketch of the Hall resistance versus magnetic field [2 marks]
IV. The formula related to Quantum Hall effect parameters [2 marks]
b) In 1962, B. Josephson derived equations for the current and voltage across a junction
consisting of two superconductors separated by a thin insulating barrier. His
equations predicted that the current-voltage (I-V) curve for a junction (that is current
biased at frequency) will develop regions of constant voltage at the values nhf/2e,
where n is an integer and e/h is the ratio of the elementary charge to the Planck
constant. This prediction was re-verified experimentally by SEE 1123 students by
using 55 GHz microwave source and an I-V curve as shown in figure Q2b obtained.
Bias
Current
DC Voltage across
Figure Q2b
Find the junction voltage at the second step that was obtained through the above
experiment. Given, R
k
= 25,812.807 n and e = 1.602 x 10-
19
C where R
k
is Von
Klitzing constant and e is the elementary charge. [5 marks]
c) 1. In relation to the ISO 9000 quality management system, why is conformity
assessment so important? [5 marks]
11. The standards that have earned the ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 families a world
wide reputation are known as "generic management system standards". What is
the significance of the term "generic" in this case? [5 marks]
SEE 1123
- 4
Q3 a) 1. What is defined as loading effect? [1 mark]
n. Prove and explain how the voltmeter loading effect can be minimized by using a
higher sensitivity of the meter movement and setting the highest range possible.
You are given 2 different voltmeters (meter A and meter B) to measure the
voltage across resistor Rx in the Figure Q3 a(ii) below. R
x
= 2kO. [10 marks]
8kO
10VT
Rx
I
0)
I
Figure Q3 a(ii)
The specifications for meters A and B are as follow:
Meter A: S = 0.5kON, R
m
= O.lkO, range (3V, 10V, 30V)
Meter B: S = 20kON, R
m
= 1.2kO, range (3V, lOY, 30V)
iii. Based on a Wheatstone Bridge shown in Figure Q3 a(iii), derive the equation for
R
x
when the bridge is in balanced condition.
[6 marks]
SEEl123
- 5
E
+
G
R
x
Figure Q3 a(iii)
b) Give 2 advantages of why the bridge circuit configuration is widely used to measure
resistance, inductance, capacitance and impedances. [2 marks]
c) One of the main blocks in the oscilloscope is the cathode ray tube (CRT). Figure
Q3(c) shows the basic construction of a CRT. State the functions of the components
given below. [6 marks]
H:::ATER
r
H:::RIZCNTAL

PLATES
Figure Q3 (c)
SEE 1123
- 7
Table Q4 (c)
Number of data, n
Maximum deviation to standard
deviation ratio, dmax/cr
3 1.38
4 1.54
5 1.65
6 1.73
7 1.8
10 1.96
15 2.13
25 2.33
50 2.57
100 2.81
300 3.14
500 3.29
SEE 1123
- 8
Q5. a) Describe the difference between a transducer and a sensor? Give an example for each
to show the difference. [4 marks]
b) In the selection of a transducer, there are approximately 8 areas of consideration. As
an electronic engineer, briefly explain the 6 elements in choosing and in specifying
one particular transducer for your design. [6 marks]
c) A resistive displacement transducer shows in Figure Q5(c) is used to measure stroke
motion from signal 0 to 12 cm. The resistance changes linearly over this range from 0
to 10kO provided that the linear value of supply voltage is from 0 to 20V.
1. Calculate the resistance value when shaft stroke is located at 3.75cm above the
mid-stroke. [2 marks]
R,
11. By assuming that load resistance, R
L
R] + R
2
, prove t hat VL = ---- Vs;
R l ~ R :
where V
s
is the source voltage. [2 marks]
iii. Sketch the graph of the output voltage versus the displacement. [2 marks]
/
Figure Q5 (c)
d) 1. The schematic in Figure Q5(d) represents one of the temperature transducer.
Name and briefly explain the operation of the transducer. [4 marks]
11. List 3 disadvantages of using this transducer [3 marks]
iii. During an experiment, a copper-constant thennocouple with c = 3.75 X 10-
2
mV/oC and k = 4.50 X 10-
5
mV/oC is used. The first junction is set at the boiling
point of water at atmospheric pressure, T
1
, and other junction is kept in ice, T
2
.
Calculate the resultant voltage.
[2 marks]
CONFIDENTIAL
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 1223 / SZE 1233
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
MR. ZULKIFLI BIN MD YUSOF
MR. MUHAMAD ARIF BIN ABDUL RAHIM
MR. JAMEEL ABDULLA AHMED MUKRED
MR. AB AL-HADI BIN AB RAHMAN
MR. MOHD ARIFFANAN BIN MOHD BASRI
SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEW/ SWB
01/02/03/04/05/10
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
30 APRIL 2009
ANSWER QUESTION ONE (1) AND ANY OTHER THREE (3) QUESTIONS.
COVER
SEE 1223
- 2
Question 1
(a) Convert the following numbers to decimal.
(i)
(ii)
111.010h.
A2F716.
[3 marks]
[3 marks]
(b) Fill up Table I (i) with suitable entries.
Table lei)
[4 marks]
Number of bits Unit of Infonnation
nibble
8
word
32
(c) Represent -2710 in 8-bit signed 2's complement notation.
[4 marks]
(d) Simplify each of the following Boolean expressions. Each letter is a variable.
(i) A+AB
(ii) A.B+B.A+A.B
(iii) AA+ I
(iv) A.B + B.C + B
[4 marks]
(e) Obtain the minimum POS expression from the Karnaugh map in Figure lei). X
indicates a don't care condition.
[3 marks]
SEE 1223
- 3
Be
00 01 11 10
A
0
1
1 0 0 1
0 1 X X
Figure lei)
(f) Write the Boolean expression for the output of the multiplexer (F) in Figure 1(ii)
in SOP expression.
[3 marks]
Logic symbol Truth-table
1
0
So F
0 1
0
1 II
Figure 1(ii)
(g) (i) Using NAND gates only, draw the logic circuits for SR latch and Gated
SR latch.
[4 marks]
(ii) State the main advantage of gated SR latch over SR latch.
[2 marks]
(h) Figure l(iii) shows a counter circuit.
0
T
2
1 1
'- -
D Q D
Q
D Q D
Q
~ ) .-) .-) r---
~
eLK
Figure 1(iii)
SEE 1223
-4
(i) Complete Table l(ii), assuming initially that Q3 = 0,
Qo = 1
Table l(ii)
Q2 = 0, QI = and
[4 marks]
clock pulse Q3 Q2 QI Qo

I
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
(ii) Give suitable name for the counter.
[2 marks]
(h) Write in full the following acronyms;
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
BCD
TTL
EEPROM
RAM
[4 marks]
- - -
SEE 1223
- 5
Question 2
(a) Given two Boolean expressions as follows;
Fj(A,B,C) = (A + B + C)(A + B + C)
F
2
(A,B,C) =AB+AB+C
(i) With the aid of Table 2(i), prove that the expressions F
I
and F
2
are equal.
[6 marks]
Table 2(i)
A B C
p=
-
A+B+C
Q=
- - -
A+B+C
P.Q
x=
-
A.B
y=
-
A.B
z=
-
C
X+Y+Z
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
(ii) Express F
2
in standard (canonical) SOP form.
[2 marks]
(b) A combinational circuit has three binary inputs H, S, I and three binary o u ~ p u t s X,
Y and Z. Each input represents an item that a person may order at a fast food
place. The items are:
H stands for hot dog, which cost = $3.
S stands for soda, which cost = $1.
I stands for ice cream, which cost = $2.
SEE 1223
- 6
Each input can only be 1 or 0, which means that a customer can order each item
only once (or none at all, for H=O, S=O, 1=0). The outputs X, Y, Z represent a 3
bit encoding (XYZ)2 of the total cost of the order. For example, for H=l, S=l, 1=0
(which evaluates to $4), the output should be X=l, Y=O, Z=O.
(i) Obtain the truth table for this combinational circuit.
[6 marks]
(ii) Determine the minimum expression for X, Y, Z in SOP form.
[3 marks]
(iii) Implement the minimum expressions in NAND-NAND configurations.
[3 marks]
SEE 1223
-7
Question 3
(a) Figure 3(i) is a logic symbol for integrated circuit chip 74138 which is a 3 to 8
line decoder. The truth-table for a 1 to 8 de-multiplexer is shown in Table 3(i).
Show - by labeling Figure 3(i) with the relevant de-multiplexer's inputs and
outputs - how this chip is used to implement a 1 to 8 de-multiplexer.
[6 marks]
Figure 3(i)
Table 3(i)
select bits outputs
C
2 CI Co Yo Y
I
Y
2
Y
3
Y
4
Y
s
Y
6
Y
7
0 0 0 I 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 I 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 I 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 0 0 I 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 I 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 0
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I
(b) Given three Boolean functions as follows;
FI(A,B,C) =
F
2
(A,B,C) = A EB B EB C
F3(A,B,C) = ITM(2,3,5,7)
SEE 1223
- 8
Implement these functions using a single 74138 chip and NAND gates only.
[8 marks]
(c) Realize the Boolean expression
F(A,B, C) =A.B.C + A.B.C + A.B.C + A.B.C + A.B.C
using a 4 to1 multiplexer and basic gates. The select bits S\ and So' of the
multiplexers must be connected to inputs A and B respectively.
[6 marks]
SEE 1223
- 9
Question 4
(a) A new flip-flop with three inputs S, R, and T (in addition to the positive edge
triggered clock input), and output Q is shown in Figure 4(i). The flip-flop
functions as follows:
No more than one of these inputs may be 1 at any time. The output Q is a
don't care when more than one input is 1).
The S and R inputs behave exactly as they do in an SR flip-flop. If SR = ,
01, the output is cleared (to 0) and if SR = 10, the output is set (to 1).
The T input behaves as it does in a T flip-flop. The output toggles when
T=1.
S Q
R
T
Q
Figure 4(i)
(i) Complete the truth table (Table 4(i))for this new flip-flop. Q is the present
state (PS) and Q+ is the next state (NS) after applying S, R, and T at the
positive edge of clock.
[6 Marks]
SEE 1223
- 10
Table 4(i)
Input PS NS
S R T
Q
Q+
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
(ii) Obtain the minimum expression for Q+ in terms of S, R, T and Qby using
a Karnaugh map.
[3 marks]
(b) Complete the timing diagram for the circuit in Figure 4(ii). Assume initially that
the output Qis zero.
[6 marks]
SEE 1223
- 11
A
1------1 D Q
CLK
Figure 4(ii)
A ---+-----1-
Q
(c) A 3-bit synchronous counter is connected to a 3 to 8 line decoder with active
HIGH inputs and outputs as shown in Figure 4(iii). Table 4(ii) shows the output
sequence of the decoder. Draw the state transition diagram of the counter.
[5 marks]
3 to 8 line decoder
3-bit synchronous
counter
CLK
Figure 4(iii)
SEE 1223
- 12
Table 4(ii)
Current Active State Next Active State
0
0
0
1
0
1
O
2
O
2
0
4
03 0
4
0
4 Os
Os 0
6
0
6
0
0
07 0
0
CD
State transition diagram
SEE 1223
- 13
Question 5
(a) Figure 5(i) is the logic symbol of synchronized counter chip 74163. Show how
this chip is used to count the following sequence: 0, 1,2,3, 7,8,9,0...
[5 marks]
CLK
CLR
LD
ENP
ENT
RCO
Figure 5(i)
(b) Figure 5(ii) shows the construction ofa 16xl bit memory.
(i) Construct a 16x4 bit memory using four 16xl bit memory elements and
any other combinational logic blocks if necessary.
[7 marks]
Address {
lines
Active-LOW
enable
A
3
A
2
AI
A
o
D
output
data
E
Figure 5(ii)
SEE 1223
- 14
(ii) Construct a 64x8 bit memory usmg multiple copies of the 16x4 bit
memory developed in part (i)) and any other combinational logic blocks if
necessary. Use the block diagram in Figure 5(iii)
[8 marks]
4-input
Address lines
4
E
4
4-bit output
data
Figure 5(iii)
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 2043
SIGNAL AND NETWORKS
MR. AHMAD SHARMI BIN ABDULLAH
SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
7 MAY 2009
COVER
- 2
SEE2043
Ql. (a) Figure Ql(a) shows a system with input signals x(t) and y(t). Signal
xU) is given in Figure Ql(b) and signal y(t) is given in Figure Ql(c).
Draw the output signal z(t) given that:
II (t) =u(t) - u(t - 2)
12 (t) = u(t - 1) - u(t - 2)
(9 marks)
x(t) - - ~
y(t) - - ~
z(t)
fdt)
Figure Ql(a)
x(t) y(t)
21-----.
-2 -1 2 3
Figure Ql(b) Figure Ql(c)
(b) Based on the system in Figure Q1(d) and given that
x(t) = 2u(t) - u(t - 2) - u(t - 4)
Find the expression for signall(t) to produce an output signal
y(t) = 4u(t -1.5) - 2u(t - 2) - 2u(t - 3)
(4 marks)
- 3
82043
x(t) y(t)
. ~
f(t)
Figure QI(d)
(c). The circuit in Figure QI (e) consist of a resistor, an inductor and a
voltage source which are connected in series. The voltage source
signal, v(t) is given in Figure QI(f).
(i) Find the expression for vet) up to the second harmonics
(n = 2).
(ii) Find the expression for i(t) up to the second harmonics
(n = 2).
(iii) Find the expression for vR (t) up to the second harmonics
(n = 2) and sketch the double sided spectrum.
(iv) Find the average power for signal vR (t)
(12 marks)
i (t)
~ ~ ~ - - - - ' ' V V ' v ~ - - - - , ~
8
",n : '1:_0 fl------Jr 0.1 H
Figure QI(e)
V(-l)
t (ms)
-2 -1 2 3
Figure QI(f)
- 4
SEE2043
Q2. (a) Fourier series and Fourier transform are the tools used in the area
of signal analysis and signal processing. Differentiate the two tools
briefly.
(4 marks)
(b) Figure Q2(a) shows an LTI system. x(t), h(t) and yet) are the
input, system impulse response and output of the system
respectively. The system impulse response, h(t) is illustrated in
Figure Q2(b).
x(t) ~ h(t) ~ y(t)
Figure Q2(a)
h(t)
Figure Q2(b)
An input signal defined as
20 15 30
x(t) =-+-cos(lOOOm)+-cos(3000m) has gone through the
7r 7r 7r
system successfully, and produced the output yet) .
- 5
SEE2043
(i) Using the Duality property, obtain the expression of H(w)
and sketch the spectrum completely.
(5 marks)
(ii) Obtain the expression of X(w) , Yew) and y(t).
(6 marks)
(iii) Sketch X(w) and Yew) in detail.
(4 marks)
(c) An amplitude modulation system is shown in Figure Q2(c). The
Fourier transform X(w) of the system input signal x(t) and
H(w) for the filter h(t) is illustrated in Figure Q2(d). Given W =
o
We = 5 rad/s.
(i) Sketch Yew) and 2(w). (4 marks)
(ii) Describe the function of mixer or multiplier and filter in the
system.
(2 marks)
X(I)1 y(t) .IL- F _ ~ ; _ ~ _ r _ ~ Z(I)
Figure Q2(c)
X(w) H(w)
-5 5 cu CUe CU
Figure Q2(d)
- 6
SEE2043
Q3. (a)
The Laplace Transform was found to be very useful in the area of
electrical and electronics engineering. Discuss the main advantage
and application of the Laplace Transform.
(3 marks)
(b) The block diagram shown in Figure Q3(a) is an automatic sensor
control system, with h(t) =6e-
2
'u(t) as the input signal and the
transfer function is Xes) = s + 2
s(s +1) +s
(i) Determine the final value of the intermediate signal y(t).
(5 marks)
(ii) Determine the final value of the output z(t).
(5 marks)
(iii) Discuss your observation on both final values.

(2 marks)
ylt) 1_ z(f)
Figure Q3(a)
(c) By incorporating the initial energy for the inductors L1 and L2 at
i
u
W)=4u(t) A and i
L2
W)=u(t) A respectively, with the capacitor
(vcW) =2 volt), analyze the circuit presented in Figure Q3(b) to find
the output voltage, vo(t) if the input is i(t)=u(t) A.
IH
R2 1n
R1 In
C =1 F
L2 1 H
Figure Q3(b)
(10 marks)
- 7
8EE2043
Q4. a) Given the transfer function of a network is
H(s) = 20s(s +100)
(s +2)(s +10)
(i) What is the constant tenn?
(2 marks)
(ii) Sketch Bode plots for the transfer function above for
magnitude and phase.
(6 marks)
b) Block diagram as shown in Figure Q4, is a filter with transfer
functions H(s) and two separate signals VI (I) and V
2
(I) .
VI (t) =I 00 cos(27l" x 500t)
H(s) = Rsc Output
Rsc+l
V
2
(I) =I00 cos(27l" x 5000t)
Figure Q4
(i) Given the value of R =0.lx10
9
nand C =_1_xI0-
9
F ,
1007l"
calculate the transfer function for two signals
VI (I) =100cos(27l" x 500t) and V
2
(I) =I 00 cos(27l" x 5000t)
in tenn of magnitude and phase.
(6 marks)
- 8
SEE2043
(ii) Find the magnitude and phase of the output signals for the
each input signals.
(4 marks)
(iii) Comment on your answer in part b (ii) and name type of
filtering.
(3 marks)
(iv) Sketch the magnitude of output responses of the filter
(magnitude only)
(4 marks)
- 9
SEE2043
Q5. (a) Sketch a typical frequency response of the nonnalized Chebyshev
low pass filter.
(6 marks)
(b) What is the difference between the frequency response of this filter
with the Butterworth filter.
(2 marks)
(c) An engineer is required to design a Chebyshev filter to filter out the
high frequency components of a human voice. If the 3
rd
order filter
is said to be good for this application, calculate the maximum
allowable magnitude of ripple, A
max
, of the filter. Given W
s
= 1.844
rad/s and as = 20dB.
(4 marks)
(d) Obtain the normalized transfer function, Hn(s), ofthe filter.
(3 marks)
(e) What is the actual transfer function, H(s), of the filter if the w
p
= 18
rad/s.
(3 marks)
(f) Obtain the Chebyshev actual value of circuit and clearly indicate
the value of each component in the circuit if the resistance at the
load is given as loon and We = 20 rad/s.
(7 marks)
- 10
SEE2043
LAMPlRAN (APPENDIX)
F: MEREKABENTUK PENAPIS ANALOG
(Analog Filter Design)
BUTTERWORTH
1 1
IH(j ()))I = ----;==== H n(s) = -B-(-) = -n---n--l----1
n s s + an_Is + .... + aJs +
l+(:J
a = -10109[l + (:, r] 20 log" IH(j@)1
a, = ' a, -1010
g
[1+(:J]
(:J = 10"/" -I, (:J - , (:J = :] = 10,M 1 =
n = - l)/lO a
p
/lo -lJ
21og(())sn )
()) =
())
p atau
c /10 1a
p
J;z,;
10 -1
Jadual F.l: Pengiraan frekuensi sudutjalur henti ternormal, ())sn'
(Calculations ofnormalized stopband anKlefrequency)
Jenis penapis
Frekuensi sudut jalur henti ternormal, ())sn
(Types offilters)
(Normalized stopband anf!,lefrequency)
())s
I
I Penapis lu1us rendah, LPF
I (Low Pass Filter)
())p
())p
Penapis lulus tinggi, HPF
(High Pass Filter)
())s
2 2
()) 1()) 2 - ())sl ())s2 - ()) I()) 2
Penapis lulus jalur, BPF P( P ) atau(or) ( p p), pilih yang lebih kecil
(Band Pass Filter)
())sl ())p2 - ())pl ())s2 ())p2 - ())pl
(choose smaller value)
())sJ()) 2 - ()) I) 2 - ()) I)
p P2 atau(or) 2 p P, pilih yang lebih keeil
())pl())p2 - ())sl ())s2 - ())pl())p2
Penapis jalur henti, BSF
(Band Stop Filter)
(choose smaller value)
- 12
SEE2043
Jadual F.5: Transformasi frekuensi penapis
(Freguency Transformations offilter)
Jenis penapis
(Types offilters)
Transformasi
(Transformation)
-.!..-, ( ~ , bagi Butterworth)
OJ
p
OJ
c
OJ OJ
_p ,( _c, bagi Butterworth)
s s
2
s +OJ
p1
OJ
p2
(OJ p2 - OJ pI )S
~ O J p 2 - OJp1)s
2
s +OJ
p1
OJ
p2
Penapis lulus rendah, LPF
(Low Pass Filter)
Penapis lulus tinggi, HPF
(High Pass Filter)
Penapis lulus jalur, BPF
(Band Pass Filter)
Penapis jalur henti, BSF
(Band Stop Filter)
Jadual F.6(a): Pekali-pekali Polinomial Butterworth Bn(s) = Sn+an.lSn-l+..... +als+l
(Coefficients ofButterworth Polynomials)
n 31 32 33 34 3S 36 37 3s 39
2 1.4142
3 2.0000 2.0000
4 2.6131 3.4142 2.6131
5 3.2360 6.2360 6.2360 3.2360
6 3.8637 7.4641 9.1416 7.4641 3.8637
7 4.4939 10.0978 14.5917 14.5917 10.0978 4.4939
8 6.1258 13.1370 21.8461 26.6883 21.8461 13.1370 6.1258
9 6.7587 16.5817 31.1634 41.9863 41.9863 31.1634 16.5817 6.7587
10 6.3924 20.4317 42/8020 64.8823 74.2334 64.8823 42.8020 20.4317 6.3924
Jadual F.6(b): Polinomial Butterworth dalam bentuk pemfaktoran Butterworth
(Butterworth Polynomials in Factorized Form)
1 5 + 1
2 5
2
+ 1.414213565+ 1
3 (5 + 1) (52 + 5+ 1)
4 (52 + 0.765366865 + 1) (52 + 1.847759075 + 1
5 (5 + 1)(5
2
+ 0.618033995 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.9318033995 + 1)
6 (52 + 0.517638095 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.414213565 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.931851655 + 1)
7 (5 + 1) (52 + 0.445041875 + 1) (52 + 1.246979605 + 1) (52 + 1.801937745 + 1)
8 (52 + 0.390180645 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.111140475 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.662939225 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.961570565 + 1)
9 (5 + 1) (52 + 0.347296365 + 1)(5
2
+ 5+ I) (52 + 1.532088895 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.879385245 + 1)
10 (52 + 0.312868935 + 1) (52 + 0.907981005 + I) (52 + 1.414213565 + 1) (52 + 1.782013055 + 1)
(52 + 1.975376685 + 1)
! CONFIDENTIAL)
8!!IM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 200812009
SEE 2053
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
ASSOC. PROF. MD SHAH BIN MAJID
DR. YANUAR ZULARDIANSYAH ARIEF
DR. AHMAD SAFAWI BIN MOKHTAR
DR. AWANG BIN JUSOH
DR. MOHD JUNAIDI BIN ABDUL AZIZ
SEB / SEC / SEE / SEL / SEP / SET / SEW
01 /02/03/04/ 10
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
28 APRIL 2009
COVER
- 2
SEE 2053
S1. (a) For a balanced three phase star and delta connected system/load, give the
relationship between the phase and line current and between the phase and
line voltage respectively. [4 marks]
(b) A three phase balanced supply is connected to a star connected 4 wire
unbalanced load. The loads are given as below:
Blue phase:
Current magnitude = 6.35 Ampere
Reactive power (Q) = 0.85 kVAr
Power factor =0.83 leading
Yellow phase:
Real power (P) = 1 kW
Power factor = 0.92 lagging
The phase sequence is positive and take VRN as reference. The neutral
current is given as 10.32/52.3 Ampere. Find
(i) the phase voltages
[5 marks]
(ii) lines currents
[6 marks]
(iii) real and reactive power at red phase
[4 marks]
(iv) total real and reactive powers
[6 marks]
S2. (a) A coil is wound on a magnetic core. Ifthe coil has the number oftums N, the
cross-sectional area A , the mean length of core is 1 , the core permeability fl.,
derive the coil inductance L in term ofN, 1, permeability J..l and A. [6 marks]
- 3
SEE 2053
(b) Two identical V-shaped cores and associated winding are shown in Figure
Q2. The parameters are given as follows:
tc = 100 mm, g = 1 mm, Ilr = 500, A = 250 mm
2
, N = 500
i) Draw the magnetic equivalent circuit that represent this physical
structure [4 marks]
ii) Calculate the current that must be supplied to the series connected
windings in order to establish a flux density of 1.5 T in the air
gap. Neglect flux leakage and fringing effects [7 marks]
iii) If the magnetic circuit leakage factor (u) of 1.2 is taking into
consideration, re-calculate the value of current in Q2b (ii).
Neglect the fringing effect. [8 marks]
Figure Q2
S3. (a) Draw the flow of energy in an electromechanical energy conversion process
via a coupling magnetic field. [4 marks]
(b) In an electromagnetic system, functional relation between the current i in the
exciting coil, the position of armature x and the flux linkage Ais given by
-4
SEE 2053
Find the force on the armature as a function ofAand x. [7 marks]
(c) The magnetic circuit shown in Figure Q3 is made of high permeability steel
so that its reluctance can be negligible. The movable part is free to move
about an x-axis. The coil has 1000 turns, the area normal to the flux is (5 em
x 10 em), and the length ofa single air gap is 5 mm.
(i) Determine the force, Fm, for the current i = lOA. [7 marks]
(ii) The maximum flux density in the air gaps is to be limited to
approximately 1.0 Tesla to avoid excessive saturation of the steel.
Compute the maximum force. [7 marks]
+
e
~ e ~ e ~ e n c e
I posItIOn
Movable
part
Figure Q3
S4 (a) Sketch diagram of open and short-circuit test for power transformer and state
the equations of the parameter obtained from the test. [6 marks]
-5
SEE 2053
(b) A single-phase transformer 25 kVA, 22001230 V, is tested on open and short
circuit. The results of the test being as follows:
Open-circuit test: 2200 V, 0.4 A, 650 W, the readings on primary.
Short-circuit test 20 V, 80 A, 1 kW, the readings on secondary.
Determine
i) The parameters of the transformer equivalent circuit referred to
primary. [10 marks]
ii) The efficiency and voltage regulation on half load at power factor
0.85 lagging. [9 marks]
S5. (a) Briefly explain the following laws with regard to electrical machines.
i) Faraday's Law of Electromagnetic Induction [5 marks]
ii) Fleming's Left Hand Rule [5 marks]
(b) Describe the various losses incurred in a direct current machines [10 marks]
(c) The field circuit and the armature circuit can be interconnected in various
ways to provide a wide variety of performance characteristics. Draw and label
the various connections of a DC motor and its torque-speed characteristics.
[5 marks]
1 CONFIDENTIAL)
.1lIM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 2113
CONTROL: MODELLING AND
SIMULATION
DR. SHAHDAN BIN SUDIN
DR. ZUWAIRIE BIN IBRAHIM
DR. SALINDA BT BUYAMIN
MR. SHAHARUM BIN SULAIMAN
SEC 1SEE 1SEll SEL 1SEM 1SEP 1SET 1
SEW
01/02/03/05/06/07/08
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
2 MAY 2009
ANSWER QUESTION ONE (1) AND ANY OTHER THREE (3) QUESTIONS.
COVER
- 2
SEE 2113
Question 1
a) Provide a brief explanation on how to identify the system type and system order
from a transfer function. What are the benefits of knowing the type and the order
ofa system?
(4 marks)
b) A simple electrical network in Figure Q1b consists of a resistor (R), an inductor
(L) and a capacitor (C). By applying the Kirchhoffs first law,
i) Obtain the system transfer function Iis)/I(s).
ii) Draw the block diagram representing the electrical network.
(7 marks)
L
R
ill)
C ~
Figure Qlb
ie(t)
c) An electrical network G(s) is used in a closed-loop system to drive a plant Gp(s),
as shown in Figure Qlc, where R(s) is the input and C(s) is the output of the
system.
R(s)
+ C(s)
-
G(s) Gp(s)
Figure Qlc
- 3
SEE 2113
i) Find the closed-loop transfer function of the system if G(s) =~
s+l
1
and Gp(s) =-(-).
s s+2
(3 marks)
ii) For the system in part (i), determine the system order, the system type, the
damping ratio (j, the natural frequency (aJ
n
), the type of response and the
steady-state error (e
ss
) to a step input.
(6 marks)
d) In a frequency response experiment, a group of students have concluded that the
transfer function of an unknown system to be
C(s) 50
R(s) = S2 + las + 25
They wanted to analyze the system performance through a computer
simulation using the MATLAB software. Suggest a simple MATLAB m-file
to:
define the system,
compute the poles of the system,
plot the poles on s-plane,
plot the system response subjected to a unit step input command
[Hints: Use those available and commonly used commands in the MA TLAB]
(5 marks)
-4
SEE 2113
Question 2
a) For the following control systems, determine whether the system is an open loop
or a closed loop system and state whether the system is a kinetic control or a
process control:
i) Air-conditioner
ii) Electric toaster
iii) Escalator
iv) A solar panel tracking the sun movement across the sky
(6 marks)
b) A university wants to establish a control system model that represents the student
population as an output and the desired student population as an input. The
administration determines the rate of admission by comparing the current and
desired student population. The admissions office then uses this rate to admit
students.
i) Draw a functional block diagram showing the administration and the
admissions office as blocks of the system.
ii) Show the following signals: the desired student population, the actual student
population, the desired student rate as determined by the administration, the
actual student rate as generated by the admissions office, the dropout rate, and
the net of entry rate.
(10 marks)
c) Explain the three (3) mam performance measures when designing a control
system. Hence, explain the effect of not considering the performance measure
above in designing a passenger lift.
(9 marks)
- 5
SEE2113
Question 3
a) Explain the function of using the following components in a rotational mechanical
system:
i) gear box
ii) tacho generator
(4 marks)
b) Figure Q3b shows a simplified schematic diagram of a suspenSIOn system.
Consider the motion of the masses M] and M2 acting in the horizontal direction.
The displacements xJ(t) and X2(t) are measured from a reference position.
i) Draw the free body diagrams for both masses M] and M
2
.
(5 marks)
ii) Write down the differential equations of motion for the system.
(2 marks)
iii) Transform the differential equations of motion into s-domain, assuming zero
initial conditions.
(2 marks)
iv) Determine the transfer function relating the displacement X
2
(s) with the
applied force F(s)
(4 marks)
- 6
SEE 2113
c) Figure Q3c(i) shows a rotational mechanical system with gears, where the
numbers of gear teeth are given as Nj, N
2
and N3 as shown. The system can be
simplified to the equivalent schematic diagram without gears as shown in Figure
Q3c(ii). Determine the equivalent values for J
eq
, D
eq
and K
eq
Hence, find the
transfer function 6
1
(s) .
T(s)
(8 marks)
(i)
(ii)
Figure Q3c
- 7
SEE 2113
Question 4
a) Give two (2) advantages of using the signal flow graph approach in obtaining a
single transfer function of a system.
(3 marks)
b) Figure Q4b(i) shows the block diagram of a control system with multiple
feedback loops. By using the block diagram reduction method, re-arrange the
block diagram into the equivalent unity feedback loop configuration as shown in
Figure Q4b(ii).
(10 marks)
R(s)
+0---
1
10
--
s+l
~ ~
-
2
+
2 1
C(s)
-
-
s+4 s
+
+ +
(i)
R(s)
+ C(s)
Ge{s}
-
(ii)
Figure Q4b
- 8
SEE 2113
c)
i) Change the block diagram of a linear control system in Figure Q4c to its
equivalent signal flow graph.
ii) Then, using the Mason's gain fonnula, obtain the closed-loop transfer
function of the system.
(12 marks)
G
4
HI
+
R(s) + C(s)
+
+0-.
G]
G2 G
3

- - -
H2
Figure Q4c
- 9
SEE 2113
Question 5
a) Name all the performance specifications for a second order system.
(5 marks)
b) Consider the block diagram of the position servomechanism used in an antenna
tracking system shown in Figure Q5b. This system uses an electric dc motor to
rotate the radar antenna, which automatically tracks an aircraft. A unit step input
is used to investigate the performance of the antenna's tracking capability.
R(s) +
0.2
0.8s + 1
2
K -
s+l
- -
C(s)
Figure Q5b
i)
ii)
Obtain the closed loop transfer function of the system.
What is the value of the damping ratio (0 for the system if a
response is required?
(4 marks)
critically damped
(1 mark)
iii) For the damping ratio found in part (ii), determine the value of gain K and the
undamped natural frequency ((J)n).
(3 marks)
iv) Find the steady-state error (e
ss
) of the system using the value of gain K
obtained in part (iii).
(4 marks)
v) Suggest how the steady-state error Cess) of the system can be reduced.
(2 marks)
- 10
SEE 2113
vi) Find the settling time (T
s
) of the system.
(2 marks)
c) It is noted that the rotation of a radar antenna is very slow and the electric motor
needs to be changed in order to achieve a fast tracking response. The modified
system is shown in Figure Q5c. If the settling time required for the system is 0.5 s
and the damping ratio is equal to 1, find the values for K] and T.
(4 marks)
R(s)
1
SeTS +1)
C(s)
+
K]
-
Figure Q5c
I CONFIDENTIAL I
!lIM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 2253 / SEE 3253 / SZE 2253
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT
DR. AZLI BIN YAHYA
DR. RUBITA BT SUDIRMAN
DR. NORLAILI BT MAT SAFRI
MR. CAMALLIL BIN OMAR
MR. ISMAIL BIN ARIFFIN
MR. ABD HAMID BIN AHMAD
MR. MUHAMAD ARIF BIN ABDUL RAHIM
MDM. ISMAWATI BT ABDUL GHANI
MDM. NORHAFIZAH BT RAMLI
MDM. SUHANA BT MOHAMED SULTAN
SEB / SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET
SEW/SWB
01 / 02 / 03 / 04 / 05 / 06 / 07 / 08 / 09 / 10
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
26 APRIL 2009
ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS IN SECTION A (COMPULSORY) AND THREE (3)
FROM SECTION B.
COVER
Q.l
- 2
SEE 2253
SECTION A (Answer ALL questions)
(a) At middle frequency range, the external capacitors are assumed to be
short-circuited and the internal capacitances are assumed to be open-circuited to
simplify the ac analysis of the amplifier circuit. How do you justify these
assumptions? [3 marks]
(b) Explain why in the ac model for MOSFET the gate and source terminals
are open-circuited? [2 marks]
(c) The purpose of performing the ac analysis of an amplifier circuit is to find the gain,
input impedance, output impedance and the bandwidth. Why one still has to do
the DC analysis of the amplifier circuit? [2marks]
(d) Figure Ql(a) shows a cascode amplifier using n-channel D-MOSFET transistors.
Draw the mid-frequency ac equivalent circuit by completing Figure Ql(b). [5 marks]
+V
DD
V
GG
0---1
Vi o----J
Q2
V
O
Q2
QI
Ql
Figure Ql(a) Figure Ql(b)
- 3
SEE 2253
(e) Figure Ql(c) shows a simple differential amplifier circuit.
+Yc
c
Figure Ql(c)
(i) By means of a mathematical expressions, show how the common-mode
gain and the differential-mode gain can be detennined. [2 marks]
(ii) To obtain a higher CMRR, R
E
is replaced with a constant current
source. Why? [2 marks]
([) Figure Ql(d) shows a basic circuit ofan operational amplifier.
+Y
cc
y+
Yo
Y
-Y
EE
Figure Ql(d)
(i) In the linear application, the voltage at the non-inverting input is always
assumed to be equal to the voltage at the inverting input (y+ Y}
Explain why? [2 marks]
(ii) In the non-linear application, how the output voltage, V
o
is
detennined? [3 marks]
- 4
SEE 2253
(g) FigureQ1(e) is the block diagram of four topologies of an amplifier with a
negative feedback. Name the types of amplifier based on the labels W, X, Y
andZ. [4 marks]
+
Vi
+
Vf
A = ~
V,
w
+
+
A = ~
I I
x
+
Vi
A = ~
V,
y
z
Figure Ql(e)
Q.2
- 5
SEE 2253
SECTION B (Answer THREE questions only)
Referring to Figure Q2, the following parameters are given:
MOSFET: IDss = 5 rnA, Vp = VGS(OFF) == 4 V, C
gd
=4 pF, C
gs
== 15 pF,
VGSQ == 1.52 V and rd = 00.
BJT: V
ES
=0.7 V, ~ =50, VI == 26 mY, C
bc
=2 pF, C
be
== 10 pF and VA =00.
Notice that RD2 and R
E
are variable resistors used to control the amplifier's voltage gain.
Determine:
(a) I
cQ
. [3 marks]
(b) Draw the mid-frequency, hybrid-n AC equivalent circuit when the
amplifier has a minimum voltage gain. [5 marks]
(c) The minimum voltage gain of the amplifier. [5 marks]
(d) Draw the high-frequency, hybrid-n AC equivalent circuit when the
amplifier has a maximum voltage gain. [5 marks]
(e) The high cut-off frequency, f
H
, when the voltage gain is maximum. [7 marks]
-12 V
R
DJ
1 ill
R
3 R
CI
C
z
33 ill
1.3 kD
1 IlF
I
Vo
Rcz
Rt
0.5 kD
lOkD
leQ
Qz
CE
~
lOIlF
5.6kD
~
--1
1
560 0
+
R
z
2.2MD
R[
3.3 MD
Figure Q2
Q.3
- 6
SEE 2253
Figure Q3 shows a differential amplifier with a constant current source, BJT-Zener Diode.
Assume zener is ideal, VA = CI) and ~ = 90 for all transistors.
(a) Determine lEI. [5 marks]
(b) Draw the mid-frequency, hybrid-n AC equivalent circuit. [5 marks]
(c) Determine the differential-mode gain, Adm =~ , common-mode gain,
V
idm
A =~ and common-mode rejection ratio, CMRR in decibel. [12 marks]
em J
V
icm
(d) What happen if the zener diode is removed from the circuit? [3 marks}
Vee = +20V
Rc Rc
7.5 kG 7.5 kG
R
B
=0.5 kG R
B
= 0.5 kG
R
3
2.15 kG
-20V
R
r
2kG
VEE =
Figure Q3
Q.4
- 7
SEE 2253
(a) The instrumentation amplifier in Figure Q4(a) shows one of the subtractor amplifier
application. Based on the amplifier circuit, show that the output voltage,
V=(1 + ~ : J V A -Va)' [5 marks]
o
R
R
R
R
R
R
Figure Q4(a)
(b) Assume V
o
initially is in positive saturation (V
o
+sat). Sketch the output, V
o
of circuit in
Figure Q4(b).
[5 marks]
+15V
Vj= 10 sin wt (V) e:---1
-15V
R2= 2 kO
Figure Q4(b)
- 8
SEE 2253
(c) Referring to Figure Q4(c), detennine the output VOl, VOl, V
03
and Vo
4
. Write your
answers, sketch and label the output in the answer sheets provided on page 11 and page
12.
2kO
Vi =sin wt V
+15V
-
(i)
V
1
=4sn wt V
V
2
= 2sin wt V
'v'i
5
0
-5
20ms
(15 marks]
+15V
O.5kO
'vi =2 coswt V
VQ2
-15V
1kn
VOl
1kO
-
(ii)
2kO
+15V
1kO
V
03
1kO
-15V
1kO
-
( iii)
10kn
+15V
Vi 0
V04
t (ms)
-
(iv)
Figure Q4(c)
Q.5
Vi t
R
i
20 ill
20kD
- 9
SEE 2253
(a) Figure Q5(a) shows a block diagram of a negative feedback system.
X - +M r - X _ i - l ~
s A
Figure Q5(a)
(i) The main problem of an amplifier circuit without a feedback is stability.
Explain how a negative feedback can help stabilize the gain of an
amplifier. [3 marks]
(ii) Derive an expression for gain with feedback, A
f
in terms of A and ~ . [3 marks]
(iii) Shows that an expression in (ii) above will result in the gain with
feedback becomes smaller.
(b) A voltage-series feedback amplifier is shown in Figure Q5(b).
is
+
,
r
r
V
o
V
s tV I
1 ill R'r
I
I
10kD R
jf
v,li
Figure Q5(b)
Given that for an op-amp, A = 1 X 10
5
, R) = 500 kQ and Ro =0 Q.
(i) Determine the feedback factor, ~ .
(ii) Derive an expression for input resistance with feedback, Rjj' in terms of
R
i
, A and ~ . Hence determine the value of R
if
.
[3 marks]
[8 marks]
[8 marks]
X
f
I
- 10
SEE 2253
SIGNIFICANT EQUATIONS
A v", A ( R
L
]
v == == v(oc) Z R
In 0 + L
A ( R
L
X Zi ]=A ( Zi ;
vs V
s
v(oc) Zo+R
L
Rs+Z
j
v Rs+Z
j
f gm
T -2n:(C1[+C
fl
) - Jl
!1V
o
SR ==-V/lls
!1t
v
dm
VI = Vern +
2
V
dm
V2 = Vern -2
A - i'ill _ A ( Zi :
i - '. - v(oc) Z R
1
m
0 + L
i'ill A ( Zi X R, ] A ( R, ]
A
is
== -.- == v(oc) = j
Is Zo+R
L
Rs+Z; Rs+Zj
A = Pout = A A.
p v I
Pin
V0 = Adm V
jdm
+ A
em
V
iem
gm
I
o
I
1[R
E
+R
E
IE = I
o
+
RTH+I,,+R
E
C
Ml
=CbJ1-Ay)=Cgd(1-Ay)
V ( R J R =_0 =I 1+ E3 +_P
o i
o
0 R
E3
+I1[ +R
BB
I
o
CM, =C.{I- ;JcM, =c,,(I- ;J
ID=[D,,(I- J'
1
I
d
==-
Yos
k = 1
0
(00)
(Vos(on) - V
Th
Y
(V
GS
] JE
gm =gmo I-V =gmo -1
P oss
1
0
= k(Vos - V
Th
)2
210S
S
gmo=lVJ
gm == 2k(Vos - V
Th
) ==
V
I
o I
c
11
- 11
SEE 2253
Op-Amp Circuits Calculation
Val (V)
Sketch
Vi
2kn
.
V01
1 -
a ,.
.
..- .....
"". fV
"." I
_
Vi =
-15V
-sin wt (V)
-1
.....
V i ~
VCQ
-15V
V'
1kn
1kn ~
-.I..
Vi = -2 cos wt (V)
V
02
(V)
2 : . :..- .
. .
. .
. .
_ ~ < fVi
i: '.
A
t---- ---- '.
I:
I'
I
,
i
-2(
I :
.
:
"" "
".'
'.
Answer sheet for Figure Q4(c)
- 12
SEE 2253
111
1kn
V1:=::r-1
V2
1kn
1kn
VI = 4 sin wt (V)
V2 = 2 sin wt (V)
2kn
+15V
~ V I 1 J
VrnM
10kn
+15V
V04M
-
>-+---0 V04
5
IV I
'vi
-5 ,ill
5
0
-5
Answer sheet for Figure Q4(c)
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 2523
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD THEORY
ASSOC. PROF. DR. ABU SAHMAH BIN
MOHDSUPAAT
ASSOC. PROF. DR. NORAZAN BIN MOHD
KASSIM
DR. MOHD HANIFF BIN IBRAHIM
DR. MUHAMMAD RAMLEE BIN
KAMARUDIN
DR. YOU KOK YEOW
MDM. FATIMAH BT MOHAMAD
MDM. FAREHA BT ABDUL RAHMAN
SEB / SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET
SEW /SWB
01 /02/03/04/05/06/07 / 08 / 10
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
29 APRIL 2009
ANSWER ALL THE QUESTIONS
COVER
SEE 2523
2
1. (a) From the potential derivation formula: V = - SE.dl , show that scalar electric
potential can also be defined by:
E = -V'V (4 marks)
(b)
(5 marks)
(2 marks)
A circular loop of radius b carrying uniform charge density, PI elm is
located at z = 0 plane. A point charge Q is located on the loop axis at a
distance h from the plane of the loop. Starting with the potential difference
formula, determine the force on the point charge Q when:
(i) h b
(ii) h=oO
(c) Show that the maximum IPul occurs at:
(5 marks)
(d) By plotting the graph of force versus distance h, discuss the findings
QI(b) and (c) above. (4 marks)
SEE 2523
3
Q2 (a) A parallel plate transmission line has a width 11', plate separation d and has a
dielectric constant E
r
wh ich fills the space between the plates, as shown 111
Fig. Q2. It is connected to a power supply with potential difference V.
+
v
Fig. Q2
Use Gauss Law to show that the charge stored on the plate per unit length can
be given as
Q/f = ErEoEw
and hence show that the capacitance per unit length of the line IS
ErEOEw
Cjf=-
. d
(4 marks)
(b) Given w = 1em, d = 1mm, E
r
= 2.5. If the dielectric breakdown occurs at
350 kV/cm, find the values of
(i) the capacitance per unit length; (2 marks)
(ii) the maximum polarization ofthe given dielectric.
(4 marks)
(c) Prove that the total bound charge of the above transmission line is zero.
(5 marks)
(d) Laplace/Poisson's equation was another method used to find for capacitance
for the parallel plate in Fig. Q2. Analyze the differences between these 2
methods. (5 marks)
SEE 2523
4
Q3 (a) A coaxial cable is made up of an inner conductor of radius a and an outer
conductor with internal radius b and outer radius c (c > b > a). A current I
flows inside the inner conductor in the z direction and an opposite current
flows in the outer conductor. The region between the inner and outer
conductor is made of an in homogenous material having permeabil ity
f.l = 2f.lo/
r
.
(i) Determine the magnetic flux density in all the regions of the coaxial
cable. (6 marks)
(ii) Determine the magnetized surface current density on the surface r = a.
(4 marks)
(iii) Calculate the magnetic energy per unit length stored within the
inhomogeneous material. (4 marks)
(iv) By using the answer from Q3a(iii) above, determine the inductance per
unit length in the region between conductors. (3 marks)
(b) Discuss the effects on the magnetic flux density in the region between
conductors if the permeability of the magnetic material is directly
proportional to radius r. (3 marks)
SEE 2523
5
Q4 (a) Show clearly by using suitable mathematical equations the difference in
Maxwell's equations for static fields and time varying fields in free space in
its differential forms. (5 marks)
(b) Verify whether the following electric and magnetic fields
E = sin x sin t y (V1m)
_ 2
H =-cos x cos t i
flo
(Aim)
satisfy Maxwell's equations in free space. (5 marks)
(c) In free space, the magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave is given by
H= O.4wco cos(wt - SOx) i (Aim)
Find the electric field and displacement current density in the free space.
State clearly any assumptions made in the derivation. (6 marks)
(d) Explain the existence of displacement current density in a dielectric material
due to an applied electric field. (4 marks)
SEE 2523
6
Q5 (a) By applying suitable assumptions and equations, show that the wave
attenuation and phase constants are depicting equal formulation for the case
of propagation in good conductors. (5 marks)
(b) Based on the microwave measurement done on a copper bar at IMHz
frequency, the following observations have been recorded:
Intrinsic impedance = 28.1 L45()
Skin depth = 5 m
Determine the following:
(i) Conductivity of copper bar:
(ii) Phase velocity of the propagated wave in the medium. (7 marks)
(c) Light propagation in rectangular optical waveguide structure (Fig. Q5) can be
regarded as uniform plane wave propagation. The waveguide material is
assumed to have the following parameters: Cr = 80, ~ r = 1, (j = 0.4 S/m.
Laser pulse is then coupled into the waveguide structure at the position z = 0,
in which +z direction is considered to be the direction of propagation. As a
result, the following magnetic field value has been measured at z = 10m.
H(lD, t) = y20cos(2rr x 10
3
t + lS
0
)mA/m
(i) Detelmine the general fOlmulations of E(z, t) and H(z, t)
(ii) Find the average power of the propagated wave at z = 20 m.
(8 marks)
Fig. Q5
SEE 2523
7
MAGNETOSTATIC FIELD
I ELECTROSTATIC FIELD
- fldtxal? - J dQ
Coulomb's Law E = a
R Biot-Savart Law H = 2
4JrE
o
R
4nR
Ampere Circuital law H . de =('11 Gauss's Law D' ds = Qel1
Force on a moving charge F = Q(u x B)
Force on a point charge F =EQ
Force on a current element F = Ide x B
Electric field for finite line charge Magnetic field for finite current
- I (. '):h
H = - slna
2
+ sma
l
'f'
I 4JrE
o
r r
E = +sina,)+ i(cosa
2
-cosa
l
)}
4.nr
Electric field for infinite line charge Magnetic field for infinite current
-- I
- PI
H=---
A
2Jrr
, E=--r
A
I 2nE
o
r
I Electric flux density D = EE
Magnetic flux density B = 'lH
Electric flux 1.fJE = Q= D.ds Magnetic flux '1JJm =f B ds
Divergence theorem D' ds = J(\7. D )dv Stoke's theorem H de = J(\7 x H)' ds
S I' I s
Potential difference VAn = - f
A
E. de
n
Absolute potential V - f dQ
4JrEoR
Gradient of potential ---+ E = -V'V
Magnetic potential, (4) B = V' x A
Energy stored in an electric field Energy stored in a magnetic field
W = Ht/v
WI: = J(D' E'yiv
111 2 ,.
\'
"
I Total current in a conductor
I = f.7 ds where] = oE
I Polarization vector P = D- EoE Magnetization vector M =XmH
where XIII =!1r -1
Bound surface charge density Magnetized surface current density
_po n
] = Mxn
P.I'h
\'In
Volume surface cEarge density Magnetized volume current density
=-\7'P J
!Ii
=\7xM
Pvh
Electrical boundary conditions
Magnetic boundary conditions
Dill - D
211
== P" and Ell = E
21
Bin =B
2n
and H
I1
- H
2
/ =J,
j!
Resistance R =-
Inductance L = A where A ='ljJIIIN
as
I
Capacitance C = g
V
ah
Poisson's equation V'
2
V= _ Pv
E
Laplace equation v
2
v = 0
Maxwell equation \7. D = P, V' x E = Maxwell equation V" B =0, V x H =J
,
SEE 2523
8
TIME VARYING FIELD
Maxwell equation V- D = Pv
Gauss's Law for electric field
- aB
VxE=-- Faraday's Law
at
V-B =0
Gauss's Law for magnetic field
- - aD
VxH=J+ Ampere Circuital Law
at
Characteristics of wave propagation in lossy medium (a;z! O,fl = flofl"c =oc,)
Electric field, E(z,t) = cos(wt - f3z)x
Magnetic field, H(z,t) = cos(wt - f3z + e,I)Y
Attenuation constant a OJ) + -I
Phase constant
Intrinsic impedance
Skin depth
Poynting theorem
Poynting vector so=ExH
Average power
p -2(c e
(/I'g = 217 e cos 'I
SEE 2523
9
Kecerunan "Gradient"
Vf = xa/ + y af + zaf
ax ay az
Vf =paf + af + zaf
ar I' a az
Vf=pa
f
+ eaf + ~ af
ar I' ao rsinO a
Kecapahan "Divergence"
- aA aA aA
V.A =_I +_Y +_z
ax ay az
V' A=! [acrAJ] +! aA +aA
z
I' ar I' a az
v, A= _1 [acr2 AJ] + _1_ [a
C
A8 SinO)] + _1_ aA
1'2 ar rsinO ao rsinO a
Ikal "Curl"
Laplacian
I I CONFIDENTIAL
!lIM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 3113 / SZE 3133
CONTROL : ANALYSIS & DESIGN
ASSOC. PROF. DR. ZAHARUDDIN BIN
MOHAMED
ASSOC. PROF. ZAMANI BIN MD ZAIN
SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM
01 / 02 / 03 / 04
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
28 APRIL 2009
COVER
2
SEE 3113
Question 1
a) Give an advantage and a limitation of the Routh-Hurwitz criterion over the root locus
method in determining stability of a control system.
[4 marks]
b) Determine the stability ofa unity negative feedback closed-loop system where T(s) is the
closed loop transfer function of the system. Indicate the number of closed-loop poles in the
right half plane, left half plane and on the jw-axis of the s-plane.
T(s) = 2(s + 2)
S6 + S5 + 4s
4
+ 2s
3
+ 7S2 + S + 2
[8 marks]
c) Determine the characteristic equation for the unity feedback control system as shown in
Figure Q1. What is the range of gain K for a stable system.
R(s) +
C(s)
-
(s+4)K
s(s+5)(s+7)(S2+2s+2)
Figure Q1
[13 marks]
3
SEE 3113
Question 2
A unity feedback control system has an open-loop transfer function:
K
G(s) = --------;:---
s(s + 3)(S2 + 2s +2)
a) What is a root locus?
[2 marks]
b) Draw the root locus of the system on a graph paper with all relevant refinements and label
your graph completely. Show all the intermediate constructions.
[18 marks]
c) Locate a point on the locus that gives the dominant closed loop poles with C; = 0.5.
Determine the value of K at this point.
[5 marks]
4
SEE 3113
Question 3
a) Briefly discuss the following controllers in tenus of their applications and implementation
in control systems.
1. Proportional-Integral (PI) Controller
11. Proportional-Derivative (PD) Controller
111. Proportional-Integral- Derivative (PID) Controller
[3 marks]
b) A process control is represented by a block diagram ~ n Figure Q3 where R(s) and C(s) are
the input and output of the system respectively. The system operates at a percent overshoot
of 16.3 % and the closed-loop poles are obtained at s = -0.71 j1.27 and s = -5.59.
s) R(s) +
-
K
1
C(
s(s + 2)(s + 5)
Figure Q3
1. Discuss the validity of the second-order approximation.
[2 marks]
11. Calculate the settling time, the peak time and the steady-state error of the system.
[5 marks]
111. To achieve a quality product, the system is required to have the following
specifications:
Three-fold improvement in the settling time
Zero steady-state error.
As a control engineer, you are required to design a controller to meet the
specifications.
[12 marks]
IV. Find all the constants (example: K
D
) involved and show how to implement the
controller.
[3 marks]
5
SEE 3113
Question 4
A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function as follows:
G(s) = (s +1)
s(l +O.4s)(l +O.ls)
a) Using the straight-line approximation method, draw the Bode plot of the open loop system.
Determine the phase crossover frequency, the gain crossover frequency, the gain margin
and the phase margin.
[18 marks]
b) The phase margin of the system can be varied by introducing the gain K into the system as
in Figure Q4. Using the gain adjustment approach, determine the value of gain K that
corresponds to 60 phase margin.
R(s) c(s)
+
K
G(S)
-
Figure Q4
[7 marks]
6
SEE 3113
Question 5
An aircraft roll control system is shown in Figure Q5. The torque on the aileron generates a roll
rate. The resulting roll angle is then used to control the feedback system.
Aircraft
Controller
Actual
Desired
4
roll +
roll
angle
s
s+2
angle
Figure Q5
a) Draw the Bode plot of the open loop transfer function and determine gain margin and phase
margm.
[9 marks]
b) Design a lead compensator for the system so that the static velocity error constant K
v
is 20
sec-I, the phase margin is at least 50, and the gain margin is at least 10 dB.
[16 marks]
CONFIDENTIAL
!lIM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 3223 / SZE 3413
MICROPROCESSOR
DR. MUHAMMAD NASIR BIN IBRAHIM
DR. MUHAMMAD NADZIR BIN MARSONO
DR. IZZELDIN IBRAHIM MOHAMED
MR. KAMAL BIN KHALIL
SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM/ SET / SEW
011 02 / 03 / 04
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
27 APRIL 2009
I1\1STRUCTION TO CANDIDATE
1. ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.
2. BOOKSINOTES ARE ALLOWED.
3. CALCULATORS ARE ALLOWED.
COVER
THIS SCRIPT CONSISTS OFTEN (10) PAGES ONLY
Question 1
a Use the following initial conditions to answer the questions that follow. All register and
memory contents are in hexadecimal.
Registers
AO 00001000 DO
D1
D2
D3
SR
ABCD1234
A1 00001004 00000004
A3 00007002 99991111
A4 00004000 FFFFFFFF
A7 00001008 0010
Memory Location
Address Contents
00001000 OA9C
00001002 B278
00001004 4FC3
00001006 36B4
No. Instruction
01 XNZVC
1 MOVE.L $FC (A1, Dl. W) ,D1
02 XNZVC
2 ROR.B #5, D2.
PC XNZVC
3 JSR (AO)
02 XNZVC
4 MULU 4 (AO) ,D2
03 XNZVC
5 XOR.L D2,D3
Determine the contents of the registers and flags that get modified after the above 68000
instructions are executed independently.
[10 marks]
2
b Determine the contents of memory locations $3000 through $3007 after the following 68000
instruction are executed in sequence. Provide your answer in the table below; for each cell,
your answer should be in the form of four hexadecimal symbols, e.g. "03AB".
MOVE.W #-l,DO
MOVEA.L #-S,A3
MOVEM.L A3/DO,$3000
Address Contents
$3000
$3002
$3004
$3006
[8 marks]
c Given that [M($200A)] = $200B200D200F0024, and data registers D5 and D6 are initially
cleared. Determine the contents of registers D5 and D6 after the following 68000
instructions are executed in sequence. Your answer should be in form of eight hexadecimal
symbols, e.g. "0123ABCD".
MOVEA.L #$2011,A4
MOVE.W -3 (M) ,DS
MOVE.B (M) ,D6
IDS = I
D6 =
[2 marks]
3
-------
QUESTION 2
Some register and memory contents in hexadecimal of a 68K system are given in Figure Q2. Based
on these values, answer questions (a) to (e). All questions are unrelated.
Registers
D5 0012 3000
D6 0000 0004
D7 9999 7777
AO 0012 3000
A1 0012 3002
A2 0012 3004
Memory
Address Contents
$123000 AABB
$123002 7788
$123004 CCDD
$123006 3344
$123008 5566
Figure Q2
(a) What is the content of memory location $123000 and AO in hex after this instruction is
executed?
[4 marks]
MOVE.B D6, (AO)+
$123000 I--------.j
AO
(b) What is the content of register A1 and register D6 in hex after this instruction is
executed?
[4 marks]
MOVE.L (Al)+, D6
Al 1 _
D6
(c) What is the content of register D5 and register D6 in hex after this sequence of
instructions is executed?
[4 marks]
SWAP D5
EXG D5, D6
D51c----__
D6 _ L.
(d) What is the content of register A2 and memory location $123002 in hex after this
4
sequence of instructions is executed?
CLR.B D7
MOVE.W D7, -(A2)
[4 marks]
$ 1 2 3 0 ~ \r--------I
(e) Write assembler directives to initialize memory locations as shown in Figure Q2.
[4 marks]
5
Question 3
a) What is the machine code for the assembly language BSR SUB2 found in the
program below
ORC $2000
$2000 BSR SUBl
ORC $3000
$3000 SUBI NOP
END
(2 points]
b) Write a program starting at address $5000 that perform the following equation. All
numbers and registers are signed number.
{ quo'i",' [(Dl.B + D2. WI' /D3 . B ] +25
when D3.B > -5
DO .L
O.5( Dl.B + D2.W) when otherwise
[10 points]
6
c) Figure 3.0 shows a flow chart that performs the equation below
Z = sqrt (X2 + Y2)
Write the corresponding MC68000 assembly program. Assume all the registers are word
size. X, Y and Z are defined variable reside in the memory.
[8 marks]
DO<-X
DI<- Y
Exchange
DO,Dl
D2 <- DO
D3 <- DO
D2 <- D2/8
Dl <- D1I2
DO <- DO
D2
Exchange
Dl,D3
Figure 3.0
7
Question 4 [20 marks]
(a) Sketch the partial decoding circuit for the memory map given in figure 4a(i). Use 74138 decoder
IC symbol in figure 4a(ii)
completely labeled.
$000000
$200000
$600001
$800000
$AOOOOO
A
B
C
74138
Gl
:; G2
... A
..
in your circuit design. The decoding circuit diagram must be
(4 marks)
TWO ROMs
of 2764
TWO RAMs
(Each RAM is 16Kbytes)
SWITCHES (ODD)
LEOS (EVEN)
Ultl.bK
DEVICES
Figure 4a(i)
YO I
I"'"
Yl ~
Y2
Y3
I
I"'"
I
I"'"
Y4 ....
Figure 4a(ii)
Y5 I"'"
Y6 I::
I""
Y7 I-
r
(b) Sketch the read/write control logic gate circuit using two-input OR gates to generate the output
of LORD*, UPRD*, LOWR*, UPWR* as illustrated in figure 4b. You may use inverter to
complete the design. (3 marks)
LORD*
LDS* READ AND
UPRD*
WRITE
UDS*
CONTROL
LOWR*
Figure 4b
LOGIC UNIT
RIW*
UPWR*
(c) Write a 68000 delay subroutine for the pseudocode as described in figure 4c below to generate a
some delay.
start subroutine
counter=lOOOOO;
while (counter >0) do
counter:= counter -1;
end subroutine
(3 marks)
Figure 4c
8
(d) A microprocessor system comprises the basic computing elements plus four toggle switches,
eight push button switches, eight common cathode LEDs and a common-cathode 7 segment
display. The four toggle switches provide the selectable operating modes. Table 4d(i) describes
the selectable modes of the toggle switches which are labeled as SWO. The eight push-button
switches are labeled with PSW. The addresses for the devices in this system are shown in figure
4d(ii). The system uses a 10 MHz crystal oscillator.
Mode Toggle switches (SWO)
3 2 1 0
Operating Mode
1 0 0 0 1 All eight LEDS blinking
2 0 0 1 0
.
Read push button switches (PB) and display the
pressed switch position
4 0 1 0 0 Blare a Speaker with a 1 KHz sound
8 1 0 0 0 None
Table 4d(i)
Address (Hex) Device Remarks
$000000 ROM Two 8 Kbytes
$100000 RAM . Two 16 Kytes
I
$400000 SWO Four toggle switches
$400001 PSW Eight push button switches
$600000 LEDs Eight common cathode LEDs
$800001 7-Segment One common cathode 7-segment display
$AOOOOO Speaker An 8.0 speaker
Figure 4d(ii)
For the described system as above, write a 68000 subroutine program to allow the system to
perform each of the following tasks in a separate module answer.
(Note: Consider each task is independent to each other)
(i) The subroutine performs mode 1 where all LEDs blink on and off continuously at a certain
speed interval .
(Note: The delay subroutine is given in part (c) ) (4 marks)
(ii) The subroutine has to perform two mode selection either mode 2 or mode 4. Mode 2 is to
display the pressed push button position on the 7-segment device, for example, a 0 is
displayed on the 7-segment if the first switch of PSW (PSWO) is pressed, a 1 is displayed
on the 7-segment if the PSW1 is pressed and similarly for the rest. Mode 4 is to blare the
speaker with a 1 KHz sound. However for this part (ii), only mode 2 program needs to be
written. Mode 4 program is exempted from program construction. Use subroutine to
construct mode 2 function. Only one push button switch is allowed to be pressed at a time.
(6 marks)
9
Question 5
(20 marks)
a) Given the following before an exception occurs. [SSP]=$00008lFA, [PC]=$000A2344,
[SR]=0314. Give the new contents of SSP and the stack itself.
[2 points]
b) Given the following program and the M68000 exception table (given as appendix)..
ORG $0000
DC.L $2000
DC.L $05FO
DC.L $0680
DC.L $8000
ORG $0014
DC.L $0600
ORG $OOlC
DC.L $0640
ORG $0084
DC.L $0680
i) Give the starting addresses for RESET and ADDRESS ERROR exception handlers.
[2 points]
ii) What is the name of exceptions that are located at addresses $600, $640, and $680?
[3 points]
iii) Write a handler for the divide-by-zero exception that performs the following. An
error message will be displayed on an LCD device served by TRAP #2 where an
ASCII character is stored temporarily in D7. The error message is a NULL
terminated ASCII string pointed by A3. The current content ofD7 must be stored in
the stack before runnjng the handler.
[7 points]
10
c) The MC68000 was in the process of executing an 2-word length instruction at address
$00400400. Given that [SR]=$0300 and [SP]=$00004000 when the instruction was
executed.
i) What is the interrupt priority mask set for the system?
[2 points]
ii) What interrupt levels will be serviced by the processor?
[2 points]
iii) What will be the content of SP and SR as a result of interrupt signals IPL(2:0)=0IO?
[2 points]
11
I CONFIDENTIAL I
!LIM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 32631 SEE 4213
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
MR. AD. RAHIM BIN AD. RAHMAN
SEB 1SEll SEM
01/10
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
26 APRIL 2009
THIS EXAMINAnON BOOKLET CONSISTS OF 10 PAGES INCLUDING THE FRONT
COVER
2
SEE3263
Ql
(a) For any regulator circuit briefly explain with the aid of circuit diagram, mathematical
expression and (or) graph to the following:
(i) The Line Regulation. [2 marles]
(ii) The Load Regulation. [2 marks]
(iii) The Temperature Coefficient. [2 marks]
(iv) Mathematically express the total changes in output voltage due to the changes in
output current, input voltage and temperature. [4 marks]
(b) The regulator circuit in Figure Q1 has the following values:
Pl=50 for transistor QI, P2=200 for transistor Q2,
Vj=30V, VREF=2V, RoA=2Kn, R2=IKn,
R
3
=lOKn, V
o
=24V, Fold-back output current, 1FB=IOA,
Short-circuit output current, 1sc=5A and V
BE
(0N)=O.7V.
Calculate:
(i) R
I
. [2 marks]
(ii) Rsc. [3 marks]
(iii) ~ . [3 marks]
(iv) 1C3 when Io=1FB. [3 marks]
(v) 1
C3
when Io=1
sc
. [4 marks]
3
SEE3263
V
REF
+
V
S2
T
+
!
-
I
C3
Q3
R3 Rsc
-1
0
R1
+
Va
R2
R4
R
L
-
Figure Ql
4
SEE3263
Q2
(a) Power audio amplifier is used to drive high load current. Briefly explain with the aid
of circuit diagram, mathematical expression and (or) graph to the following:
(i) Class A amplifier. [2 marks]
(ii) Class B amplifier. [2 marks]
(iii) Thermal runway. [2 marks]
(iv) Heat-sink. [2 marks]
(v) Crossover distortion. [2 marks]
(b) Refer to Figure Q2.
The following values are associated with the circuit in Figure Q2:
Vcc = 24V, Rl =lOKn, R
L
=80, Vi=Vip sinrot volts
For Ql and Q2 : IVBE(ON) I=2V and other transistors IVBE(ON) I=O.7V,
VCE(sat)=2V, RaJC =5CfW, Racs=1CfW, TJmax=125C,
Calculate:
(i) R2. [3 marks]
(ii) The power conversion efficiency, 11 at maximum output power, Po(max) [4 marks]
(iii) The maximum power dissipation, PD(max). [4 marks]
(iv) The heat sink (RasA) required for Q1 and Q2. [4 marks]
5
SEE3263
+V
ee
R3
01
R5
C1
02
rv Vi
R6
C2
-Vee
Figure Q2
7
SEE3263
Q4
(a) For any electronic frequency filters briefly explain by some examples from
electronic circuits, mathematical expressions and (or) graphs to the following:
(i) Transfer function. [2 marks]
(ii) Pass Band, Stop Band and Transition Band. [2 marks]
(iii) Express the relationship between the filter orders and the gradient of the
magnitude-frequency plot's slope. [2 marks]
(iv) Draw the shape of the Butterworth magnitude-frequency response and state its
advantages? [2 marks]
(v) Draw the shape of the Chebyshev magnitude-frequency response and state its
advantages? [2 marks]
(b) Refer to Figure Q4.
(i) Derive the transfer function of the circuit. What type of filter is this? [5 marks]
(ii) Deduce the design equations i.e. gain in the pass-band, natural frequency and
Q factor. [5 marks]
(iii) If f
o
=100kHz, C=1OOnF, R) =1Oill and Q=10, calculate other component values
in the circuit. [5 marks]
R
R
c
1
c
2R
1
Figure Q4
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
lIllY!
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 3423
FUNDAMENTALS OF POWER SYSTEM
ASSOC. PROF. DR. AZHAR BIN
KHAIRUDDIN
SEE I SEI
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
27 APRIL 2009
1. ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.
2. QUESTION 1 MUST BE ANSWERED.
3. SELECT ANY THREE (3) OUT OF QUESTIONS 2 THROUGH 6.
COVER
-2
SEE 3423
Ql. Answer the following sub-questions by considering the relevant aspects only within a
suitable examination time.
(a) Elaborate on three advantages and two disadvantages of the interconnected
system normally used in power system.
[5 marks]
(b) What is the effect on the values of the per unit parameters if the nominal voltage
of the system is not used as the base voltage? Prove your answer by giving an
example.
[5 marks]
(c) Discuss briefly and clearly the reason behind the need for electricity supplier to
charge consumers for peak demand and low power factor.
[5 marks]
(d) Explain briefly but clearly the applications of different types of models typically
used to represent transmission lines in power system analysis.
[5 marks]
(e) Describe the principle of electricity generation using (i) synchronous generator
and (ii) storage component such as batteries.
[5 marks]
Q2. (a) (i) Sketch a schematic diagram of a typical part of an electrical power supply
network.
[2 marks]
(ii) Name and state the function of the three major parts of the electric power
system.
[3 marks]
(iii) Discuss the practical voltages most common for each of the major part
mentioned in (ii) above. What factors limit these voltages?
[6 marks]
(b) (i) Discuss most important environmental problems usually associated with
power industry.
[4 marks]
(ii) How are these problems minimised?
[2 marks}
.,
-.)
SEE 3423
(c) (i) Name three (3) electricity providers in Malaysia
[3 marks]
(ii) What are the operating voltages of National Grid in Peninsular, Sabah and
Sarawak?
[3 marks]
(iii) Name and discuss briefly anyone of legislative framework (regulations,
standards or codes) established to govern electricity supply industry in
Malaysia.
[2 marks]
Q3. (a) List two (2) advantages of per unit compared to normal unit application for the
analysis of three phase power system.
[4 marks]
(b) A generator has reactance of 0.25 p.u. based on 18 kV 500 MVA. The generator
is connected to a power system that uses base values of 20 kV 100 MVA.
Calculate
(i) reactance of the generator in ohm, and
(ii) the reactance in per unit based on 20 kV 100 MVA base values.
[5 marks]
(c) A three phase power system is shown in Figure Q3(c). Each reactance value given in
per unit is based on its' component rating as follows:
Generator,Gl 100 MVA, 11 kV,X
G
= 1.0p.u
Transformer, T1 50 MVA, 111132 kV, X
Tl
= 10%
Transmission line 100 MVA, 132 kV, X
Tp
= 100 ohm/km/phase.
Transformer T2 50 MVA, 132/33 kY, X
n
= 12%
Bus bar A
Gl T1 T2
Load
Transmission line
SOMW
p.f 0.8 lagging
Figure Q3(c)
-4
SEE 3423
Using 100 MVA, 11 kV at generator as the general base,
(i) Draw the reactance diagram in per unit system.
(ii) If the voltage at the load needs to be fixed at 30 kV, calculate the generator
terminal voltage in kilovolt.
(iii) Calculate fault current at transmission line (in ampere) when a three phase
fault occurs at bus bar A.
f16 marks]
Q4. (a) Explain the basic concept related to generator control in order for the generation
to fulfill the load demands for real and reactive power.
[6 marks]
(b) State mam components and explain operating principles for one (1) of the
following generating stations:
(i) Thermal turbine generating station, or
(ii) Hydro generating station, or
(iii) Gas turbine generating station.
[6 marks]
(c) Discuss in general the two constraints in implementing electrical generation using
renewable energy sources.
[4 marks]
(d) The dam catchment area for a hydroelectric station covers an area of 2 square km
with water capacity of 5 million cubic meter. Water head for the dam is 50 m.
The turbine and generator efficiencies are 85% and 95% respectively. It is knovm
that water density is 1000 kg/m
3
and constant of gravitational acceleration is 9.81
I
mls
2
.
(i) Calculate total electrical energy in kWh that can be generated by the station.
[3 marks]
(ii) If an electrical load of 15000 kW is connected to the station for a duration
of 4 hours, obtain the drop in water level of the dam.
[6 marks]
-5
SEE 3423
Q5. (a) The High Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) lines are typically used in two
situations. List down both said situations and explain briefly anyone of them
[5 marks]
(b) A 50 Hz three phase transmission line is arranged as a two conductor bundled line
for each phase, as shown in Figure Q3(b). The horizontal spacing D is Sm. Each
conductor of the bundle has a diameter of 2.5cm and the distance d between the
centre of adjacent conductor of each phase is 30cm. each phase group shares the
total current and charge equally and the line is completely transposed.
, , , ,
d d d
:'41 ~ ' :. ~ : :
I
.. ..:
I
I
I
, ,
I I I
,
I I
0
,
0
r=2.5em
0 0
r = 2.5 em
0 0
r=2.5em
I I I
~ , , ,
,
~ ,
I I
'.
D=5m
I
D=5m
I
Figure Q5(b)
Determine:
(i) the line inductive reactance per phase per km.
(ii) capacitive susceptance per phase per km to neutral.
Note: flo = 4n x 10-
7
Him and 8
0
=8.85 X 10-
12
F/m.
[10 markah]
(c) A three phase 50 Hz transmission line with a length of 200 km is connected to a
load of 60 MW with unity power factor at 132 kV. The line conductor has series
parameter of 0.24 + j0.47 Q/km and shunt parameter of 3.75 x 10-6 mho/km.
Calculate
(i) the sending end current and voltage using rc-circuit representations for the
line,
(ii) line efficiency, and
(iii) voltage regulation.
[10 marks]
---
---
-6
SEE 3423
Q6. (a) (i) Explain briefly what is load curve?
[2 marks]
(ii) Demonstrate how a load duration curve can be derived from any given load
curve.
[3 marks]
b) Daily load duration curve of an area is given in Figure Q6. The peak demand is
1000 MW.
LOAD (0/0)

I I 1 I I I \ I I I
1_ ; ! I L l- 1 L. l .1 _
-' : 1; I I ,I : : !
70-
-- : 1 I I J I I I ,
6:- ----+-----1-----..;-----t------1----
I
.--.-..;------f---
-- I ! l l : ! 1 !!
:, (\ -----t-- ------+--
1 I I 1 I 1 I I I
I : I l I 1 \ I
.:( I
-,-- I IiI ! I 1 ; I
31..; --
:1 ?Il .- ! . ......-. ! ...L I :I- -I...... I ...... ! ... i 1 __ __
- - I I l I : \ 1 I
.- I 1 I I \ I \ 1 I
:0
I \ 1 I I 1 I l I
I I f r ! til I
I]
I 1 ! I I ! ! l j
I
10 2: 3: 40 50 be 70 80 9C lOG
DURATION
Figure: Q6: Daily load duration curve
(i) What is its base load?
[1 mark]
(ii) Calculate the amount of energy supplied daily
[4 marks]
(iii) Determine its daily load factor
[3 marks]
c) (i) Explain the following terms:
Capacity charge.
Usage Charge.
[2 marks]
(ii) A factory is operating with a constant load of 2500 kW from 7.00 a.m. to
1] .00 p.m. for 26 days in a 30 days month. During the remaining hours of
each working day and for the whole day on Sundays, the load drops to a
constant 100 kW.
-7
SEE 3423
Calculate the electricity charges of the factory for the month if the factory
obtains its electricity at medium voltage with Tariff E1. Should the
management opt for TariffE2 instead?
The tariffs are given in Table Q6.
Peak period is from 08:00 to 22:00.
Off-peak period is from 22:00 to 08:00.
Table Q6: Tariff Rates
ITariff Category Unit Rates
Tariff E1: Medium Voltage
General Industrial Tariff
For each kW of maximum
demand per month
RM/kW 17.30
For all units
Sen/kWh 19.8
TariffE2: Medium Voltage
peak/off-peak Industrial
Tariff
For each kW of maximum
demand during peak period
RM/kW 21.70
p
For all units during peak
eriod
For all units during off-peak
Sen/kWh 20.8
period Sen/kWh 12.8
[10 marks]
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
!lIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 3433
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
DR. MAKBUL ANWARI
SEE
01/02
2 HOIlRS 30 MINUTES
30 APRIL 2009
COVER
SEE 3433
-2
Question 1
(a) The 'A-i relationship for an electromagnetic system is given by
ti
,,1,=_1_
lag
which is valid for the limits 0 < i < 4A and 0.04 < g < O.lm. For current i = 2A and air
gap length g = 0.06 m, find the mechanical force on the moving part.
(8 marks)
(b) The magnetic circuit shown in Figure QI is made of high permeability steel so that its
reluctance can be negligible. The movable part is free to move about an x-axis. The coil
has 1000 turns, the area normal to the flux is (5 em x 10 em), and the length of a single
air gap is 5 mm.
(i) Derive an expression for the coil inductance, L, as a function of air gap, g. (5
marks)
(ii) Determine the force, Fm, for the current i =lOA. (6 marks)
(iii) The maximum flux density in the air gaps is to be limited to approximately 1.0
Tesla to avoid excessive saturation of the steel. Compute the maximum force.
( 6 marks)
+
e
Reference
position
Movable
part
Figure QI
SEE 3433
-3
Question 2
(a) Describe briefly shunt, series and compound DC machine based on the connection of
field circuit and armature circuit. (6
marks)
(b) A six-pole DC machine has an armature of radius 25 cm and effective length of 50 cm.
The poles cover 75% of the armature periphery. The armature winding consists of 66
coils, each coil having ten turns. The coils are accommodated in 66 slots. The average
flux density under each pole is 0.8 T. The armature is lap-wound and it is rotated at 1500
rpm by prime mover.
(i) Determine the armature constant, K
a
. (4 marks)
(ii) Determine the induced voltage in each coil and the induced armature voltage.
(6 marks)
(iii) Determine the current in each coil and electromagnetic torque developed when
the armature current is 500 A. (3 marks)
(iv) Determine the power developed by the armature. (3 marks)
(v) Draw a simple equivalent coil representation. Show clearly the coil current and
armature current. (3 marks)
SEE 3433
-4
Question 3
(a) Draw the speed (n) - torque (T) characteristic of the series motor, compound motor and
shunt motor. Briefly explain these speed-torque characteristics. (6
marks)
(b) A 10 kW, 100 V, 1000 rpm DC shunt motor has an armature resistance R
a
:= 0.1 Q, shunt
field winding resistance R
fw
:= 80 Q, and Nr:= 1200 turns per pole. The rated field current
is 1 A. The magnetization characteristic at 1000 rpm is shown in Figure Q3. The motor is
connected to a 100 V DC supply. At no-load condition, the motor runs at 1000 rpm and
the armature takes 5 A.
(i) Find the value of the resistance of the shunt field control rheostat, Rrc. (4 marks)
(ii) Find the electromagnetic power developed at no load and 1000 rpm. (3 marks)
(iii) Find the speed and electromagnetic torque when rated current flows in the
armature. Assume the air gap flux remains the same as that at no load. (6 marks)
(iv) Find the starting torque if the starting armature current is limited to 150% of its
rated value. Assume the armature reaction, Ir(AR):= 0.15 A. (6 marks)
MAGNETIZATION CURVE AT 1000 RPM
120 ,---.,.-.--:--.,...--.--.- .,......,-..,........,.--..,..-..,..--.,...----,
112 I
108
104
100
96
92
88
84
68
E
a
64
(Induced 56
voltage, V) 52
48
44
3)
.8
.4
.0
16
12
o
o 0.050.10.150. 0.50.30.350.40.450.50.550.60.650.10.150.80850.90.95 11M l.lU51.2l:ll1.31.3l U
60 f--+_.........
40
36
8 I"j,.+ +., .
4 ..+-+- +.. -
j
116 1-1 .... ) + O'
j + , ; , , c ..

80 1+ + +..,
16 -"----j-..+....;...-'----'-..J---C.....-+_i. .;....'----'-.
1.
Ir (field current, A)
SEE 3433
-5
Figure Q3
Question 4
(a) Explain the working principle of a three-phase induction machine. (5 marks)
(b) Draw the power flow diagram for induction motor operation. (5 marks)
(c) A three-phase, 415 V, 1450 rpm, 50 Hz, four-pole wound-rotor induction motor has the
following parameters per phase:
R
l
= 0.25 n R/=0.2 n
Xl = X2' = 0.5 n X
m
=30 n
The rotational losses are 1700 W. With the rotor terminals short-circuited, determine:
(i) Starting current when started direct on full voltage. (4 marks)
(ii) Starting torque. (4 marks)
(iii) Full-load current. (4 marks)
(iv) Full-load torque. (3 marks)
D) A -'<p, LUUU k V A, II k V, 1800 rpm synchronous generator has a resistance of 1.5 nand
synchronous reactance of 15 n per phase. The field current is adjusted to obtain the rated
terminal voltage at open circuit.
(i) Determine the excitation voltage E
f
. [4 marks]
(ii) If h
as ort circuit is applied across the machine terminals, find the stator current.
[6 marks]
c) The synchronous machine in Q5 (b) is then connected to an infinite bus. The generator is
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
e!IIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 3533 / SZE 3533
COMMUNICATIONS PRINCIPLES
DR. RAZALI BIN NGAH
DR. ZURKARMAWAN BIN ABU BAKAR
MR. ALIAS BIN MOHD
MR. AMERUDDIN BIN BAHAROM
SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM / SEP / SET /
SEW
01/02/03/04/05
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
20 APRIL 2009
COVER
2
SEE3533
Answer 4 questions only
Q1. (a) Describe the differences between half-duplex and full-duplex transmission
modes in terms of definition and frequency/channel used.
[4 marks]
(b) Explain 4 methods to measure the efficiency of a communication system.
[4 marks]
(c) A two-stage amplifier has a bandwidth of 150kHz and operates at 27C. The
l5t stage has gain of 8dB and F=2.4dB. The 2
nd
stage has gain of 40dB and
F=6.5dB. The input noise is generated by a 10kO resistor and the output is driving
a load of 300 O.
(i) Calculate the noise power and voltage at the input. [5 marks]
(ii) Calculate the overall noise figure, F in dB. [3 marks]
(ii) Calculate the output noise power and voltage. [4 marks]
(d) A signal, v(t)=20 sin (lOOOrrt) V when transmitted over a transmission line
suffered a loss of 40dB. Calculate the new amplitude and write the new
expression for the signal.
[5 marks]
3
SEE3533
Q2. (a) For the message signal vm(t) =cos 1000t + cos 1500t, sketch frequency
spectrum of the modulated signals that are produced by the following modulation
methods;
i) Amplitude Modulation (AM)
ii) Double Side Band Suppressed Carrier (DSB-SC)
iii) Single Side Band Suppressed Carrier (SSB-SC)-lower side band
iv) Single Side Band Suppressed Carrier (SSB-SC)-upper side band
Note: Assume that a frequency carrier, roc =5000 rad/sec. You do not have to
accurately label the amplitudes of the spectral components, but be sure to clearly
label the frequency axis. [8 marks]
(b) Consider a superheterodyne receiver in Figure Q2 below for the broadcast AM
band with an Intermediate Frequency, flF =455 kHz. Suppose that we wish to
receive an AM radio station with carrier frequency f
c
= 590 kHz.
RF amplifier with
bandpass filter
IF
Audio
Detector
tuneable to desired
amplifier
amplifier
Local oscillator (LO)
4
SEE3533
i) What frequency should be used for the LO at the superheterodyne
receiver? [5 marks]
ii) Explain what is meant by "image frequency". [3 marks]
iii) Determine the "image frequency" in figure Q2. [3 marks]
iv) How is the "image interference" eliminated in superheterodyne receiver?
[3 marks]
v) Explain the use of IF in superheterodyne receiver? [3 marks]
5
SEE3533
Q3. (a) (i) Explain the advantage and disadvantage of angle modulation compared to
amplitude modulation in tenn of noise immunity and bandwidth. [4 marks]
(ii) With the help of a suitable block diagram, describe the operation of an FM
stereo transmitter. [6 marks]
(b) For an FM modulator with a peak frequency deviation, Lilof 30 kHz, a
modulating signal frequency,fm = 10kHz, peak carrier voltage, V
c
= 10 V and
carrier frequency of 10 MHz
(i) Detennine the modulation index. [2 marks]
(ii) Write the expression for FM signal. [2 marks]
(iii)Determine the transmission bandwidth using Bessel function and Carson's
rule. Draw the frequency spectrums for both rules. Label all amplitudes and
frequencies. [6 marks]
(iv) Detennine the transmission power using Carson's rule (Assume the load is
H1). [2 marks]
(v) Determine the unmodulated carrier power (Assume the load is In). Compare
and discuss this result with your results in Q3 (b) (iv). [3 marks]
6
SEE3533
Q4 (a) (i) Define what is meant by Nyquist sampling theorem and explain why this
theorem has to be complied in the sampling process.
[5 marks]
ii) Calculate the Nyquist sampling rate for the following signals:
vet) = lOcos 10001tt cos 30001tt [3 marks]
vet) = 7 sin (20 0001tt + 30) [2 marks]
b) Figure Q4 shows a Manchester-coded signal waveform where T is the bit
duration and A is the amplitude of the signal.
A
O........-I-+....f-+-+-I-+-I-I-....(o-I--+o-....-....... t
- A ~ ....
T
Figure Q4 Machester-coded signal
(i) Determine the corresponding binary sequence for the digital signal.
[3 marks]
(ii) Give the main advantage of Manchester coding. [2 marks]
7
SEE3533
c) In a digital transmission, analog signals are converted to digital signals and
then encoded before being transmitted over the digital transmission medium or
network.
i) Assume that a signal, v(t)= cos 200nt is sampled at time t=l/(4f
m
) seconds
(where f
m
is the frequency of the signal vet)) and is converted into a pulse of
width ~ t , and quantized into 8 levels.
Sketch the output waveform for the first 2 samples. [4 marks]
Calculate the binary number for each level of the samples. [6 marks]
8
SEE3533
Q5 (a) Using a suitable block diagram, explain the general principles of Frequency
Division Multiplexing (FDM).
[3 marks]
(b) The L-carrier system using FDM was developed by AT&T for long distance
telecommunication network. It consists of five phases and the first phase is called
the Basic Group. Discuss the formation of this Basic Group. [5 marks]
(c) Twelve message (12) signals each with a bandwidth of 10kHz are to be sampled
and Time Division multiplexed (TDM). Determine:
1. the resulting frame length (in msec) [3 marks]
11. the duration of a sampling pulse if all twelve channels are to be
accommodated in the frame length. [3 marks]
iii. the resulting transmission rate, if each of the pulse is PCM encoded using an
8-bit quantizer. [4 marks]
IV. how can you accommodate sixteen (16) channels instead of l2? What
possibly could be one disadvantage of multiplexing sixteen (16) channels
compared to multiplexing 12 channels? [4 marks]
d) Suggest one method of keeping synchronization between the transmitter
and receiver in a TDM. [3 marks]
10
SEE3533
Table of Bessel Functions
Modulation
I n d e x , ~
.To Sidebands - .Tn
1st
2
na
3
m
4
tn
5
tn
6
tn
in
8
tn
9
tn
0.25 0.98 0.12
0.5 0.94 0.24 0.03
1.0 0.77 0.44 0.11 0.02
1.5 0.51 0.56 0.23 0.06 0.01
2.0 0.22 0.58 0.35 0.13 0.03
2.4 0 0.52 0.43 0.20 0.06
3.0 -0.26 0.34 0.49 0.31 0.13 0.04 0.01
4.0 -0.40 -0.07 0.36 0.43 0.28 0.13 0.05 0.02
5.0 -0.18 -0.33 0.05 0.36 0.39 0.26 0.13 0.05 0.02
6.0 0.15 -0.28 -0.24 0.11 0.36 0.36 0.25 0.13 0.06 0.02
I CONFIDENTIAL I
811IM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 4012 / SZE 4012
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
PROF. DR. ABDUL HALIM BIN
MOHDYATIM
DR. MOKHTAR BIN HARUN
KEPT. (B) ALIAS BIN WARJAN
SEB / SEC / SEE / SEL / SEM
01 /02/03110
2 HOURS
23 APRIL 2009
PART A - ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.
PART B - ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.
THIS EXAMINATION BOOKLET CONSISTS OF 5 PAGES TI\lCLUDING THE FRONT
COVER
- 2
SEE 4012
BAHAGIAN - A (60%) - ANSWER ANY 4 QUESTIONS.
Ql. List the requirements and the steps for an engineering graduate to qualify as
Professional Engineer.
(15 marks)
Q2. What is Code of Engineering Ethics? List and discuss the important elements
of code of engineering ethic.
(15 marks)
Q3. Answer any two of the followings:
a. Define Standard. Discuss how standard could playa role for the safety
of public.
b. Explain briefly the objectives of the Electricity Supply Act 1990 and
the Regulations.
c. Define Contract. List the eight elements necessary for a contract to be
enforceable by law.
(15 marks)
Q4. Whistleblowing can be very bad from an organization's point of view because
it can lead to distrust, dishannony, and an inability of employees to work
together. Discuss.
(15 marks)
Q5. Engineers are increasingly playing a significant role in the development of
Malaysia. Suggest how engineers can make greater contribution with
awareness in safety, health and environment.
(15 marks)
- 3
SEE 4012
BAHAGIAN -B (40%)
Base on the case below and Code Of Professional Conduct
(Registration Of Engineer Act - Act 138) at page 4, answer all the following
questions;
Cellular phones are one of the most popular items on the market today. They
are attractive and extremely convenient, with some phones transmitting and receiving
signals in the 800 MHz band and up to and beyond a 50 Ian radius. Lately cellular
phones have been in the news. In USA, a Florida man sued a cellular phone
manufacturer after the death of his wife. His wife died of a cancerous tumor in the
brain allegedly caused by her cellular phone.
The problem originates with the frequency and the location of the antenna. Under
normal circumstances, the antenna is very close to the skull and has an isotropic
radiation pattern (360 pattern of radiation) in the azimuthal plane and a figure eight
pattern in the elevation plane. Approximately one half of the power is dissipated into
the brain. Therefore, the near field effect on the brain needs to be investigated at
normal operating intensity.
Very little is known about the near field effects of radiation on the body, especially
brain tissue. IEEE has proposed a standard of Specific absorption rate (S.A.R), how
much radiation could safely be dissipated into the human body as a whole. This
standard is 0.4 WattJkg. This is an average for the entire body, but recent research
shows that the tissue of the brain is much more susceptible to radiation. This means
that the standard for the brain should be significantly lower than the IEEE standard.
How much lower no one is sure, since the effect of radiation on the brain is unknown.
Andrew is a young engineer working for a cellular phone manufacturing company.
When doing a bit of off the job research he read the latest report about the
susceptibility of the brain to radiation. The next day he reviewed the calculations of
the radiation given off by the antenna of his company's hottest selling cellular phone.
He found that the S.A.R. to the brain was 0.35 WattJkg. Later that afternoon he visited
his boss with a suggestion to modify the antennas on the phones and perhaps doing a
recall on the ones already sold. "Andrew," screamed Diana, head engineer, "What
you're suggestion would cost us hundreds of thousands of dollars! You can't possibly
be serious. That's our fastest seller. Recalling them would be a disaster and there are
more important things to be done. You don't even know that this is dangerous!".
" But what about our obligation to the public?", Andrew replied.
"What about your obligation to the company? Look, I don't want to make a big issue
out of this. We're within IEEE standards and unless we have further word from them
then we're in the clear."
- 4
SEE 4012
Q6. Base on BEM code of professional conduct, state the regulations relevant to
the case. Justify your answer.
(lOmarks)
Q7. What would you do if you were in Andrew's shoes? Would you talk to
someone above Diana or try to convince her, etc. ? Can you think of options
that would be fair both to the company and to the public, especially in the light
of the uncertainty about the health risks? Explain your reasoning.
(20 marks)
Q8. Assume that Andrew asks Diana for paid time to research the matter further
and Diana refuses his request. Now what should Andrew do? Discuss your
rationale.
(10 marks)
- 5
SEE 4012
CODE OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
(REGULATION NO 23 - 33 REGISTRATION OF ENGINEER ACT)
23. Every Registered Engineer shall at all times uphold the dignity, high standing and
reputation of his profession.
24. A Registered Engineer in his responsibility to his employer, client or the profession shall
have full regard to the public interest.
25. (1) A Registered Engineer shall discharge his duties to his employer or client as the case
may be with complete fidelity.
(2) Except with the permission of his employer, a Registered Engineer shall not accept
any remuneration for services rendered other than from his employer.
26. A registered Engineer shall not maliciously injure or attempt to maliciously injure whether
directly or indirectly, the professional reputation, prospects or business of another Registered
Engineer.
27. A registered Engineer shall not;
(a) canvass or solicit professional employment
(b)offer to make by way of commission or any other payment for the introduction of his
professional employment; or
(c) except as permitted by the Board, advertise in any manner or form in connection with
his profession.
28. A Professional Engineer in private practice shall not practice engineering with any person
whose registration has been cancelled.
29. A Professional Engineer in private practice shall not be a medium of payment made on his
client's behalf unless he is so requested by his client nor shall he, in connection with work on
which he is employed, place contracts or orders except with the authority of and on behalf of
his client.
30. A Professional Engineer in private practice shall not without the approval of the Board
enter into professional partnership with any person other than a Professional Engineer in
private practice, a Registered Architect, a Registered Quantity Surveyor or a Licensed Land
Surveyor.
31. A Professional Engineer in private practice shall not directly or indirectly
(a) supplant or attempt to supplant another Professional Engineer in private practice;
(b) intervene or attempt to intervene in or in connection with engineering
work of any kind which to his knowledge has already been entrusted to another
Professional Engineer in private practice; or
(c) take over any work of that other Professional Engineer in private practice
acting for the same client unless he has
(i) obtained the consent of that other Engineer; or
(ii) been formally notified by the client that the service of that other Engineer have
been terminated in accordance with the provisions of any contract entered into
between that other Engineer and the client.
32. (1) Except with the prior approval of the board, a Professional Engineer in private practice
shall not be a director or executive of or substantial shareholder in or agent for any
contracting or manufacturing company or firm or business related to building or engineering.
(2) If such approval is given, such Professional Engineer shall not undertake any contract
work wherein he is engaged as a consulting engineer in such project unless it is in respect of a
"design and build" project.
33. Every Registered Engineer while acting in his professional capacity shall disclose in
writing to his client of the fact if he is a director or member of a substantial shareholder in or
agent for any contracting or manufacturing company or firm or business or has any financial
illt.erest in any such company or firm or business, with which he deals on behalf of his client.
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 4103
CONTROL SYSTEM
ASSOC. PROF. DR. ZAHARUDDIN BIN
MOHAMED
SEE
02
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
28 APRIL 2009
COVER
2
SEE 4103
Question 1
a) Poles ofa second order system determine the system's performance and stability. For the
following transfer functions, map poles on the s-plane, describe the type of the response
and sketch the system response.
1.
T(s) __l_
- (s + 3)2
1
11. T(s) = ----=---
S2 + 4s + 8)
1
111.
T(s) = 2 2
s +5
1
IV. T ( s ) = - ~ ~ -
(s + 2)(s + 4)
[10 marks]
b) An open-loop system represented by the following transfer function is tested with a unit
step input.
G(s) = 100
S2 + 5s+ 200
1. Find the percent overshoot (%OS), settling time (T
s
) and peak time (T
p
) of the system
response.
[7 marks]
11. Based on the time response specifications in b(i), sketch the time response of the
system.
[4 marks]
111. Calculate the steady-state error of the system.
[4 marks]
3
SEE 4103
Question 2
A unity feedback control system has an open-loop transfer function:
K
G(s) =-------,:----
s(s + 3)(S2 + 2s + 2)
a) What is a root locus?
[2 marks]
b) Draw the root locus of the system on a graph paper with all relevant refinements and label
your graph completely. Show all the intermediate constructions.
[18 marks]
c) Locate a point on the locus that gives the dominant closed loop poles with t; = 0.5.
Determine the value of K at this point.
[5 marks]
4
SEE 4103
Question 3
a) Briefly discuss the following controllers in terms of their applications and implementation
in control systems.
1. Proportional-Integral (PI) Controller
11. Proportional-Derivative (PD) Controller
111. Proportional-Integral- Derivative (PID) Controller
[3 marks]
b) A process control is represented by a block diagram in Figure Q3 where R(s) and C(s) are
the input and output of the system respectively. The system operates at a percent overshoot
of 16.3 % and the closed-loop poles are obtained at s = -0.71 j1.27 and s = -5.59.
R(s) + C(s)
1
K
s(s + 2)(s + 5)
Figure Q3
1. Discuss the validity of the second-order approximation.
[2 marks]
11. Calculate the settling time, the peak time and the steady-state error of the system.
[5 marks]
111. To achieve a quality product, the system is required to have the following
specifications:
Three-fold improvement in the settling time
Zero steady-state error.
As a control engineer, you are required to design a controller to meet the
specifications.
[12 marks]
IV. Find all the constants (example: K
D
) involved and show how to implement the
controller.
[3 marks]
5
SEE 4103
Question 4
A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function as follows:
G(s) = (s + 1)
s(l + OAs)(l + O.1s)
a) Using the straight-line approximation method, draw the Bode plot of the open loop system.
Determine the phase crossover frequency, the gain crossover frequency, the gain margin
and the phase margin.
[18 marks]
b) The phase margin of the system can be varied by introducing the gain K into the system as
in Figure Q4. Using the gain adjustment approach, determine the value of gain K that
corresponds to 60
0
phase margin.
(s) R
+
) C(S
K
G(S)
-
Figure Q4
[7 marks]
6
SEE 4103
Question 5
An aircraft roll control system is shown in Figure Q5. The torque on the aileron generates a roll
rate. The resulting roll angle is then used to control the feedback system.
Aircraft
Controller
Actual
Desired
4 + roll
roll
angle
s
s+2
angle
Figure Q5
a) Draw the Bode plot of the open loop transfer function and determine gain margin and phase
margm.
[9 marks]
b) Design a lead compensator for the system so that the static velocity error constant K
v
is 20
sec
1
, the phase margin is at least 50 , and the gain margin is at least 10 dB.
[16 marks]
I CONFIDENTIAL I
8 JlI1\1
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 4113
MODERN CONTROL SYSTEMS
ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHD FUA' AD BIN
RAHMAT
DR. HAZLINA BT SELAMAT
SEE / SEI / SEM
01/02
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
30 APRIL 2009
COVER
VR/t)
rV,,(t)
I
-2
SEE 4113
Question 1
(a). State the advantages and disadvantages of modeling dynamical systems in the form of
transfer function and state space. [4 marks]
(b). A system is represented by a block diagram as shown in Figure Ql b. Write the system's
state equations. Then, find the system's transfer function.
[6 marks]
f
l/s +
Y(s) U(s)
K
Figure Qlb
(c). Obtain a state space model for the multi-input multi-output (MIMO) system given in
Figure Qlc. vIet) and vz(t) are the inputs and VRI(t), VR2(t) and vro(t) which are voltages
across Rj , R
z
and R3 are the outputs respectively. Let the system states be
x(t)=[i
u
i
L2
VC3]T.
[15 marks]
Vit)
Figure Qlc
-3
SEE 4113
Question 2
(a). The state equation of a system with Eigen values of -2, -5 and -5 are given in the
Controllable Canonical Form as follows :
x(t) = Ax(t) + Bu(t)
yet) = [4 5 2}(t)
Obtain the state and output equation of the system either in Diagonal or Jordan Canonical
form
[12 marks]
(b). Consider the following system with two state equations Xl and X2, two output equations
Yl and Y2 and two inputs Ul and U2:
X2 =6.5x
l
+ U
l
Yl =X:t
Convert the above equations in state space matrix representation and determine the
system transfer functions.
[13 marks]
-4
SEE 4113
Question 3
a) Consider the following state equation and output equation:
Show that the state equation can be transformed into the following form by use of a
proper transformation matrix:
[11 marks]
Then obtain the output yet) in terms of z,(t), Z2(t) and Z3(t).
[2 marks]
b) Given the state and output equation of an electrical system as follow where u(t) is the step
function occurring at t = 0, or u(t)=l(t). The initial condition value is x(O) = [0 of,
~ ( t ) = [ 1 ]xCt) + [O]u(t)
-2 -3 1
y(t) = 1]ret)
(i) Find the state transition matrix, <I>(t)
(ii) Find the inverse state transition matrix <I>-'(t)
(iii) Obtain the state transition equation and sketch the time response, x(t).
(iv) Obtain the output equation and sketch the time response, yet).
[12 marks]
-5
SEE 4113
Question 4
A chemical process can be simplified by using the following state space equations
~ ( t ) : [ ~
~ ~ ]X(t) + [ ~ ] U ( t )
-1 -2 0
yet) =[0 1 0}(t)
a) Design a linear state feedback controller u(t) = -Kx(t) such that the closed-loop
system will have all its eigen values equal to -1.
[11 marks]
b) What is the purpose of an observer and why is one needed in some control
system?
[3 marks]
c) If a supplementary observer is needed for the system, design a full order observer
such that all the eigen values of the observer are at -0.1.
[11 marks]
-6
SEE 4113
Question 5
a) Given the plant in state and output equation as follow:
.
X2(t) = -Xl(t) - 3x/t) + b
2
u(t)
y(t) = Xl (t)
What relationship exists between b
I
and b
2
to make the system uncontrollable?
[5 marks]
b) Given the plant in state space representation as follow:
Xl(t) = x
2
(t)
X2(t) = -xl(t) - 2x
2
(t) + u(t)
y(t) = ClX
l
(t) + C
2
X
2
(t)
What relationship must exist between C
I
and C
2
III order for the system to be
unobservable?
[5 marks]
c) Given the plant
~ C t ) = [ 1 ]XCt) + [O]UCt)
-7 -9 1
y(t) =[4 1}Ct)
Design an integral controller to yield a 10% overshoot, 2 second peak time and zero
steady state error for a step input.
[15 marks]
-7
SEE 4113
Question 6
a) Give the definition of optimal control system.
[5 marks]
b) Given a system described by the dynamic equation
Xl(t) = -x1(t) + x
2
(t)
X2(t) = ~ (t) - x
2
(t) + u(t)
where
Detennine the optimum control input u(t) = [kj - 1] x(t) = Kx(t) that will minimize the
following perfonnance index
1 1
J = - fu
T
(t)u(t)dt
2
0
[20 marks]
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
!lIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 4133
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL TECHNOLOGY
DR. MOHD FAUZI BIN OTHMAN
SEE /SEI
01/02
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
21 APRIL 2009
COVER
2
SEE 4133
Ql a) Give the definition of Automation and its classification. For each class
gives its advantages and disadvantages. (6 Marks)
b) Explain briefly and differentiate the following tenns and give an example
of each tenn:
i. Batch process and Continuous process
ii. Process control and Motion control
iii. Time Driven Sequential control and Event Driven Sequential Control
(11 Marks)
c) List and explain the four levels of process control.
(8 Marks)
Q2 a) List 3 advantages and 3 disadvantages of using relays to implement
industrial logic control systems. (6 marks)
b) A system has a switch PB controlling a lamp L. When the system is
powered on, the lamp will be in the off state. Pressing the switch will turn
on the lamp if it was in off state and vice versa (i.e pressing the switch
repeatedly will toggle the lamp on and off).
a. Draw an input-output diagram of the system (4 marks)
b. Draw a fully documented internal state diagram for the system
complete with race-free state variables assignment.
(15 marks)
3
8EE4133
Q3 a) Describe the scan cycle of operation of a PLC and discuss how cycle time
affects the operation of a PLC.
(10 marks)
b) List the five programming languages ofIEC61131-3. Give an example of
each language.
(5 marks)
c) Given a truth Table for digital system:
A B C Z
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
A
B
C
PLC
-
z
A, B and C is an input and Z is an output for the system. Implement a
digital system above using PLC especially for the ladder diagram.
(10 Marks)
Q4) a) Discuss briefly the function and the design principles of SCADA in a
process control plant. (5 marks)
b) A fieldbus is used to communicate control signals in a process plant
among the sensors, controllers and final control elements. Discuss the five
important characteristic of the fieldbus. (10 marks)
c ) What are digital transmission standards? What are the advantages of
digital over analog transmission? (10 marks)
4
SEE 4133
Q5) An isothermal well-mixed reactor is shown in Fig Q5. When the following
assumptions:
o Reactions occur at constant volume and temperature
o Constants physical properties
o Reactor well-mixed.
are made, the following equations apply for the process:
i. The rate of reactions is given by the expression:
where
rA(t) = rate of reaction of component A, kmoles of Afm
3
Is
k = constant of reaction, m
3
/kmoles/s
CA = concentration of component A in reactor, kmoles of Afm
3
/s
f(t) = volumetric flow rate m
3
/s
ii The process's dynamic equations:
de
A
(t)
f(t)c-'\ (t) - f(t)cit) - Vrit) =V__
dt
where V = volume of reactor, m
3
.
kmoles
C
A
, (t )--,
m
I
\
J
m
/(I)
S
kmoles kmoles
( ) CAd (t )--J c.. 1 --,
m m
1
I
CD
Reactor
Figure Q5
5
SEE 4133
a) Taking the manipulated variables to be CA;{t) andf(t), the controlled
variable to be CAd(t), and assuming ideal plug flow and no reaction
occurring in the outlet pipe, derive the system transfer functions. Assume
to is time delay or dead time between the reactor outlet and point 1 in
second (20 marks)
b) A controller for the process was successfully tuned using the transfer
functions. However when the process steady states values were changed,
the process went out of controL Explain why the controller does not work
when the steady state values were changed?
(5 marks)
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
!lIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 4433 I SEE 5433 I SZE 4463
POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES
DR. AWANG BIN JUSOH
DR. NAZIHA BT AHMAD AZLI
SEE/SEM
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
29 APRIL 2009
COVER
2
SEE 4433/5433
QUESTION 1
A full-wave rectifier is shown in Figure Q 1. Given that the primary voltage is 160 Vrms with the
line frequency of 50 Hz. The circuit is controlled at firing angle of 50. The inductor and the
resistor value are 20 mH and 20 n respectively.
(a) i) State the condition to ensure discontinuous current mode
ii) Determine the range of the extinction angle.
[3 marks]
(b) Sketch the waveform of the output voltage, vo{t) and the output current, io{t) for the condition
stated in (a).
[5 marks]
(c) Given that the discontinuous output current expression is
V [ _rot-a]
i(rot) = ; sin(rot-S)-sin(a-S)e rot for a ~ rot ~ p
Find the average output current, 1
0
, ifthe extinction angle is 205.
[8 marks]
(d) If the inductor value is assumed to be infinite, calculate the average output voltage, Yo.
[3 marks]
(e) If the inductor value is assumed to be infinite, calculate the average output current.
[2 marks]
(f) If a free wheeling diode (FWD) is connected in parallel with the R-L load, sketch and state
the differences that can be observed from the waveforms as sketched in QI (b).
[4 marks]
L
160 Vnns'V
+
Vo
Figure Ql
4
SEE 4433/5433
QUESTION 3
a) In a square wave inverter, briefly discuss how the inverter fundamental output voltage is
varied.
(4 marks)
b) Draw and label a circuit diagram of a single phase inverter using MOSFETs (metal oxide
semiconductor field effect transistor) power switches. If a perfect square wave inverter
output voltage is required, sketch the gating signals required by the MOSFETs for one
complete switching cycle.
(5 marks)
c) Referring to Figure Q3, a is 60 degree and Vdc = 100 V. The inverter output frequency is
100 Hz. This voltage is connected to a series R-L load, where the values ofR = 10 Q and
L = 100 mH). The Fourier series of each voltage term is given as V
n
= [ ~ c ] cos na
i) Calculate the fundamental output voltage in rms
(5 marks)
ii) Calculate the voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THDv) up to the first four
nonzero harmonics terms of the Fourier series.
(6 marks)
iii) Calculate the current Total Harmonics Distortion (THDi) using the first four
nonzero harmonics terms of the Fourier Series.
(5 marks)
vo
~
vde
ex
ex
ex ex
rot
21t
1t
-vde
Figure 03
5
SEE 4433/5433
QUESTION 4
(a) What is the purpose of a converter in DC motor drives?
(3 marks)
(b) Figure Q4 shows a single phase dual converter consisting of fully-controlled
rectifiers A and B. The rectifiers are feeding a 220 V, 750 rpm, 200 A, R
a
= 0.05
n, separately excited DC Motor. The AC voltage source is 240 Vrms, 50 Hz.
(i) Which rectifier can provide forward motoring operation? Explain how.
(3 marks)
(ii) Which rectifier can provide forward braking operation? Explain how.
(3 marh)
(iii) Calculate firing angles of the rectifier for forward motoring operation at
rated torque and 600 rpm.
(5 marks)
(iv) Calculate firing angles of the rectifier for forward braking operation at rated
torque and 600 rpm.
(5 marh)
(v) Draw the armature voltage waveform, Va, for the condition in (iii)
(3 marks)
(vi) Draw the armature voltage waveform, Va, for the condition in (iv)
(3 marh)
.. ---------,
.. ------- ....
---------
Rectifier A
Rectifier B
Figure Q4
6
SEE 4433/5433
QUESTIONS
(a) What do you understand by constant volt-Hertz operation of induction machines?
(5 marks)
(b) A Y-connected squirrel-cage induction motor has following ratings and
parameters:
415V, 50 Hz, 4-pole, 1440 rpm, Rl = 2 n, R2' = 3 n, XI = X2' = 3.5 n
Xm=Rm=oo
Motor is controlled by a PWM VSI at constant VIf ratio. Assuming motor speed
torque curves to be parallel straight lines in the region of interest. The motor is
used to drive a water pump with the speed-torque characteristics given by
T
L
= kN
2
, where N is the speed of the motor. The speed is made to equal to the
rated value at the rated torque.
(i) Determine the rated torque and the rated power of the motor.
(5 marks)
(ii) Find the synchronous frequency ofthe motor in radian/s at O. 5 rated torque.
(5 marks)
(iii) If the motor is required to start at 0.75 rated torque, what are the required
frequency and the voltage to the motor?
(5 marks)
(iv) If the PWM VSI is fed from a 415 V three phase bridge diode rectifier
through a DC link capacitor, what is the required amplitude modulation
ratio, M
a
, for conditions in (ii) and (iii)? Use M
a
=VLL(nnsYVDC.
(5 marks)
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 4443
POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS
ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHO WAZIR BIN
MUSTAFA
ASSOC. PROF. FARIDAH BT MOHD TARA
SEE
01/02
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
27 APRIL 2009
ANSWER THREE (3) QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
SEE 4443
- 2
Ql a. Compare the performance of Newton Raphson Method and Gauss Seidel Method for load
flow solution.
[4 Marks]
b. Table Q1 shows the branch impedances of a power system. From the data tabulated:
i. Sketch the one line diagram of the power network, and; [1 Marks]
ii. Assemble by inspection the Y
bus
matrix [4 Marks]
Table Ql
Line
No
From Bus - To Bus
Admittance
(pu)
Line Charging,
B
(pu)
I 1 - 2 1.66 -:i5 0
2 1 - 3 3.33-jI0 jOJ
3 2-3 125-j3.75 0
c. Figure Q I shows a three bus power system with the line reactance. Bus 1 is a slack bus
and buses 2 and 3 are the P-Q and P-V buses respectively. The Ybus matrix is given by:
-7.5 2.5 5.0J
Y
bus
=j 2.5 -6.5 4.0
[
5.0 4.0 -9.0
0
0
0
0
Assume initial voltage at bus 2 is 1.04 pu, angles 8
2
= and 8
3
= , use the Newton
Raphson technique to determine the:
i. real and reactive powers for bus 2; [5 Marks]
ii. real power for bus 3; [3 Marks]
iii. power residuals; [3 Marks]
iv. elements of [JJ] and [J4]; [9 Marks]
v. Write the error matrix equation [ ~ l [2 Marks]
-0.11051
r
vi. If the error matrix solution is 0.0572 ,compute the updated voltage and angles
-0.1370
for P-Q bus and P-V bus. [4 Marks]
SEE 4443
- 3
3
1
PG3=1.0 p.u
jO.2
~
jO.4 jO.25
V
3
=ll.0051
V
J
=1.04 /(J'
E
g
PL2=l.O p.u
Q
L2
=0.8p.u
Figure Ql
Q2 a. 1. What are current limiting reactors? Why do we use them in power system?
[3 Marks]
ii. Explain briefly two ways of connecting the current limiting reactors in the power
system.
[3 Marks]
b. For the network shown in Figure Q2(b), all impedances are in per-unit. The Zbus for
the network is given below:
jO.25 jO.2 jO.16 jO.14
jO.2 jO.23 jO.15 jO.151
Zbus =
jO.16 jO.15 jO.196 jO.1
jO.14 0.151 jO.1 jO.195
SEE 4443
-4
-..Io.....,......... Bus 3
j 0.1
Generator G 1 Generator G 2
jO.2 j 0.2
Figure Q2(b)
A three-phase fault occurs at bus J of the network.
1. Calculate the fault current and voltages at buses 2, 3 and 4 during the fault.
[3 Marks]
11. Compute the fault currents contributed to bus J by the adjacent unfaulted buses 2,
3 and 4.
[11 Marks]
c. For the network shown in Figure Q2(c) has two small generating station has two
alternators of 3000 kVA and 4500 kVA with percentage reactances of 7% and 8%
respectively. The circuit breakers are used at J50 MYA. It is intended to extend the
system by a supply from the grid via a transformer of 7500 kVA rating and 7.5%
reactance. Find the reactance of the reactor necessary to protect the circuit breaker.
Assume that the bus voltage is 33 kV and let 7500 kVA be the base kVA.
SEE 4443
- 5
7500 kVA
7.5%
7% rv rv 8%
Reactor
X%
33 kV
3000 kVA 4500 kVA
33 kV - ~ r - - l - - - - r - . . . . . I
---.,-.......- bus
bus
F
Figure Q2(c)
[15 Marks]
Q3 a. Derive an expression for fault current for double line-to-ground fault by symmetrical
components method.
[8 Marks]
b. The single-line diagram of a three-phase power system is shown in Figure Q3(b).
Equipment ratings are given in Table Q3(b).
T3
Bus 1
Line 1-3
"0> J ---B
G3
1I
Line 1-2
Bus2
.rI T4Y G4
Gl
611
Line 2-3
~ Y
1
T2 1I
6
.rill
G2
Y
Figure Q3 (b)
SEE 4443
- 6
Table Q3(b)
Equipment Power Voltage X/' X
2
X
o
Generator G] 1000 MVA 15 kV 0.18 pu 0.18 pu 0.07 pu
Generator G
2
1000 MVA 15 kV 0.20 pu 0.20 pu 0.10 pu
Generator G
3
500MVA 13.8 kV 0.15 pu 0.15 pu 0.05 pu
Generator G
4
750MVA 13.8 kV 0.30 pu 0.40 pu 0.10 pu
Power Voltage XI X
2 Xo
Transformer T
I
1000 MVA 15 kV M765 kV Y 0.1 pu 0.1 pu 0.1 pu
Transformer T
2
1000 MVA 15 kV M765 kV Y 0.1 pu 0.1 pu 0.1 pu
Transformer T
3
500MVA 15 kV Y1765 kV Y 0.12 pu 0.12 pu 0.12 pu
Transformer T
4
750MVA 15 kV Y1765 kV Y 0.11 pu 0.11 pu 0.11 pu
I Transmission 1-2 765 kV 500 500 ISO 0
Transmission 1-3 765 kV 400 400 1000
Transmission 2-3 765 kV 400 400 1000
The inductor connected to generator neutral has a reactance of 0.05 per unit usmg
generator 3 ratings as a base.
i. Draw the zero-, positive-, and negative-sequence reactance diagrams using a
1000-MVA, 15 kV base in the zone of Generator Gl as reference base.
Neglect the ~ - Y transformer phase shifts.
[9 Marks]
II Determine the Thevenin equivalent of each sequence as viewed from bus 1.
Prefault voltage is 1.0 per unit.
[6 Marks]
Ill. Compute the fault currents for the following faults occurring at bus 1:
I. Balanced 3-phase fault
II. Single line-to-ground fault
III. Line-line fault
IV. Double line-to-ground fault
[10 Marks]
IV. Which is the worst fault from the viewpoint of the fault current?
[2 Marks]
SEE 4443
-7
Q4. a. With the aid of equal area criterion, explain how fast clearing of fault enhances
stability.
[6 Marks]
b. Figure Q4 shows a finite machine connected to an infinite bus through a double
circuit transmission system. A three-phase fault occurs on Line 2 cause breakers
CB3 and CB4 open after a lapse of time. Later these breakers reclose
simultaneously and the prefault power-angle curve comes into force. Show the
excursion of rotor angle on the by the aid of power-angle (P-8) curve.
[5 Marks]
c. A 50 Hz generator is supplying 1.0 per unit power to the infinite bus over a double
circuit line as shown in Figure Q4. The generator has an inertia constant of 5
MJIMVA at rated speed.
\. If a bolted fault occurs at P (close to infinite bus), determine the Critical
Clearing Angle and the correspondence Critical Clearing Time.
[12 Marks]
11. If the fault is cleared in 0.15 second, by means of step-by-step method
determine the swing curve at this condition over a period of 0.5 second. (Take
time step = 0.05s). Does the system stable?
[12 Marks]
Generator c

..
1.2/50 j0.15
Line 1=jO.5
Line 2=j0.5
CB = Circuit breaker
Figure Q4
P
jn@bus
B-fV
V=1.0/00
1 I CONFIDENTIAL
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 4453
POWER SYSTEM CONTROL
ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMAD YUSRI BIN
HASSAN
SEE
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
20 APRIL 2009
COVER
-2
SEE 4453
Q1. (a) What are three factors influencing the power generation at minimum
cost?
(3 marks)
(b) A power system has two generating plants with the outputs of Pj = 140
MW and P
2
= 250 MW. The loss coefficients of the system are B]]=
0.001 MW-], B
12
= - 0.001 MW-
1
and B
22
= 0.0013 MW-
J
Raising the
total load on system by 1 MW will cost the system an additional RM12
per hour. Find the penalty factor and the incremental fuel cost for both
plants.
(7 marks)
(c) A system consists of two plants that are connected by transmission line.
The incremental fuel costs of the plants are approximately (0.008P
J
+
8.0) RM!MWh and (0.012P2 + 9.0) RM/MWh respectively. Determine
the saving in fuel cost in RMIh if two generating units serve a load of
600 MW under economic dispatch instead of equal share load.
(15 marks)
-3
SEE 4453
Q2. (a) Explain briefly the following terms:
i) Market Clearing Price
ii) Power Exchanges
(5 marks)
(b) Consider 4 generators Gl, G
2
, G
3
and G
4
operating in the pool system
with loads L[ and L
2
in Figure Q2(b). Each generator has a maximum
capacity and bid price for power as indicated in Table Q2(b). The
transmission elements are assumed to be lossless. Each of the line has a
transmission limit of300 MW.
Figure Q2(b) Pool Operation
Table Q2(b) Generator Capacity and Bid prices
Generator Max Capacity (MW) Bid Price
G
1
650 RM120IMWh
G
2
2070 RM140/MWh
G
3
2100 RM160/MWh
G
4
440 RM180/MWh
-4
SEE 4453
Determine:
(i) The total generation incomes and demand charges for both
unconstrained and constrained dispatch. LOLP is assumed to be
O.
(14 marks)
(ii) The security cost for (n-l) constrained dispatch.
(3 marks)
(iii) The generation cost for G
3
when the loads for Ll and L2 are
increased to 1000MW and 3000MW respectively.
(3 marks)
-5
SEE 4453
Q3. (a) State four (4) basic requirements for successful operation of power
system.
(5 marks)
(b) A 210 MYA synchronous generator operates initially at 3000 rpm, 50
Hz. A 75 MW load is suddenly applied to the machine and the steam
valve to the turbine commences to open after I sec due to the time lag in
the governor system. Calculate the frequency to which the generated
voltage drops before the steam flow commences to increase to meet the
new load. The value of the stored energy for the machine is 5 kW-s per
kVA.
(6 marks)
(c) Two synchronous machines operate in parallel and supply a total load of
300 MW. The capacities of the machines are 150 MW and 300 MW and
have generator droop characteristics of 4% and 3% from no load to full
load respectively.
(i) Calculate the load taken by each machine assuming free
governor action.
(10 marks)
(ii) What is the new load taken by machine 300 MW if the droop
characteristic of this machine is changed to 4%?
(4 marks)
-6
SEE 4453
Q4. (a) Prove that the receiving end real power (P
R
) can be written as
follows:
P
R
= V [Ecos(e-c5)-Vcose]
Z
where
E magnitude of generator internal voltage
V magnitude of receiving end terminal voltage
ZL. e system impedance
8 phase angle between E and V
(5 marks)
(b) A generator is connected to an infinite bus and delivers 1.0 p.u current at
1.0 p.u. voltage with the power factor of 0.8 lagging. The generator's
reactance is X = 0.7 p.u.
(i) Determine a generator power output, P, reactive power output,
Q, internal voltage, E and power angle, 8.
(6 marks)
(ii) The steam valve is opened further so that P is increased by 20 %.
Calculate a generator power output, P, reactive power output, Q,
internal voltage, E and power angle, 8, current, I and power
factor, cos <1>
(5 marks)
(iii) The system is restored to the conditions in (i). The exciter is
adjusted to raise E by 20%. Calculate P, Q, E, 8, I and cos <1>.
(5 marks)
(iv) Sketch the phasor diagram for (i), (ii) and (iii).
(4 marks)
-7
SEE 4453
Q5. (a) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of HVDC transmission
system
(8 marks)
(b) Determine the commutation angle and the power factor for a 6 valve 3
phase bridge rectifier fired at 30 delay angle and having a commutation
voltage drop of 1OkV. The transformer feeding the rectifier has a line
secondary voltage of 120kV.
(5 marks)
(c) A bridge-connected rectifier is fed from a 2201110 kV transformer from
the 220 kV supply. Calculate the direct voltage output when the
commutation angle is 15and the delay angle is 45.
(3 marks)
(d) A bridge-connected rectifier operates with a =30and'Y = 15. Calculate
the necessary line secondary voltage of the rectifier transformer, which
is normally rated at 220/110 kV, if it is required to obtain a d.c. output
voltage of 100 kV. Also calculate the tap ratio required.
(5 marks)
(e) If the rectifier in Q6(c) delivers 800A, calculate the effective reactance
per phase.
(4 marks)
I CONFIDENTIAL \
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
!lIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SEE 4463
HIGH VOLTAGE TECHNOLOGY
PROF. DR. HUSSEIN BIN AHMAD
ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHD MUHRIDZA BIN
YAACOB
SEE
01/02
3 HOURS
24 APRIL 2009
ANSWER FIVE (5) QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
SEE 4463
- 2
Q I.a. Describe briefly the reasons for electric stress being considered as the main
contributor to the breakdown of insulation. The description should be based on
the principle of insulation breakdown.
(2 marks)
b. Describe briefly the elements of electric stress optimization in the case where a
solid cylindrical insulator is sandwiched between a circular electrode and
ground as shown in Fig.Q Ib. The description should put more emphasis on
the tangential field distribution and method to achieve it.
z IkV
3 em
T
7.5 em
2 em
Fig Q.I b High voltage insulation configuration
(6marks)
c. Use the iteration method to find the finite difference approximation to the
potentials at points I, 2, 3 and 8 of the system in Fig.QI c (Limit the iteration
up to 2 only). The nodal voltage follows the sequence as shown in Fig.Qlc
that is the node number is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 respectively where R} = 10
kn, Rz =30 k.G, R3 = 20 kn, ~ =10 kn, E
a
=400 V and Eb = 600 V.
SEE 4463
-3
Disconnected
t

E a -=
Fig. Q1c Mesh system with boundary conditions for finite difference consideration
(12 marks)
Q2. a. Show that in the process of gas breakdown, the Townsend First Ionization
Coefficient, a is given by;
a= !- In (_IJ t
d 1
0
where, d - gap distance
It - total current
10 - initial current (3 marks)
b. The followings data in Table Q2b are given for two parallel plates while the
electric field, E is kept constant.
Table Q2b
Gap distance, Ratio of Current and
d(cm) Initial Current, I1Io
0.5 1.2
1.3 1.6
2.0 2.3
SEE 4463
- 4
Find the values of a and y.
(7 Marks)
c. At a distance of 22.8 mm and pressure 200 mm Hg, the breakdown voltage
of a uniform field electrode in air is found to be 19.15 kV. Determine the
breakdown voltage if the secondary ionization coefficient y is doubled. The
values for the ratio of electric field and pressure, E/p and ratio of first
ionization coefficient and pressure, alp are given in Table Q2c.
Table Q2c
E/p alp
(V/cm mm Hg) (ion pairs/cm mm Hg)
41 0.0196
42 0.0222
(10 marks)
Q3.a. Will backflashover occur on a tower that was struck by lightning of current
I(t), of wave-shape with maximum value at 40 kA occurring at 1.2 !!Sec and decrease
linearly. The surge impedance of tower, tower ground wire and phase conductor are
200n, 250 nand 300n respectively. The clearance between the tower side and the'
phase conductor is 2 meters. Assume that the breakdown of air is at 30 kV per em and
the string insulator flashover at 1000 kV. Consider the coupling factor between
ground wire and phase wire is 0.25. The lightning strike when the A.C voltage is at
(550";2 I ";3) sin 1l0okV.
I(t)
Ground Wire
10 marks
-'.
Phase Conductor
String Insulator
Fig.Q3a Transmi'ion system with the t o p ~ f t o w e r was struck by lightning
SEE 4463
- 5
b. Figure Q3b shows a schematic diagram of a tilted transmission line tower with
two parallel ground wire and an impulse current waveshape, i{t). Consider the
tower top is struck by the lightning current i{t) and voltage rises to u{t).
Current (kA)
TT
1
Zc
T...
--. '4

4
.6.T
I(t)
1ft)
Time (mlcrosec)
Figure Q.3b
Show that
where Zg is the surge impedance of the ground wire
Zt is the surge impedance of the tower
u(t) is the impulse surge function
~ T is time of surge propagation from tower top to the cross-arm
i(t) is the current wave function
TT is time of surge propagation from tower top to the tower footing.
TA is time of surge propagation from tower cross-arm to the tower
footing
R
t
is tower footing resistance
(2 marks)
c. By referring to Fig Q3b, discuss the validity of the equation (write the detailed
derivation in order to prove it):
U17 (t) =u(t) - a
r
(l + m[u(t - 2T
r
) - (arfJ)u(t - 4T
r
) + (a
r
fJ)2 u(t - 6 ~ ) ]
where UTT(t) is the potential distribution on the top of tower.
Alpha (a) is the coefficient of reflection
Beta ~ ) is the coefficient of reflection on the tower top side
8 marks)
SEE 4463
- 6
Q4.a. What is the basic difference between self-restoring and non-self-restoring
insulation? Describe a method for the implementation of insulation
coordination to a power system with self-restoring and non-self-restoring
insulation. In each case emphasis should to be given to the description of Risk
Failure and Critical flashover Voltage V
so
.
(6 mark)
b. Describe the differences between Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation Level (BIL)
and Basic Switching Impulse Insulation Level (BSL) and explain how they affect
in the design of power system networks?
(5 marks)
c. The following results are obtained for the detennination of volt-time curve
obtained for a non-self restoring and self-restoring insulation in a multi-level test.
Table 4c(i) The volt-time curve characteristic of string insulator I
Voltage
level(kV)
1300 1600 2280 2600 2800 2900 3000
No. of
impulses
applied to
the
insulator
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Time to
flash(Jlsec)
35 30
I
20 15 10 5 2
Table 4c(ii)The volt-time curve characteristic of a pair of arc-horn I
Voltage
level(kV)
1200
No. of
impulses
applied to
the
insulator
10
Time to
flash(Jlsec)
35
1880
10
30
!
2800
10
20
I
3100
10
15
3300
10
10
3400
l3500
I
10 10
5 2
I
SEE 4463
-7
Answer the following questions:
i) Based on the above volt-time curve of the Table 4c(i) and 4c(ii), can the arc
hom I protects the string insulator I against destructive discharges?
(3 marks)
ii) If the flashover voltage of the arc-hom I is reduced by 20% while maintaining
same time to flashover, is the volt-time curve of arc-hom I suitable for
insulation coordination with the string insulator I? Give reasons.
(3 marks)
iii) If the volt-time curve from Table 4c(i) and 4c(ii) respectively is used for the
line insulation coordination, will there be a destructive discharge if a lightning
surge with a peak of 2000 kV at 1.5 ~ s e c and afterwards decrease linearly to
zero at rate of 20 kV per ~ s e c , arrived at the string insulator point of connection
with the conductor? If yes, where will be the discharge takes place?
(3 marks)
Q5. a Partial discharge detection and measurements were limited to the laboratory
due to high levels of electrical noise at the switchyards. With the aid of
proper diagrams describe the main sources of interference or noise which
hampered the partial discharge detection process and the techniques to
suppress the interferences. (5 marks)
b. A solid dielectric has a small cavity. Draw an equivalent circuit for such an
arrangement and define all symbols. Derive the expression for electric field
strength across the cavity. (7 Marks)
c. While doing studies on partial discharges in cavities of cylindrical disc of 1.0
cm diameter and 1 cm thickness, a cylindrical cavity of 1 mm diameter and 1
mm thickness is made at its centre. The discharge voltage measured across
the specimen is 0.2 V with sensitivity of 1 pC/volt. Determine the magnitude
of charge transferred from the cavity by taking E
r
of the disc to be equal to
2.5. (8 marks)
CONFIDENTIAL
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEI3133
ANALOG & DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS
DR. HERLINA BT ABDUL RAHIM
SEI
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
22 APRIL 2009
ANSWERS FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
- 2
SEI3l33
Q.l a) Discuss briefly the principle of the following analog meters
i) Moving iron meters
ii) Dynamometer type instrument
iii) Electrostatic meters
iv) Induction type meters
(16 Marks)
b) A 1rnA meter movement with an internal resistance of 100.0 is converted into a
0- 100mA ammeter. Calculate the value of the shunt resistance required.
(5 Marks)
c) The only voltmeter available in a laboratory has a sensitivity of 100 ON and three
scales, 50V, 150V and 300V. When connected in the circuit of Figure Ql, the
meter reads 4.65V on its lowest (50V) scale. Calculate the value of Rx, where Rv is
the voltmeter resistance.
(4 Marks)
Rs=100kn
. ~ ~ >
.-.-.
lOO\"
~ c ..............
'.
S=10on/Y
0-50\" scale
Figure Ql
-
'"l
.) -
SEI 3133
Q.2 a) Discuss in detail about the Permanent Magnet Moving Coil Movement (PMMC).
Your discussion should include the principle, operation, schematic diagram,
relevant mathematical equation, advantages and disadvantages of the PMMC.
(10 Marks)
b) The ohmmeter in Figure Q2 uses a 50n basic movement requiring a full scale
current of 1rnA. The internal battery voltage is 3V. The desired scale marking for
half-scale deflection is 2000 n. Calculate
1. The values ofR
1
& R
2 (5 Marks)
ii. The maximum value of R
2
to compensate for a 10% drop in battery voltage.
(5 Marks)
iii. The scale error at the half scale mark (2k D) when R
2
is set as in (ii)
(5 Marks)
R
x
E
B

Figure Q2
- 4
SEI3133
Q.3 a) Explain briefly the following noise which can occur in a measurement system
i. Shot Noise
ii. Thermal Noise
iii. Flicker Noise
iv. Burst noise
v. Avalanche Noise
(10 Marks)
b) The addition of a series multiplier resistor in a full wave AC voltmeter is illustrated
in Figure Q3. The PMMC have R
m
= lkO and 1
m
= 2mA. If R
sh
is equal to 200n,
calculate the value of R
s
in order to have a 1OVrms range of the meter. Every diode
has a forward resistance of 50 n and the reverse bias resistance is infinity.
(15 Marks)
I
~ v ~
Figure Q3
- 5
SE13133
Q.4 a) A control valve has a linear variation of opening as the input voltage varies from 0
to 1OV. A microcomputer output an 8 bit word to control the valve opening using
an 8 bit DAC to generate the valve voltage.
1. Find the reference voltage required to obtain a full open valve.
(5 Marks)
11. Find the percentage of valve opening for 1 bit change in the input word.
(5 Marks)
b) Referring to the Figure Q4, ifR
I
= 0.050, R
2
= 0.450 dan R
3
= 4.50, meter
internal resistance, R
m
=1 kO and 1
m
= 50 Calculate the range.
(15 Marks)
I
,....
1
f
;j
"1
l
I
I
- \J ...
A.._ .... __....-/\ 'I
, 'i
_ ;....
f.l
J\ !
..

-..a
D
Figure Q4
\ CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEI4123
APPLIED ROBUST CONTROL
ASSOC. PROF. DR. YAHAYA BIN MD SAM
SEI
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
5 MAY 2009
COVER
-2
SEI4l23
Question 1
a) Briefly discuss three (3) behaviors of the robust control system.
[6 marks]
b) Define the system sensitivity.
[3 marks]
c) The second order closed system is represented by the following transfer function:
The dominant poles of the system for K= 8.1 are located at s = -1 j2.
i) Calculate the system sensitivity at this location.
[6 marks]
ii) What happen to the system sensitivity if K is increased to K = 10, where the new
dominant poles are located at s = -1.1 j2.2.
[6 marks]
iii) Sketch the response of the system for K = 8.1 and K = 10 if a unit step input is
applied to the system.
[4 marks]
-3
SEI4l23
Question 2
Antilock Braking Systems (ABS) present a challenging control problem, since the system parameter
variations can vary significantly. The objective of the ABS is to regulate wheel slip to maximize the
coefficient of friction between the tire and road for any road surface. The simplified model of ABS is
represented by a plant transfer function G(s) with a system as shown in Figure Q2 with
G s - yes) _ 1
( ) - U(s) - (s+a)(s+b)
where normally a = 1 and b = 4.
a) Using a PID controller, design a robust system where for a step input, the overshoot is less than
4% and the settling time is 1 second or less. The steady-state error must be less than 1% for a step
input. It is expected that a and b to vary by 50%.
[12 marks]
b) Design a system using an ITAE performance index and determine the suitable pre-filter to
improve specification in part (a).
[10 marks]
c) Estimate the overshoot and the settling time for the design described in b).
[3 marks]
D(s)
G(s)
R(s)
V(s)
Figure Q2
-4
SEI4123
Question 3
Many systems have several parameters that are constant but uncertain within a range. One such systems is
the unity feedback under nominal condition with a following plant transfer function:
G( ) 4.5
S =S(S+1)(s+2)
The characteristic equation of the system in general is given by
S3 + q2S2 + Q1S + Qo =0
and the variations of parameters of the nominal characteristic equation are as follows:
Variables Minimum Maximum
Q2
2
4
Q1
1
3
Qo
4
5
a) Using the Routh-Hurwitz criterion, determine the stability of the system under nominal
condition.
[6 marks]
b) Determine the four worst-case polynomials due to the variations in the parameters of the
nominal characteristic equations.
[4 marks]
c) Determine the stability of the system under the presence of the uncertainty in the nominal
characteristic equation.
[15 marks]
-5
SEl4123
Question 4
The block diagram of a steel-rolling mill control system is shown in Figure Q4. The plant is
represented by the following transfer function
1
G(s) ---
- 5(5
2
+45+5)
The controller, Ge(s} is a PID controller with two equal real zeros.
a) Select the PID zeros and the gains so that the closed loop system has two pairs of equal
roots.
[10 marks]
b) For the design of part (a), obtain the step response without a prefilter, Gp(s).
[5 marks]
c) Repeat part (b) for an appropriate prefilter.
[5 marks]
d) Estimate the effect of unit step disturbance by evaluatingy(t) with r(t) =0.
[5 marks]
O(s)
R(s)
Yes)
Figure Q4
-7
SET 4123
Table 1: ITAE Criterion for a Step Input
The Optimum Coefficients ofT(s) Based on the ITAE Criterion
for a Step Input
S+ 0\
S2 + 1Acuns+aJ
n
2
S3 +1.7SaJ
n
s
2
+ 2.1SaJ
n
2
S + aJ
n
3
S4 +2.1aJ s
3
+3.4aJ 2
S
2 +2.7aJ 3
S
+
aJ
4
n n n n
2 3 2 4 5
S5 +2.8aJ
n
s
4
+s.OaJ
n
S
3
+s.SaJ
n
S + 3.4aJ
n
s +cu
n
S6 +3.25co
n
s
5
+6.6co
2
S
4
+8.6aJ 3i +7A5aJ 4S
2
+3.9SQJ 5S +
aJ
()
n n n n n
Table 2: Coefficients and Response Measures of a Deadbeat System
System
Order
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
a
1.82
1.90
2.20
2.70
3.15
Coefficients
f3 'Y
0
2.20
3.50 2.80
4.90 5.40 3.40
6.50 8.70 7.55
E
4.05
Percent
Over
shoot,
P.O.
0.10%
1.65%
0.89%
1.29%
1.63%
Percent
Under
shoot,
P.U.
0.00%
1.36%
0.95%
0.37%
0.94%
90%
Rise
Time,
T
rgo
3.47
3.48
4.16
4.84
5.49
100%
Rise
Time,
T
r
6.58
4.32
5.29
5.73
6.31
Settling
Time,
T
s
4.82
4.04
4.81
5.43
6.04
I I CONFIDENTIAL
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEI4153
TRANDUCERS & APPLICATIONS
ASSOC. PROF. DR. SALLEHUDDIN BIN
IBRAHIM
SEP
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
28 APRIL 2009
ANSWERS FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
-2
SEI4153
1. (a) Describe the principle of operation of a linear variable differential transformer
(LVDT). Your answer must include the schematic diagram of an LVDT and a graph
of ac output versus core position.
(12 marks)
(b) The output of an LVDT is connected to a 5V voltmeter through an amplifier of
amplification factor 250. The voltmeter scale has 100 divisions and the scale can be
read to 1/5 th of a division. An output of 2mV appears across the terminals of the
LVDT when the core is displaced through a distance ofO.5mm. Calculate the
(i) Sensitivity of the LVDT,
(ii) Sensitivity of the whole set-up, and
(iii) Resolution of the instrument in mm.
(6 marks)
(c) Describe the use of a capacitive transducer to measure fluid pressure.
(7 marks)
-3
SEI4153
2. (a) With the aid of a suitable diagram, describe the use of a radio frequency capacitive
transducer to measure the level of liquid in a tank.
(10 marks)
(b) What is the disadvantage of using an RF capacitive transducer.
(4 marks)
(c) Explain with a circuit diagram the principle of operation of strain measurement
system having arrangement for temperature compensation.
(6 marks)
(d) A gage, made of a material having a resistance temperature coefficient of 12 X 10-4
jOe, has a resistance of 120n and a gage factor of2. It is connected to a bridge having
resistances of 120n each. The bridge is balanced at ambient temperature. If the
temperature changes by 20C, find
(i) the output voltage of the bridge if the input voltage is lOY, and
(ii) the equivalent strain represented by the change in temperature.
(5 marks)
-4
SEI4153
3. (a) State 5 characteristics of manometer fluids.
(5 marks)
(b) A manometer uses transfonner oil of specific gravity 0.864 as the measuring liquid.
The scale is graduated in mm of water. If one leg is a 2 mm bore tube and the other a
20mm well, calculate the angle to the horizontal at which the tube and scale must be
inclined to give 4mm scale deflection for a pressure of Imm head of water. Assume,
Imm of water = 9.81Pa.
(6. marks)
(c) With the aid of a suitable diagram, describe the principle of operation an an ionization
gauge.
(6 marks)
(d) State two disadvantages of using an ionization gage.
(2 marks)
(e) Describe with the aid of a suitable graph and diagram(s) the principle of operation of a
thennistor.
(6 marks)
-5
SEI4153
3. (a) State 5 characteristics of manometer fluids.
(5 marks)
(b) A manometer uses transformer oil of specific gravity 0.864 as the measuring liquid.
The scale is graduated in mm of water. If one leg is a 2 mm bore tube and the other a
20mm well, calculate the angle to the horizontal at which the tube and scale must be
inclined to give 4mm scale deflection for a pressure of Imm head of water. Assume,
Imm of water = 9.81Pa.
(6 marks)
(c) With the aid of a suitable diagram, describe the principle of operation an an ionization
gauge.
(6 marks)
(d) State two disadvantages of using an ionization gage.
(2 marks)
(e) Describe with the aid of a suitable graph and diagram(s) the principle of operation of a
thermistor.
(6 marks)
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEL 4223 / SZE 4223
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING I
DATUK PROF. ISHAK BIN ISMAIL
DR. MUSA BIN MOHD MOKJI
SEB / SEL / SEP / SET / SEW
01 /02 / 03 / 10
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
20 APRIL 2009
SECTION A - ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.
SECTION B - ANSWER ONLY ONE (1) QUESTION.
NOTES ON A PIECE OF A4 PAPER ARE ALLOWED.
CALCULATORS ARE ALLOWED.
COVER
-2
SElA223
SECTION A
Q.l a) An FIR system is described as y[n] =x[n] * h[n]. Is the system stable when
L ~ = - c o Ih[n] I< oo? Explain your answer. [5marks]
b) Write down the system function for 5
th
order FIR system. [5marks]
c) Explain the reason of implementing DFT for the frequency response
representation. [5marks]
d) Write down two examples of infinite length signal. [5marks]
e) Describe how an LTI system can be a causal system. [5marks]
Q.2 An LTI system is given as y[n] = x[n] * h[n] where h[n] is a causal signal with
length of3 samples. The DFT for the h[n] is given as H[k] =[4202].
a) If x[n] =S[n], find y[n]. [8 marks]
b) Find H(w). [6 marks]
c) Determine ROC of the system function [3 marks]
d) Can we use 3-point DFT of h[n] and x[n] to compute Y[k]. Explain [4 marks]
e) Determine causality and stability of the system. Explain. [4 marks]
Q.3 Given in Figure Q.3.1 is a signal x[n] and its magnitude spectrum in Figure Q.3.2.
x[n]
4
2
0
-2
-4
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
n
Figure Q.3.1
- 3
SEL4223
IX(w)1
300
200
100
Ol...L...l...-L.L...l..-------------.L..L..:>---
J ~ 1 0.05 0.4
w(rrrad)
Figure Q.3.2
a) Sketch a possible magnitude spectrum of an ideal filter that can be used to
remove the frequency components of w 2:: O.2n from the signal in Figure Q3.1.
[5 marks]
b) Sketch the output signal after x[n] is filtered with the filter described in (a).
[5 marks]
c) Determine the FIR filter characteristics (w
p
, w
s
, We' and minimum filter length) if
frequencies, w 2:: O.OSn are to be removed from the signal x[n] while frequencies
w < O.Oln are to be preserved. Assume the FIR filter is design based on
windowing technique where rectangular window is used. The transition
bandwidth for rectangular window is given as liw = 1.84n/ (L _ 1) where L is
the filter length. [5 marks]
d) Based on the filter characteristics in c), design a causal FIR filter by computing
its time-domain representation, h[n]. [6 marks]
e) State whether the transition bandwidth of the FIR filter is better if the rectangular
window is replaced with Hamming window without changing the filter length.
Transition bandwidth for Hamming window is liw =6.64n/(L _ 1)' [4 marks]
-4
SEL4223
SECTIONB
Q.4 a) The z-transform of a sequence h [n] is given by
H(z) = z+1.7
(z 0.3)(z+ 0.5)
Find its inverse z-transform, h[n] via the partial fraction approach. [10 Marks]
b) Analyse the block diagram in Figure Q.4 and develop the relation between y[n]
and x[n].
x(n)-.....c: +)----...---......"1.
1
'i
+ , . . . . . . - - - + - ~
J----...... .... ytn}
+ ~ - - - - t
Figure Q.4 [7 Marks]
c) The second derivative y[n] of a sequence x[n] at a time instant n is usually
approximated by
y[n] = x[n + 1] - 2x[n] +x[n - 1]
If Y[n] and x[n] denote the output and input of a discrete-time system;
i) Is the system linear?
[3 Marks]
ii) Is it time-invariant?
[3 Marks]
iii) Is it causal?
[2 Marks]
- 5
SEL4223
Q.5 a) An IIR LTI discrete-time system with input x[n] and output y[n] is described by
the difference equation
y[n] + aty[n 1] = box[n] + btx[n 1]
where the constants at , b
o
, and ht are real.
i) Determine the expression for its frequency response for the system H(UJ).
[5 Marks]
ii) For what values of the constants b
i
will the magnitude response be a constant
for all values of (i)? [5 Marks]
b) The frequency representation
Transform) for a signal is
based on the 8 point DFT (Discrete Fourier
X(k)
=
=
=
2 ,
1-1',
1+ j ,
for
for
for
k=O
k=2
k=6
The sampling frequency is 8,000 Hz.
i) Sketch the frequency representation (lX(k)j versus k) of the signal.
[5 Marks]
ii) What is the difference between the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) and
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) in terms of the complexity? [3 Marks]
iii) Write down an expression for the time representation of the signal x[n]
[7 Marks]
-6
SEL4223
Q.6 a) How to determine if a certain FIR digital filter has a linear phase? [4 Marks]
b) Name three methods of designing FIR digital filters? [3 Marks]
c) What is the difference between FIR digital filter and an IIR digital filter?
[3 Marks]
d) Motorola Inc. commissions your research group to design a low pass FIR digital
filter for its audio system. Describe in your own words the steps you need to take
to design this filter. [5 Marks]
e) Design a low pass digital filter using bilinear transformation technique from a
second-order Butterworth analogue filter with a -3 dB cut-off frequency of 50 Hz
at sampling frequency of 600 Hz. The analogue filter is given as
1
H (s) = -S-=-2+-1.-4-14-2-s-+-1
[10 Marks]
- 7
SElA223
Table 1: DTFT properties
Fourier Transform Sequence
X(e
j211f
)
y(n)
x(n)
Y(e
j2
11/ )
j2 j211f
)
1. ax(n)+ by(n)
aX( e 11/) +bY( e
2. x(n - nd), (nd an integer) e- j211flld X( e
j211f
)
X (e
j2tr
(f- fo 3. ej211follx(n)
4. x(- n)
X(e-
j2
11/ )
X* (e
j211f
) ifx[n] real.
I
5. nx(n) j211f
. dX(e )
J
d27if
X( e
j211f
)Y( e
j211f
)
6. x(n) * y(n)
7. x(n)y(n)
['/2 X (e
j2
1fl)Y(e
j2tr
(f-I}du
f,/2
Parseval's Theorem
8. ~ Ilx(nt =_1_ ['/22I X (e
j211f
f df
N ,,=0 Nfs 1,/
9. ~ I:x(n)y*(n) =_1_ ['/2 X(ej211f)Y*(ej211f)df
N ,,=0 Nfs f,/2
I
Table 2: z-transform properties
Properties x(n) X(z)
Linearity
a\x\ (n) + a
2
x
2
(n) atX\ (z) + a
2
X
2
(z)
Shift in time
x(n +1) z[X(z) x(O)]
Multiplication by n
nx(n) d
-z-X(z)
dz
Multiplication by I'
r"x(n)
XC-=-)
r
Convolution co
I>I (k)x
2
(n -k)
k=O
XI (z)X
2
(z)
Initial Value x(O)
limX(z)
z....co
Final Value
limx(n)
" ....co
lim[(z -1)X(z)]
z....1
-9
SEIA223
Table 4: OFT properties
Properties x(n) X(k)
Linearity
atx
I
(n) +a
2
x
2
(n) atX
t
(k) + a
2
X 2 (k)
Shift in time x(n-m)
.2"",
e-
1N
X(k)
Shift in frequency
_l""'n
e N x(n)
X(k-m)
Circular convolution N-I
:2>1(2)x
2
[(n- 2)modN]
,,=0
XI (k)X
2
(k)
Multiplication
Xl (n)x
2
(n)
N-I
I XI (2)X2 [(k 2) modN]
,,=0
Parseval's theorem N-I
NI!x(n)1
2
n=O
N-I
IIX(k)!2
k=O
Table 5: System transfer function for lowpass Butterworth filter with cutoff frequency 1 rad/sec
Order Transfer function H(5)
lSI 1
-
5+1
2
nd 1
52 + 1.41425 + 1
3
rd 1
(5 + 1)(5
2
+ 5 + 1)
4
th 1
(52 + 0.7654s + 1)(5
2
+ 1.84785 + 1)
5
th 1
(5 +1)(5
2
+ 0.61805 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.61805 + 1)
6
th 1
(52 + 0.51765 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.41425 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.93195 + 1)
7
th 1
(5 + 1)(5
2
+0.44505 +1)(5
2
+ 1.24705 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.80195 + 1)
8
th 1
(52 + 0.39025 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.1111s + 1)(5
2
+ 1.66295 + 1)(5
2
+ 1.96165 + 1)
I I CONFIDENTIAL
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEL 4233 I SZE 4283
MICROELECTRONICS I
PROF. DR. RAZALI BIN ISMAIL
DR. ABD. MANAF BIN HASHIM
SELl SEW
01 102
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
20 APRIL 2009
COVER
SEL 4233
2
Q1. (a) Assume that each atom is a hard sphere with the surface of each atom
in contact with the surface of its nearest neighbor. Determine the
percentage of total unit cell volume that is occupied in :
(i) a simple cubic lattice,
(ii) a face-centered cubic lattice,
(iii) a body-centered cubic lattice.
(9 marks)
(b) Show that the probability of an energy state being occupied .6.E above
the Fermi energy is the same as the probability of a state being empty
.6.E below the Fermi level.
(5 marks)
(c) Determine the probability that an energy level is occupied by an
electron if the state is above the Fermi level by 5kT. Then, determine
the probability that an energy level is empty of an electron if the state
is below the Fermi level by 5kT.
(8 marks)
(d) The intrinsic carrier concentration in Silicon is to be no greater than nj
= 1 x 10
12
cm
3
Assume E
g
= 1.12 eV. Determine the maximum
temperature allowed for the silicon.
(3 marks)
Q2. (a) Sketch the energy band diagram for an intrinsic, n-type and p-type
semiconductor. Include in each of the diagram correctly the density of
state function, Fermi-Dirac function, Fermi-level and areas
representing electron and hole concentration.
(9 marks)
(b) Consider a semiconductor, E
g
= 1.50 eV, m
p
* = 10m
n
*, T = 300 K and
nj = 1 x 10
5
cm
3
.
(i) Determine the position of the intrinsic Fermi level with respect
to the center of the bandgap,
SEL 4233
3
(ii) Impurity atoms are added so that the Fermi energy level is 0.45
eV below the center of the bandgap at room temperature. Are
acceptor or donor atoms added? What is the concentration of
impurity atoms added?
(8 marks)
(c) Germanium is doped with 5 x 10
15
donor atoms per cm
3
at T = 300 K.
The dimensions of the Hall device are d = 5 x 10-
3
cm, W = 2 x 10-
2
cm
and L = 10-
1
cm. The current is Ix = 250 J.lA, the applied voltage is Vx
= 100 mY, and the magnetic flux density is B
z
= 500 gauss = 5 x 10-
2
tesla. Refer to Figure Q2(c) for the geometry of the Hall measurement.
Calculate (i) the Hall voltage, (ii) the Hall field and (iii) the carrier
mobility.
(8 marks)
L----------+-:-1. i l-_----------'
~
Figure Q2(c)
SEL 4233
4
Q3. (a) Explain clearly what do you understand by the following:
(i) Low level injection
(ii) Ambipolar transport
(6 marks)
(b) Describe the following terms for a semiconductor exposed to light:
(i) quasi-Fermi level
(ii) minority carrier lifetime for excess minority carrier.
(6 marks)
(e) A uniformly donor-doped silicon wafer maintained at room
temperature is suddenly illuminated with light at time t = O.
Assuming N
D
= 1015/cm3, 't
p
= 10.
6
sec, and a light - induced creation
of lOl7 electron-hole pairs per cm
3
throughout the semiconductor.
determine opn(t) for t > O.
(6 marks)
(d) An n-type Ge sample is used in the Haynes-Shockley experiment
shown in Fig. Q3 (d). The length of the sample, L
o
is 1 em, and the
probes (1) and (2) are separated by L = 0.95 em. The battery voltage
Eo is 2V. A pulse arrives at point (2) 0.25 ms after injection at point
(1); the width of the pulse ..0.t is 117 IlS. Calculate the hole mobility
and diffusion coefficient, and check the result against the Einstein
relation.
(7 marks)
SEL 4233
5
(1) (2)
~ t
~
Pulse
E--=
gen
2 1"
Eo
'-----......-----i 111------+---4---7;>---
~ A
v
Ne= O.368A
/
...
- - - . ~ t
Fig. Q3 (d)
SEL 4233
6
Q4. (a)
An abrupt junction silicon pn diode has a p-layer acceptor doping
density of 10
18
cm'3 and an n-side donor doping density of 10
15
cm'3.
Assume that all the dopants are fully ionized. For this junction in
equilibrium at 300 K:
(i) Calculate the position of the Fermi level (with respect to the
conduction band edge) on both sides of the junction.
(ii) Sketch the band diagram (with the energy axis drawn to scale)
and from it estimate the built-in potential.
(iii) Compute Vbi directly from the doping densities and the intrinsic
concentration and compare the result with that from part (ii).
(iv) Calculate the widths of the depletion regions on either side of
the junction.
(v) Calculate the maximum electric field in the depletion region.
(13 marks)
(b) Calculate the junction capacitance of silicon p+n junction area 1.14 x
10'3 cm
2
ifthere is a reverse bias of 10 volt and doping is 10
16
cm,3 on
the n-side. Assume Vbi = 0.7 volt.
(4 marks)
(c) Describe two physical mechanisms that give rise to the reverse-bias
breakdown in pn junction.
(8 marks
SEL4233
7
Q5. (a) Briefly explain, in tenns of the energy band diagram and carner
movement, what happen when a p-n junction is forward biased.
Sketch the plot of the minority carrier concentrations under forward
bias, where Nd > N
a
Label all the boundary conditions and excess
carrier concentrations, etc.
(10 marks)
(b) A silicon step junction has unifonn impurity doping concentrations of
N
a
= 5 X 10
15
cm
3
and Nd = 1 X 10
15
cm
3
, and a cross-sectional area of
A = 10-
4
cm
2
. Let 'tnO = 0.4 II sec and 'tpo = 0.1 II sec. Consider the
geometry in Figure Q4.
Calculate:
(i) the ideal reverse-saturation current due to holes,
(ii) the ideal reverse-saturation current due to electrons,
(iii) the hole concentration at X
n
if V = 2. Vb ,
a 2 I
(iv)
1
the electron current at x = x +
n 2
L
p
for
1
V = - Vb .
a 2 I
r------<>+ V - o - - - - ~ - - ,
a
, ,
, ,
, ,
, .
,
,
pi In
Figure Q5
(15 marks)
------
SEL 4233
8
EQUATION SHEET
h == 6.626 X 10-
34
J - s
N =2 21ID1n
kT J
3
/
2
fi == 1.055 X 10-
34
J-s
C
(
fi2
q == 1.602 X 1O-
19
C
eV == 1.602 x 10-
19
J
m
o
== 9.11 x 10-
31
kg
k == 8.617 X 10-
5
eVIK
h
2
k
2
E=--+V
2m* 0
3
kT 3/2 EO
np=4 - (m m) ex
p
(--)
np==n?
(
21tfi 2
)
n P kT
n p
-=
3/2
kT 3/4 E
n =2 - (mnmJ exp(--o)
1
( )
21tfi
2
2kT

n j exp(- Eo )
f(E) = 1
2kT
E-E )
1+exp kT f
(
E -E )
n == Nc exp f kT c
(
dV _ 1 dE
F
-
dx q dx
E -E )
p = N v exp vkT f
(
SEL 4233
9
E
f
=E
C N
c
.J8N
c
[
N A-NDJ2 2
+n
2 1
E
f
=E l]
v N tgN
v -Vi} v
- E
E
F
; midgap
J
4 m:
D kT
-=
!l q
dn
J =qll nE+qD
n t"'n n dx
dp
J = qll pE-qD
p t"'p P dx
. .J3/4 3/2 [ E J
19 m
n
mp T g-3
n
i
=2.5xlO -- (-) exp -- em
[
m
o
m
0
300 2kT
J312
n 3
N
c
=2.5xl0
19
m
312
cm
[
m
o
300
v = IxBz
H epd
IxL
11 =
p epV
x
Wd
SEL 4233
10
Table of properties of selected semiconductors (at 300K)
Property Si Ge GaAs
N
c
(em
oj
) 2.8 x 10
1Y
1.04 x 10
1Y
4.7 X lOll
N
v
(em-
j
) 1.04 x 10
1Y
6.0 X lOllS 7.0 X lOllS
I
nj (em-';)
1.5xl0
1U
2.4 x IOu 1.8 X 10
EG (eV) 1.12 0.66 1.42
mn Il110 1.08 0.55 0.067
mp Im
o
0.56 0.37 0.48
E
r
11.7 16 13.1
X (eV) 4.01 4.3 4.07
Iln (em
2
N-s)
1350 3900 8500
II
p
(em
2
N-s)
480 1900 400
CONFIDENTIAL
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
!lIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SEL 4263 / SZE 4263
COMPUTER SYSTEMS AND MULTIMEDIA
ASSOC. PROF. DR. SULAIMAN BIN
MOHDNOR
ASSOC. PROF. HARUN BIN ISMAIL
MR. ZURAIMI BIN YAHYA
SEC / SEE / SEI / SEL / SEM/ SET / SEW
01/02/03
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
21 APRIL 2009
ANSWERS FOUR (4) FOUR QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
SEL4263
-2
QUESTION 1.
A) Given the following program:
.386
.MODEL flat,stdcall
.STACK 4096
ExitProcess PROTO,dwExitCode:DWORD
DumpRegs PROTO
.data
vall dword 10000h
va12 dword 40000h
va13 dword 20000h
finalVal dword ?
.code
Ml PROC
rnov ebx,offset finalVal
rnoveax,lOOOOh
rnov eax,vall
add eax,va12
sub eax,va13
rnov [ebx], eax
call DumpRegs
INVOKE ExitProcess,O
Ml ENDP
END Ml
i) Which statement(s) determines that the code will support protected
mode program? (1 mark)
ii) Which statement determines the entry of the program? (1 mark)
iii) What will happen to the program is assembled if the statement
"Exi tProcess PROTO, dwExi tCode: DWORD" is removed? (1 mark)
iv) The address of which label will be stored in EIP on entry into the
program? declares? (1 mark)
v) Of the following operand type:
register, memory, constant and I/O port,
Name the operand type of:
a. the source operand of the instruction ''mov eax, lOOOOh". (2 marks)
b. the destination operand of the instruction ''mov [ebx], eax". (2 marks)
SEL4263
-3
c. the source operand ofthe instruction "mov ebx, offset
final.Val". (2 marks)
d. the destination operand of the instruction "add eax,va12".(2 marks)
e. the operand of the instruction "call DumpReqs". (2 marks)
B) Given the following program name as "Operator. asm":
TITLE Operators (Operator.asm)
.386
.model flat,stdcall
. stack 4096
ExitProcess proto exitcode:dword
.data
bytel BYTE 10,20,30
array1 WORD 30 DUP(?),O,O
array2 WORD 5 DUP(3 DUP(?))
array3 DWORD 1,2,3,4
digitStr BYTE '12345678',0
myArray BYTE 10,20,30,40,50,
60,70,80,90,100
Xl LENGTHOF bytel 3
X2 LENGTHOF array1 30 + 2
X3 LENGTHOF array2 i 5 * 3
X4 LENGTHOF array3 i 4
X5 LENGTHOF digitStr 9
X6 LENGTHOF myArray 10
X7 SIZEOF bytel 1 * 3
X8 SIZEOF array1 2 * (30 + 2)
X9 SIZEOF array2 2 * (5 * 3)
X10 SIZEOF array3 4 * 4
Xll = SIZEOF digitStr i 1 * 9
. code
main PROC
lea ebx,bytel
int 3
mov eax,x1
mov ebx,x3
mov ecx,x5
mov edx,x11
lea esi,arrayl
lea edi,array2
lea ebp,digitstr
invoke ExitProcess,O
main ENDP
END main
--------- -
SEL 4263
-4
The program was successfully assembled and linked. When the program
"operator.exe" was executed on Windows Debugger environment, the
following is the display on the Windows Debugger Command window.
- ~ - ~ - - - - - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - ~ - - - - - - -
... v
:e "\, 1. , ~ t ,,\, fc it \1 <. ' ~
~ - ~ ~ ~ - -- ~ --- ......... ~
Microsoft (R) Windows Debugger Version 6.6.0003.5
Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
CommandLine: Operator.exe
Symbol search path is: c:'symbolsl
Executable search path is:
odLoad: 00400000 00407000 Operator.exe
ModLoad: 77d30000 77e57000 ntdll.dll
ModLoad: 77e60000 77f3bOOO C:'Windows'systam32'kerne132.dll
(17fO.3b4): Break instruction exception - code B0000003 (first chance)
eax-77ea4Bff ebx-00404000 ecx-OOOOOOOO edx-00401005 esi-OOOOOOOO edi-OOOOOO
eip-00401016 esp-0012ffBc ebp-0012ff94 iopl-O nv up ei pl zr na po
cs-001b ss-0023 ds-0023 9s-0023 fs-003b gs-OOOO efl-000002
WARNING: Unable to verify checksum for Operator.exe
Operator!mainTOx6:
00401016 cc int 3
Base on the initial condition of the registers given on the Windows Debugger
Command window, determine the value of the following registers, ifthe next
preceding instructions are executed up till the point before the process "exit".
i) EDX (1 mark)
ii) ESI (1 mark)
SEL4263
-5
C) Refer to the following program:
TITLE Two-Dimensional Table (Table.asm)
INCLUDE Irvine32.inc
.data
tableB
RowSize
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
= S
lOh,
60h,
OBOh,
20h,
70h,
OCOh,
30h,
BOh,
ODOh,
40h, SOh
90h, OAOh
OEOh, OFOh
.code
main PROC
Base-Index mode:
mov
mov
ebx,OFFSET tableB
al, [ebx + 2*RowSize+l]
exit
main ENDP
END main
What is the content of AL when the instruction ''mov a1, [ebx +
2*RowSi.ze+l] " is executed? (2 marks)
SEL 4263
-6
D) Refer to the following program:
.MODEL FLAT,stdcall
exit equ <invoke Exi tProcess, 0>
ExitProcess proto ExitCode:dword
COORD STRUCT
X DWORD ?
Y DWORD ?
COORD ENDS
Rectangle STRUCT
UpperLeft COORD <>
LowerRight COORD <>
Rectangle ENDS
.data
startofdata label byte
posl COORD <>
pos2 COORD <3,12>
rectl Rectangle <>
rect2 Rectangle { }
rect3 Rectangle { {10,20J, (5,15} }
rect4 Rectangle < <10,20>, <5,15> >
.code
main PROC
int 3
;Direct reference to a member.
mov eax, pos2.Y
mov ebx, pos2.X
mov posl.X,ebx
mov posl.Y,eax
mov ecx,sizeof rectl
mov esi,OFFSET rectl
mov {Rectangle PTR [esi]l .UpperLeft.Y, 40
mov edi,OFFSET rect2.LowerRight
mov edi,OFFSET rect2.LowerRight.X
exit
main ENDP
END main
Assume absolute address of startofdata is 404000H.
i) What is the content of EAX when the instruction ''mov ebx,
pos2 . x" is executed? (2 marks)
ii) What is the content of the doubleword data of address 4
the instruction ''mov posl. X, ebx" is executed?
04000H when
(2 marks)
iii) What is the absolute address oflabel rectI? (2 marks)
iv) What is the content of ECX when the instruction ''mov
rectl" is executed?
ecx, sizeof
(2 marks)
SEL4263
-7
QUESTION 2.
Refer to the following source file named as "Sum mainf. asm"
TITLE Integer Summation program
.386
.model flat,stdcall
.stack 4096
Prompt For Integers PROTO,
ptrPrompt:PTR BYTE, prompt string
ptrArray:PTR DWORD, points to the array
arraySize:DWORD size of the array
ArraySum PROTO,
count: DWORD size of the array
DisplaySum PROTO,
ptrPrompt:PTR BYTE, ; prompt string
theSum:DWORD ; sum of the array
modify Count to change the size of the array:
Count = 3
.data
promptl BYTE "Enter a signed integer: ",0
prompt2 BYTE "The sum of the integers is: It,O
array DWORD Count DUP(?)
sum DWORD ?
. code
main PROC
int 3
call top
main ENDP
top proc
INVOKE PromptForIntegers,; input the array
ADDR promptl,
ADDR array,
Count
INVOKE ArraySum, sum the array
ADDR array, (returns sum in EAX)
Count
mov sum,eax save the sum
INVOKE DisplaySum, display the sum
ADDR prompt2,
sum
ret
top endp
:-----------------------------------------------------
PromptForIntegers PROC,
ptrArray:PTR DWORD, pointer to array
Prompts the user for an array of integers and fills
the array with the user's input.
Returns: nothing
:----------------------------------------------------
pushad ; save all registers
SEL4263
-8
mov ecx,arraySize
crop ecx,O ; array size <= O?
jle L2 ; yes: quit
mov edx,ptrPrompt ; address of the prompt
mov esi,ptrArray
Ll:
mov [esil,eax store in array
add esi,4 next integer
loop Ll
L2:
popad ; restore all registers
ret
PromptForlntegers ENDP
ArraySum PROC,
ptrArray:PTR DWORD, pointer to array
arraySize:DWORD size of array
;----------------------------------------------------
push ecx ; don't push EAX
push esi
mov eax,O ; set the sum to zero
mov esi,ptrArray
mov ecx,arraySize
crop ecx,O ; array size <= O?
j Ie L2; yes: qui t
Ll:
add eax, [esil ; add each integer to sum
add esi,4 point to next integer
loop Ll; repeat for array size
L2:
pop esi
pop ecx;
ret
ArraySum ENDP
j-----------------------------------------------------
DisplaySum PROC,
theSum:DWORD ; the array sum
push eax
push edx
mov edx,ptrProropt; pointer to prompt
mov eax,theSum
pop edx
pop eax
ret
DisplaySum ENDP
END main
SEL4263
-9
When Sum_ mainf. asm is assembled the following listing file is created,
Microsoft (R) Macro Assembler Version 6.15.8803 12/25/08 08:38:55
Integer Summation Program (Sum_mainf.asm) Page 1 - 1
TITLE Integer Summation Program
.386
.model flat, stdcall
.stack 4096
prompt For Integers PROTO,
ArraySum PROTO,
ptrArray:PTR DWORD, ; points to the array
count: DWORD size of the array
DisplaySum PROTO,
theSum:DWORD ; sum of the array
modify Count to change the size of the array:
= 00000003 Count = 3
00000000 .data
00000000 45 6E 74 65 72 prompt1 BYTE "Enter a signed integer: ",0
20 61 20 73 69
67 6E 65 64 20
69 6E 74 65 67
65 72 3A 20 00
00000019 54 68 65 20 73 prompt2 BYTE "The sum of the integers is: ",0
75 6D 20 6F 66
20 74 68 65 20
69 6E 74 65 67
65 72 73 20 69
73 3A 20 00
00000036 00000003 [ array DWORD Count DUP(?)
00000000
J
00000042 00000000 sum DWORD ?
00000000 . code
00000000 main PROC
00000000 CC int 3
00000001 E8 00000007 call top
00000006 6A 00 push +OOOOOOOOOh
00000008 E8 00000000 E call ExitProcess
OOOOOOOD main ENDP
OOOOOOOD top proc
INVOKE promptForIntegers,; input the array
ADDR prompt1,
ADDR array,
Count
OOOOOOOD 6A 03 push +000000003h
OOOOOOOF 68 00000036 R pUSh OFFSET array
00000014 68 00000000 R push OFFSET prompt1
00000019 E8 00000022 call Prompt ForIntegers
INVOKE ArraySum,
sum the array
ADDR array, (returns sum in EAX)
Count
0000001E 6A 03 push +000000003h
SEL4263
-10
00000020 6B 00000036 R
00000025 EB 00000034
0000002A A3 00000042 R
0000002F FF 35 00000042
00000035 6B 00000019 R
0000003A EB 00000041
0000003F C3
00000040
00000040
00000040 55
00000041 BB EC
00000043 60
00000044 BB 40 10
00000047 B3 F9 00
0000004A 7E 00
0000004C BB 55 OB
0000004F BB 75 OC
00000052
00000052 B9 06
00000054 B3 C6 04
00000057 E2 F9
00000059
00000059 61
0000005A C9
0000005B C2 OOOC
0000005E
0000005E
0000005E 55
0000005F BB EC
00000061 51
00000062 56
00000063 BB 00000000
0000006B BB 75 OB
0000006B BB 40 OC
0000006E B3 F9 00
00000071 7E 07
00000073
00000073 03 06
00000075 83 C6 04
0000007B E2 F9
0000007A
0000007A 5E
0000007B 59
0000007C C9
00000070 C2 OOOB
OOOOOOBO
OOOOOOBO
push OFFSET array
call ArraySum
mov swn,eax save the sum
INVOKE OisplaySum, display the sum
AOOR prompt2,
sum
R * push sum
push OFFSET prompt2
call OisplaySum
ret
top endp
,._----------------------------------------------------
PromptForIntegers PROC,
ptrArray:PTR OWORO, pointer to array
arraySize:OWORO size of the array
Prompts the user for an array of integers and fills
the array with the user's input.
Returns: nothing
push ebp
mov ebp, esp
pushad ; save all registers
mov ecx,arraySize
cmp ecx,O ; array size <= O?
j 1e L2 ; yes: quit
mov edx, ptrPrompt ; address of the prompt
mov esi,ptrArray
L1:
mov [esil,eax store in array
add esi,4 next integer
loop L1
L2:
popad restore all registers
ret
leave
ret OOOOCh
PromptForIntegers ENOP
ArraySum PROC,
ptrArray:PTR OWORO, ; pointer to array
arraySize:OWORD ; size of array
;----------------------------------------------------
push ebp
mov ebp, esp
push ecx don't push EAX
push esi
mov eax,O ; set the sum to zero
mov esi,ptrArray
mov ecx,arraySize
cmp ecx,O ; array size <= O?
j le L2; yes.: quit
L1:
add eax, [esi] ; add each integer to sum
add esi,4 ; point to next integer
loop L1; repeat for array size
L2:
pop esi
pop ecx;
ret
leave
ret OOOOBh
ArraySum ENOP
;-----------------------------------------------------
OisplaySum PROC,
SEL4263
-11
theSum:DWORD ; the array sum
00000080 55 * push ebp
00000081 8B EC * mov ebp, esp
00000083 50 push eax
00000084 52 push edx
00000085 8B 55 08 mov edx,ptrPrompt; pointer to prompt
00000088 8B 45 OC mov eax,theSum
0000008B 5A pop edx
0000008C 58 pop eax
ret
00000080 C9 * leave
0000008E C2 0008 ret 00008h
00000091 DisplaySum ENDP
END main
When Sum_mainf . exe executed on Windows Debugger the following is the
Command window display:
1N .... ,.
. >..Command - Sum_
,s:" . .
Microsoft (R) Windows Debugger Version 6.6.0003.5
Copyr1ght (c) M1Crosoft Corporat1on. All r1ghts reserved.
Sum_mdinf.exe
Symbol search path is: c:'symbols
Executable search path is:
ModLoad: 00400000 00407000 Sum_mainf.exe
odLoad: 77d30000 77e57000 ntdll.dll
ModLoad: 77e60000 77f3bOOO
(170c.1030): Break instruction except10n - code 80000003 (f1rst chance)
eax-77ea48ff ebx-7ffd4000 ecx-OOOOOOOO edx-0040l00a eS1-00000000 edi-OOOOOOOO
eip-00401038 esp-0012ff8c ebp-0012ff94 lop1-0 nv up e1 pI zr na po nc
cs-001b ss-0023 ds-0023 es-0023 fs-003b gs-OOOO efl-00000246
WARNING: Unable to verify checksum for Sum_ma1nf.exe
Sum_mdinf !main:
00401038 cc int 3
A) Refer to the procedure PromptForIntegers: How many argument is
used by the procedure to receive data from its caller? (1 mark)
B) Refer to the procedure DisplaySum: Does the procedure return any data to
its caller? (1 mark)
C) Refer to the procedure ArraySum:
i) What is used by the procedure to return data to its caller? (1 mark)
ii) Which of the argument is used by the program as an input which is a
reference to an address location where data can be taken? (1 mark)
SEL 4263
-12
D) The absolute address of label promptl is given at address 00404000H.
i) What is the absolute address of label mai.n? (1 mark)
ii) What is the absolute address of label top? (1 mark)
iii) What is the content of ESP and EIP before the instruction at address
00000001 is executed? (2 marks)
iv) What is the content of ESP and EIP, and the content of STACK that has
changed just after the program at address 00000001 is executed?
(3 marks)
v) What is the absolute address of label array? (l mark)
vi) Give the instruction generated by the following instruction (use the
appropriate and correct labels if necessary):
INVOKE PromptForIntegers,: input the array
ADDR prompt 1,
ADDR array,
Count
(4 marks)
vii) Show the content ESP and the content of stack changed after the
following instruction is executed completely and ESP has been set as
offset to the parameters declared for PromptForlntegers:
INVOKE PromptForIntegers,: input the array
ADDR prompt 1,
ADDR array,
Count
(6 marks)
viii) Compare the source and listing file in the procedure
PrornptForlntegers
0000005A e9 leave
00000058 e2 OOOe ret OOOOeh
a. Why is it in the listing file, the following instruction is added in the
PrornptForlntegers procedure? (2 marks)
b. Why is the value OOOch added as the operand of the ret
instruction?
(l marks)
SEL4263
-13
QUESTION 3.
A) Write a procedure for a protected mode program identified as ReadString
which has the function of reading from the keyboard a string of up to a maximum
256 character. The procedure wi II receive the address of the buffer to hold the
string by the calling program through it first and only parameter. The procedure
will return the number of byes read in variable identified as bytesRead.
Assume the program will not encounter any hardware error. Assume all
necessary prototypes, variables and constants will be declared in the main
program. (7 marks)
B) Write a procedure for a protected mode program identified as Wr i teString,
which will print to the console display, the string of ASCII characters whose
address is passed by the calling program through its first parameter and the
number of bytes to print is passed through its second parameter. Assume the
program will not encounter any hardware error. Assume the necessary
prototypes, variables and constants will be declared in the main program. (7 marks)
C) Write the complete main program which will read a string of character from the
keyboard and display the entered string to the console display using procedures
ReadString and Wri teString. Declare all necessary prototypes, variables
and constants that need in procedures ReadString and WriteString.
(11 marks)
I 205
1-,
SEL4263
-14
QUESTION 4.
Figure 4.0 shows an interface for a particular application.
(10,10)
..............
60
Figure 4.0
Such interface can be generated either using normal window creation with child
control, or it can be generated using modal dialog box.
The top left of the Dialog box is at coordinates (10,10) in the screen and
the size of box is 205 by 60 in dialog units. The top left of the EDITTEXT
box is at coordinates (15,17) in the Dialog Box Window and the size of
EDITTEXT box is III by 13 in dialog units. The top left of the
DEFAULTPUSHBUITON box is at coordinates (141,10) in the Dialog
Box Window and the size of the DEFAULTPUSHBUITON box is 52 by
13 in dialog units. The top left of the PUSHBUTTON box is at
coordinates (141,26) in the Dialog Box Window.
a) Produce the resource file for the above interface using:
i) Normal window creation with child control
ii) Modal Dialog box
(10 marks)
b) Write down the code(s) of API function(s) that is(are) required to generate
the interface in Figure 4.0 based on the respective resource fiJe you have
produced in Question 4a):
(10 marks)
c) Based on the respective resource file produced as required in Question 4a),
write down the code required to handle the message when the Exit button
in Figure 4.0 is selected.
(5 marks)
SEL4263
-15
QUESTION 5.
Figure 5.0 shows an interface of a common control for audio and video player.
308
(6,25)
(6,85)
Figure 5.0
a) Using modal dialog box, create a resource script file that describes
the appearance of the interface shown in figure 5.0.
(10 marks)
b) In response to PLAY in either groupbox, an open file dialog
session has to be presented. Write the code required to present the
open file dialog box to the user to acquire the required file name.
(10 marks)
c) In order to prevent the player from playing the wrong file format,
further processing is required in order to determine whether the file
format is either wav file or avi file. Write additional code to
determine the correct file format.
(5 marks)
155
SEL 4263
-16
QUESTION 6.
Figure 6.0 shows an interface in network communication. On pressing Connect,
Edit control is presented where the user enters an URL as shown in figure 6.1.
From then on, the application will acquire and process the URL string into
hostname, create socket and make a connection.
Figure 6.0 Figure 6.1
Write a complete procedure in assembly language to acquire the URL string,
convert to hostname, create socket and make a connection with reference to the
pseudo code below:
Procedure connectsocket ,[ parameter list};
Get dialog item in edit box and store in URL string;
Convert to hostname only and store in Hostname;
Create socket
If <> INVALID SOCKET
Convert Hostname to IP number and store in sockaddrjn structure
Convert port (default 80) to network byte order and store in
sockaddr in structure
Set to operate in non blocking mode
Connect to host
Else Show error
End procedure connectsocket;
State all variables used and make necessary assumption as required.
(25 marks)
SEL 4263
>
APPENDIX
I .
WJn32 APIs
ReadConsole
The ReadConsole function reads character input frem the console
input buffer and removes it from the buffer.
BOOL ReadConsole(
HANDLE hConsoleInput, II handle to a console input buffer
LPVOIO IpBuffer, II address of buffer to receive data
OWORO nNumberOfCharsToRead, II nuwber of characters to read
LPOWORO IpNumberOfCharsRead, II address of of characters
II read
LPVOIO IpReserved II reserved
) ;
ParalOO te:r:/f
hConsoleInput
Handle to the console input buffer. The handle must have
GENERIC READ access.
IpBuffer
Pointer to a buffer that receives the data read from the
cunsole input buffer.
nNumberOfCharsToRead
Specifies the number of characters to read. Because the
functlon can read either 2-byte unicode or l-byte ANSI
characters, the size of the buffer pointed to by the
IpBuffer parameter should be at least nNumberOfCharsToRead
* sizeof(TCHAR).
IpNumberOfCharsRead
Pointer to a 32-bit variable that receives the number of
characters actually read.
IpReserved
Reserved; must be NULL.
WriteConsole
The WriteConsole function writes a character string to a console
screen buffer beginning at the current cursor location.
BOOL WriteConsole(
HANDLE hConsoleOutput, II handle to a console screen buffer
CONST VOID *lpBuffer, II pointer to buffer to write from
DWORO nNumberOfCharsToWrite,
II number of characters to write
LPDifORD IpNl1mberOfCharsWri tten,
II pointer to nlrnIDer of characters
written
LPVOID IpReserved II reserved
) ;
Pazatoet'e,7:S
iconsoleOutput
Handle to the console screen buffer' to be written to. The
handle must have GENERIC WRITE accesS.
IpEuf[er _.
Pointer to a buffer that contains characters to be written
to the screen buffer.
nNumberOfCharsToWrite
Specifies the number of characters to write.
IpNumberOfCharsWritten
Pointer to a 32-bit variable that receives the number of
characters actually written.
IpReserved
Reserved; must be NULL.
Retu.rn Values
If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero.
If the function fails, the return value is zero. To get extended
error information, call GetLastError.
GetOpenFIleName PROTO
Ipofn:DWORD Ilpointer to stucture
OPENFILENAHE struct
lStructSize DWORD ? - length, in bytes
hwndOwner HWND ? - Identifies the window that owns the dialog
box, handle value or null
hInstance HINSTANCE ? - Instance handle of application that
creates the open file dialog
IpstrFilter LPCTSTR? -Pointer to a buffer containing pairs of
null-terminated filter strings
lpstrCustomFilter LPTSTR ? - Pointer to a static buffer with of
null-terminated filter strings
nMaxCustFilter DWORD ? - bytes or Characters identified by
IpstrCustomFilter
nFilterIndex DWORD? - index of the currently selected filter
pointed to by IpstrFilter
IpstrFile LPTSTR ? - Pointer to a buffer of a filename, to
initialize the File edit control
nMaxFile DWORD ? - size in bytes or characters of buffer
pointed by lpstrFile
IpstrFileTitle LPTSTR ? - pointer to a buffer that receives the
filename and extension
nMaxFileTitle DWORD ? - size in bytes or characters of pointed
by IpstrFileTitle
IpstrInitialDir LPCTSTR ? - Pointer to a string that specifies
the initial file directory
SEL 4263
-18
lpstrTitle LPCTSTR ? - Pointer to a string to be placed in the
title bar of the dialog box
Flags DWORD ? - A set of bit flags use to initialize the
dialog box
nFileOffset WORD ? - zero-based offset of the path to filename
pointed by IpstrFile
nFileExtension WORD ? - zero-based offset of the path of
extension pointed by IpstrFile
IpstrDefExt LPCTSTR ? - Points to a buffer that contains the
default extension.
lCustData DWORD ? - data that the system passes to hook
procedure by IpfnHook
IpfnHook LPOFNHOOKPROC ? - Pointer to a hook procedure
IpTemplateName LPCTSTR ? - Pointer of null-terminated string of
template by hlnstance
OPENFILENAME ends
Mel OPEN PARMS struct
-dwcallback DWORD ? ; The low-order word specifies a
window handle used
; for the MC! NOTIFY flag.
wDeviceID MCIDEVICEID ? ; returned to application.
IpstrDeviceType LPCSTR ? ; Name or constant identifier of
the device type.
IpstrElementName LPCSTR Device element (often a path) .
IpstrAlias LPCSTR ? ; Optional device alias.
MCI_OPEN_PARMS ends
Mel PLAY PARMS struct
-dwCallback DWORD ? ; he low-order word specifies a window
handle used for
; the MCI_NOTIFY flag.
dwFrom DWORD ? Position to play from.
dwTo DWORD ? ; Position to play to.
MCI PLAY PARMS ends
WSAStartup PROTO
wVersionRequested:DWORD IIHighest version of Windows Sockets
Ilcaller can use.
lpWSAData: IIPointer to WSDATA data structure
socket PROTO
af : DWORD, liThe address family used. Use
AF_INET to use the Iladdress family
of Tep and UDP
type DWORD, liThe type of socket to create. Use
SOCK_STREAM to Ilcreate streaming
socket (using TCPl or IISOCK DGRAM
to create datagram socket (using
IIUDP)
protocol: DWORD, II The protocol to be used, this
value depends on the Iladdress
family, specify IPPROTO TCP to
create TCP sllocket
connect PROTO
s: DWORD, II Unconnected socket to be connected
name: DWORD, IIPointer to sockaddr structure that
contains the name II (address) of remote
socket to connect to
namelen: DWORD IISize of structure pointed to by name
htons PROTO
hostshort : DWORD IIPort number to convertsockaddr_in
structure
sin_family word ?
sin port word ?
sin-addr in addr <>
sin zero byte 8 dup (2)
sockaddr in- ends
CreabeWindowEx PROTO
dwExStyle : DWORD, II extended window style
IpClassName :LPCTSTR, II pointer to registered
class name
IpWindowName :LPCTSTR, II pointer to window name
dwStyle : DWORD, II window style
x :int x, II horizontal position of window
y :int y, II vertical position of window
nWidth :int nWidth, II window width
nHeight :int nHeight, II window height
hWndParent :HWND, II handle to parent or owner window
hMenu :HMENU, II handle to menu, or child-window
identifier
hlnstance :HINSTANCE, II handle to application instance
IpParam :LPVOID II pointer to window-creation data
DialogBoxParam PROTO
hlnstance :HINSTANCE, II handle to application instance
IpTemplateName :LPCTSTR, II identifies dialog box
template
:HWND, II handle to owner window
IpDialogFunc :DLGPROC, II pointer to dialog box
procedure
SEL 4263
-19
dwInitParam :LPARAM II initialization value
EndDialog PROTO
hDlg :HWND, II handle to dialog box
nResult :int nResult II value to return
SendHessage PROTO
hWnd :HWND, II handle of destination window
Msg :OINT, II message to send
wParam :WPARAM, II first message parameter
IPararn :LPARAM II second message parameter
GetDlgltemText PROTO
hDlg :HWND, II handle of dialog box
nIDDlgltem :int. II identifier of control
IpString :LPTSTR, II address of buffer for text
nMaxCount :int II maximum size of string
lstrlen PROTO
IpString :LPCTSTR II address of string to count
CharLower PROTO
Ipsz :LPTSTR II single character or pointer to string
gethostbyname PROTO
name : LPCSTR IIA pointer to the name of the host.
WSAAsyncSelect PROTO
s : SOCKET, IIA descriptor identifying the socket for
which event notification is Ilrequired.
hWnd: HWND IIA handle identifying the window
which should receive a Ilmessage
Ilwhen a network event occurs.
wMsg ; int liThe message to be received when a
network event occurs.
lEvent: long IIA bitmask which specifies a
combination of network Ilevents in
which the application is interested.
WindowProc Function
The WindowProc function is an application-defined function that
processes messages sent to a window. The WNDPROC type defines a
pointer to this callback function. WindowProc is a placeholder for
the application-defined function name.
Syntax
LRESULT CALLBACK WindowProc(
HWND hwnd,
OINT w'1sg,
WPARAM t<lParam,
LPARAM lParam
) ;
Parameters
hwnd
[in] Handle to the window.
uMsg
[in] Specifies the message.
wParam
[in] Specifies additional message information. The
contents of this parameter depend on the value of
the uMsg parameter.
lFaram
[in] Specifies additional message information. The
contents of this parameter depend on the value of
the uMsg parameter.
Return Value
The return value is the result of the message processing and
depends on the message sent.
OialogProc Function
The oialogProc function is an application-defined callback
function used with the and families of
SEL 4263
-20
functions. It processes messages sent to a modal or modeless
dialog box. The DLGPROC type defines a pointer to this callback
function. DialogProc is a placeholder for the application-defined
function name.
Syntax
INT .PTR CALLBACK DialogProc(
HI'lND hwndDlg,
UINT lli'1sg,
WPARAM wParam,
LPARAN lParam
) ;
Parameters
hwndDlg
(in) Handle to the dialog box.
uMsg
(in) Specifies the message.
wParam
(in] Specifies additional message-specific
information.
lParam
[in] specifies additional message-specific
information.
Return Value
Typically, the dialog box procedure should return TRUE if it
processed the message, and FALSE if it did not. If the dialog box
procedure returns FALSE, the dialog manager performs the default
dialog operation in response to the message.
Resource Definiton
tdefine Hame value II assigns the given value to the
specified name
menuID MENU II defines the contents of a menu
resource
BEGIN
... item-definitions
END
menuID - Identifies the menu
POPUP text II marks the beginning of the
definition of a pop-up menu.
BEGIN
item-definitions
END
text - Specifies the name of the pop-up menu
MENUITEM text,result II defines a menu item.
MENUITEM SEPARATOR I/serves as a dividing bar between two
active //menu items in a pop-up menu.
text - Specifies the name of the menu item.
result - Specifies the result generated when the user
selects the menu item
GROUPBOX text, id, x, y, width, height [, style [,
extended-style]]
text - Specifies text that is displayed with the
GROUPBOX
id - Specifies the control identifier, for GROUPBOX
use ID STATIC
x - S p ~ c i f i e s the location on the screen of the left
side of the dialog, in dialog units.
y - Specifies the location on the screen of the top
of the dialog, in dialog units.
width - Specifies the width of ' the dialog, in dialog
units.
SEL 4263
-21- .
height - Specifies the height of the dialog, in PUSHBUTTON text, ld, x, y, width, height [, style [,
dialog units. extended-stylel]
caption - title bar text
style - Specifies the control styles, use as F ~ A T text - Specifies text that is displayed
extended-style - optional, not used id - Specifies the control identifier
x - Specifies the location on the screen of the left
MENU rnenuname II defines the dialog box's menu side of the dialog, in dialog units.
rnenunarne - Specifies the menu to use. y - Specifies the location on the screen of the top
EOITTEXT text, id, x, y, width, height [, style [,
width - Specifies the width of the dialog, in dialog
extended-style]]
units.
text - Specifies text that is displayed
height - Specifies the height of the dialog, in
id - Specifies the control identifier
dialog units.
WNDCLASSEX structure
y - Specifies the location on the screen of the top
of the dialog, in dialog units. Syntax (C++)
units.
typedef struct {
height - Specifies the height of the
UINT cbSize;
dialog, in dialog units.
UINT style;
WNOPROC IpfnWndProc;
GROUPBOX text, id, x, y, width, height [, style [,
int cbClsExtra;
extended-style]]
int cbWndExtra;
text - Specifies text that is displayed with the
HINSTANCE hInstance;
GROUPBOX
HICON hIcon;
id - Specifies the control identifier, for GROUPBOX
HCURSOR hCursor;
use 10 STATIC
HBRUSH hbrBackground;
x,y,width and height - as above
LPCTSTR IpszMenuName;
style - Specifies the control styles, use BS FLAT
LPCTSTR lpszClassName;
extended-style - optional, not used
HICON hIconSm;
WNOCLASSEX, *PWNOCLASSEX;
OEFPUSHBUTTON text, id, x, y, width, height [, style [,
extended-style]] cbSlze
Specifies the size, in bytes, of this structure. Set this member to
text - Specifies text that is displayed slzeof(WNDCLASSEX}. Be sure to set this member before calling the
id - Specifies the control identifier GetClasslnfoEx function.
stvle
Specifies the class style(s}. This member can be any combination of the
y - Specifies the locatian on the screen af the top
Class Styles.
IpfnWndProc
Pointer to the window procedure. vou must use the CallWlndowProc
units.
function to call the window procedure. For more information, see
height - Specifies the height of the dialog, in
WindowProc.
dialog units.
cbClsExtra
SEL 4263
-22
Specifies the number of extra bytes to allocate following the window-class
COLOR_WINDOW
structure. The system initializes the bytes to zero.
COLORJNINDOWFRAME
ebWndExtra
COLOR_WINDOWTEXT
instance. The system initializes the bytes to zero. If an application uses
WNDCLASSEX to register a dialog box created by using the CLASS directive The system automatically deletes class background brushes when the class
in the resource file, it must set this member to DLGWiNDOWEXTRA. is unregistered by using UnreglsterClass. An application should not delete
Specifies the number of extra bytes to allocate following the window
hlnstance
these brushes.
Handle to the Instance that contains the window procedure for the class.
hleon
When this member is NULL, an application must paint Its own background
Handle to the class icon. This member must be a handle to an Icon
whenever it is requested to paint in its client area. To determine whether
resource. If this member is NULL, the system provides a default icon.
the background must be painted, an application can either process the
hCursor
WM ERASEBKGND message or test the fErase member of the
Handle to the class cursor. This member must be a handle to a cursor
PAINTSTRUCT structure filled by the BeglnPaint function.
resource. If this member is NULL, an application must explicitly set the
cursor shape whenever the mouse moves into the application's window.
hbrBaekground IpszMenuName
Handle to the class background brush. This member can be a handle to the Pointer to a null-terminated character string that specifies the resource
physical brush to be used for painting the background, or It can be a color name of the class menu, as the name appears in the resource file. If you
value. A color value must be one of the following standard system colors use an Integer to identify the menu, use the MAKEINTRESOURCE macro. If
(the value 1 must be added to the chosen color). If a color value is given, this member Is NULL, windows belonging to this class have no default
you must convert it to one of the following HBRUSH types: menu.
IpszClassName
Pointer to a null-terminated string or Is an atom. If this parameter Is an

COLOR_ACTIVEBORDER
atom, It must be a class atom created by a previous call to the ReglsterClass
or ReglsterClassEx function. The atom must be in the low-order word of COLOR_ACTIVECAPTJON

COLOR_APPWORKSPACE IpszC1assName; the high-order word must be zero.

COLOR_BACKGROUND

COLOR_BTNFACE
If IpszClassName Is a string, It specifies the window class name. The class
name can be any name registered with ReglsterClass or ReglsterClassEx, or
COLOR_BTNSHADOW
any of the predefined control-class names.

COLOR_BTNTEXT

COLOR_CAPTIONTEXT
The maximum length for IpszClassName is 256. If IpszClassName Is greater

COLOR_GRAYTEXT
than the maximum length, the ReglsterclassEx function will fail.

COLOR_HIGHLIGHT

COLOR_HIGHLIGHITEXT
hleonSm

COLOR_INACTIVEBORDER Handle to a small icon that is associated with the window class. If this
member is NULL, the system searches the Icon resource speCified by the

COLOR_INACTIVECAPTION
hleon member for an icon of the appropriate size to use as the small Icon.

COLOR_MENU
COLOR_MENUTEXT

COLOR_SCROLLBAR
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
SEL 4263
-23
4000h
, . _ Constants defined in Windows Environment I FILE_ATTRIBllTE_ENCRYPTED
, - --- my own constants - - - --
DO NOT SHARE = 0 FILE READ DATA = 1
NULL =-0 FILE-WRITE DATA = 2
TRUE = 1 FILE-APPEND DATA = 4
FALSE = 0 FILE=DELETE=CHILD = 40h
; Win32 Console handles GENERIC_READ 80000000h
STD_INPUT_HANDLE EQU -10 GENERIC WRITE 40000000h
STD_OUTPUT_HANDLE EQU -11 ; predefined Win API constant GENERIC_EXECUTE 2COOOOOOh
GENERIC ALL lOOOOOOOh
Input Mode flags (used by GetConso1eMode & SetConso1eMode):
ENABLE_PROCESS ED_INPUT 1
;------------------ From winbase.h
ENABLE LINE INPUT = 2 CREATE NEW = 1
ENABLE ECHO INPUT 4 CREATE ALWAYS = 2
ENABLE WINDOW INPUT 8 OPEN EXISTING = 3
ENABLE-MOUSE INPUT 16 OPEN-ALWAYS = 4
TRUNCATE_EXISTING = 5
; Event constants
KEY EVENT = 1 FILE BEGIN o
MOUSE EVENT = 2 FILE CURRENT 1
WINDOW BUFFER SIZE EVENT window change event record FILE_END 2
MENU EVENT - = B menu event record
FOCUS_EVENT = 16 focus change INVALID HANDLE VALUE = -1
Output mode flags (used by GetConsoleMode & SetConsoleMode):
exit EQU <INVOKE ExitProcess,O> exit program
ENABLE PROCESSED OUTPUT = 1
ENABLE=WRAP_AT_EOL_OUTPUT = 2
; Constants found in WINNT.H :======================================================
FILE
-
SHARE
-
READ 1 ALIASES
FILE SHARE WRI'1E 2
- -
; = = = = ~ = = = = = = = = ~ = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
FILE SHARE DELETE 4 The following Win32 API functions have an
extra "A" at the end of their name, so they are
FILE ATTRIBUTE READONLY 1 redefined here with text macros:
FILE-ATTRIBUTE-HIDDEN 2
FILE ATTRIBUTE SYSTEM 4 CreateFile EQU <CreateFileA>
FILE ATTRIBUTE DIRECTORY lOh GetComrnandLine EQU <GetCommandLineA>
FILE ATTRIBUTE ARCHIVE 20h PeekConsoleInput EQU <PeekConsoleInputA>
FILE-ATTRIBUTE-DEVICE 40h ReadConsole EQU <ReadConsoleA>
FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL BOh ReadConsoleInput EQU <ReadConsoleInputA>
FILE ATTRIBUTE TEMPORARY 100h SetConsoleTitle EQU <SetConsoleTit1eA>
FILE-ATTRIBUTE-SPARSE FILE 200h
WriteConsole EQU <WriteConsoleA>
FILE-ATTRIBUTE-REPARSE POINT 400h WriteConsoleOutputCharacter EQU <WriteConsoleOutputCharacterA>
FILE--ATTRIBUTE- COr1PRESSED BOOh
FILE
-
ATTRIBUTE
-
OFFLINE lOOOh _; Message Box Buttons
FILE ATTRIBUTE NOT CONTENT INDEXED = 2000h
- --
MB OK = 0
1 CONFIDENTIAL I
SESSION 2008/2009
COURSE CODE
SUBJECT
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SEL 4373
IC TESTING TECHNIQUES
DR. 001 CHIA YEE
SEW
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
4 MAY 2009
ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
-2
SEL4373
Q1. (25 MARKS)
a. Find minimal fault list for the circuit in Figure 1 using fault equivalence theorem.
(6 marks)
b. The first test pattern (ABC) 010 is generated by PODEM for fault h stuck-at 0 when the
minimal fault list is sent to the ATPG algorithm. Based on fault dominance theorem,
which faults can be dropped from the fault list? (3 marks)
c. Using deductive fault simulation and the test pattern in (b), more faults can be dropped
from the fault list. What are the remaining faults in the fault list? (10 marks)
d. Given average number of defect per die is 1.5 and P=O.013, what are the fault coverage
needed in order to reduce the defect level to 5ppm in a manufacturing process where
10,000 dies of circuit in Figure 1 is produced. (6 marks)
Important formulas for the estimation:
i) Probability of a chip passing the test, Y(T)=[l + T A j 7 p r ~
ii) Defect level, DL(T)=l- Y(l)
YeT)
Where T =fault coverage
A = chip area
f = fault density
p=clustering parameter
A d
B
c
h
e
9
m
q
n
k
p
j
Figure 1. Circuit under test.
-3
SEL4373
Q2. (25 MARKS)
a. Find the SCOAP testability measures (CCO, CCI )CO for the labeled lines in Figure 2.
(6 marks)
b. Detennine the test patterns (ABCDE) for faults g s-a-l, Z s-a-l and Y s-a-l in Figure 2
using PODEM algorithm. Write the detailed steps. Assume single fault at a time.
(9 marks)
c. Use static compaction technique to compact the test patterns (ABCDE) obtained from (b).
(3 marks)
d. Use dynamic compaction technique to compact the test patterns for faults g s-a-l, Z s-a-l
and Y s-a-l. Compare the compaction result with (c). Assume single fault at a time.
(7 marks)
A_-r-............
B
C
D
E
f
Figure 2.
-4
SEL4373
Q3. (25 MARKS)
a) Calculate the drivability for the lines involved given a stuck-at zero a t ~ . (7 marks)
b) Find the test sequence for the circuit in Figure 3 using time-expansion model and any test
generation algorithm. Choose the propagation path with the best drivability. (6 marks)
c) Augment the circuit in Figure 3 using full scan technique. Connect all the pins correctly.
(3 marks)
d) Calculate the test application time and area overhead. Assume that one D-flip-flop consists
often gates. Compare the test application time with that in (b). (6 marks)
e) State two advantages of random access scan (RAS) over full scan technique. (3 marks)
z
\
s-a-O
Figure 3.
-5
SEL4373
Q4. (25 MARKS)
a) Define aliasing correctly. (2 marks)
b) Use the flip-flop in Figure 4 and XOR gates to design an external XOR LFSR that generates
the following test sequence (X2XjXO): 001,100,010,101,110,111,011. Connect Set and Reset
pins correctly and label X
2
, Xi> X
o
correctly. (7 marks)
c) Figure 5 shows a circuit-under-test (CUT). Show how you connect the LFSR in (b) to the
CUT. (3 marks)
d) Design a modular MISR with characteristic polynomial x
2
+x+1 and connect it correctly to the
CUT in (c). The output of the MISR can be initialized to 00 before testing. (4 marks)
e) Show that faults s-a-O and s-a-1 in Figure 5 can be detected by the BIST system built in (d).
Assume single fault at a time. (9 marks)
Set
D Q
Reset
Figure 4.
A
\---r----- Y2
5-a-1
~
B
Y1
c
Figure 5.
-6
SEL4373
Testability Measures
CCO (a)
cC1(a)D
. z cco (z) =min (CCO (a), CCO (b)) + 1
: CC1 (z) =CC1 (a) + CC1 (b) + 1
CCO (b)
CC1 (b)
a (z) =cco (a) + CCO (b) + 1
b (z) =min (CC1 (a), CC1 (b)) + 1
a --\ (z) =min (CCO (a)+ CCO (b), CC1 (a) + CC1 (b)) + 1
b ---I CC1 (z) =min (CC1 (a)+ CCO (b), CCO (a) + CC1 (b)) + 1
a ----I
z CCO (z) = CC1 (a) + CC1 (b) + 1
CC1 (z) =min (CCO (a), CCO (b)) + 1 b ---I
a (z) =min (CC1 (a), CC1 (b)) + 1
b L/-CC1 (z) =CCO (a) + CCO (b) + 1
a (z) =min (CC1 (a)+ CCO (b), CCO (a) + CC1 (b)) + 1
b CC1 (z) = min (CCO (a)+ ceo (b), CC1 (a) + CC1 (b)) + 1
z CCO (z) = CC1 (a) + 1
a--[>o
CC1 (z) =CCo (a) + 1
-7
SEL4373
CO (a) = CO (Z) + ee1 (b) + 1
CO (b) = CO (z) + ee1 (a) + 1
CO (a) = CO (z) + ceo (b) + 1
CO (b) = CO (z) + ceo (a) + 1
CO (a) = CO (z) + min (CeO (b), eC1 (b)) + 1
CO (b) = CO (z) + min (CeO (a), eC1 (a)) + 1
CO (a) = CO (z) + ee1 (b) + 1
CO (b) = CO (z) + ee1 (a) + 1
CO (a) = CO (z) + ceo (b) + 1
CO (b) = CO (z) + ceo (a) + 1
CO (a) = CO (z) + min (CeO (b), eC1 (b)) + 1
CO (b) = CO (z) + min (CeO (a), eC1 (a)) + 1
CO (a) = CO (z) + 1
CO (a) = min (CO (z1), CO (z2), ..., CO (zn))
CO (a)
ee1 (a)
aCCo(a)D COf)
b CO (b)
ee1 (b)

:--D Z
:--[>--:

a-[)al---Z
a

t
IL...-' __zn
Gate type Inputs Output
C
Output fault
list L
c
a b
,
AND 0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
[Lan Lb]u CI
[Lan Lb]u CI
[Lan Lb]u CI
[Lau Lb]u Co
OR 0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
[Lau Lb]u CI
[Lan Lb]u Co
rT "T _1, J"_
I I SULIT
KODKURSUS
KURSUS
PENSYARAH
PROGRAM
SEKSYEN
MASA
TARIKH
PEPERIKSAAN AKHIR SEMESTER II
SESI 2008/2009
SEL 4533
MIKROPENGAWAL
MR. MOHAMAD SHUKRI BIN
ZAINAL ABIDIN
SEL / SEM / SEW
01
2 JAM 30 MINIT
3 MEl 2009
ARAHAN KEPADA CALON
JAWAB EMPAT (4) SOALAN SAHAJA.
KERTAS SOALAN INI TERDIRI DARIPADA 20 MUKA SURAT SAHAJA
2
-SEL4533
81.
a) Carta alir berikut memberikan algoritma bagi satu subrutin untuk mengira bilangan
data yang nilainya lebih besar dari kandungan penumpuk A. Data-data tersebut
disimpan di ingatan di antara alamat $4000 hingga $40FF. Berdasarkan cmta alir ini,
tuliskan subrutin tcrsebut. Anggap data-data tersebut nombor tak bertanda dan
nombor-nombor tersebut telah berada di antara alamat $4000 hingga $40FF. Simbol
simbol dalam carta aUr ini adalah simbol piawai di dalam helaian data suruhan
M68HCll seperti di dalam lampiran. Simbol '=' menandakan operasi umpulwn.
110 MARKAH]
b) Jelaskan bagaimana suruhan BSR dan JSR boleh mengingat alamat dan kembali semula
kepada atur cara pemanggil subrutin selepas sesuatu subrutin dilaksanakan. Gunakan
keratan atur cara yang sesuai, jika perlu, untuk menjelaskan jawapan anda.
ISMARKAH]
c) Tuliskan satu subrutin bernama UJITANDA. Parameter dihantar ke subrutin ini di
dalam penumpuk 0 yang mewakili satu nombor bertanda 16-bit di dalam format
pelengkap dua. Tugas subrutin ini adalah untuk menguji kandungan pcnumpuk D. Jika
kandungan penumpuk 0 adalah positif, tukarkan kandungan 0 kepada nombor negatif
16-bit dan pulang dari subrutin. Jika kandungan penumpuk 0 adalah negatif, pulang
dari subrutin tanpa mengubah kandungan D. [10 MARKAH]
3
-SEL4533
82.
Satu alat pengesan kebisingan menggunakan satu mikropengawal M68HC11 yang
bertindak sebagai pengawal terbenam di dalam alat ini. Tugas M68HC 11 adalah
memantau kebisingan menggunakan penderia bising dan membandingkan tahap
kebisingan dengan rujukan yang dibenarkan serta memaparkan tarafkebisingan pada satu
paparan LED 7 ruas jenis anod sepunya. Voltan analog keluaran dari penderia bising dan
penguat berkadar terus dengan tahap kebisingan yang diukur. Rajah blok sambungan bagi
penderia dan LED 7 ruas bagi alat ini ditunjukkan di dalam Rajah S2.
+5V
+5V
220
PENDERIA BISING
RAJAHS2
Tugas perisian alat ini diringkaskan di dalam Jadual S2 berikut:
M68HC11
RUJUKAN
PENGUAT
~ PE3/AN3
V3
Anod
-
,,
-
9
'-'.
d
va
~ P E O / A N O
Keadaan Masukan Analog
VO& V3
I
VO> V3
VO< V3
VO = V3
Tindakan Perisian Pemantau
J
,
-
L
Paparkan
,
,
Paparkan
,
=r
Pavarkan
JADUAL S2
4
-SEL4533
a) Kirakan valtan skala penuh VFS bagi penukar analog ke digital dalam alat ini.
[4 MARKAH]
Aturcara dalam alat ini telah dimulakan denganjujukan suruhan berikut:
LDX #$1000
BSET OPTION,X %11000000
JSR TIDURIOO
LDAA #%00110000
STAA ADCTL,X
Jelaskan apakah kesan jujukan suruhan ini ke atas penukar analog-ke-digital dalaman
M68HCll ? [6 MARKAHl
c) Tuliskan satu subrutin berlabel TUKARAD yang melakukan tugas berikut: Tukarkan
nilai analog pada saluran 0-3 kepada nilai digital, pulangkan nilai digital pada
saluran ANO di dalam penumpuk A dan pulangkan nilai digital pada saluran AN3
di dalam penumpuk B. Anggap penukar analog-ke-digital telah diasalkan seperti di
dalam bahagian b) di atas, indeks X telah diberikan nilai $1000 dan jangan ubah
kandungan indeks X di dalam subrutin anda. Gunalwn lahel hagi semua dafiar input
output seperti yang diberikan dalam lampiran. Anggap label-label in; telah
ditakrifkan.
[7 MARKAH]
d) Dengan memanggil subrutin TUKARAD yang anda tulis di dalam bahagian c) di atas,
tuliskan aturcara pemantau bagi alat ini yang melakukan tugas seperti yang diberikan
dalam Jadual S2. Tunjukkan dengan jelas bagaimana anda melakukan pengkodan
secara perisian bagi paparan alat ini. [8 MARKAH]
5
-5EL4533
83.
5atu robot bergerak dibina berasaskan mikropengawal Motorola M68HCll seperti yang
ditunjukkan dalam Rajah 53 di bawah. Robot ini mempunyai satu roda yang dikawal oleh
satu motor arus terus (de motor). Litar pacuan bagi motor arus terus ini mengunakan
pemacu motor L293B disambungkan kepada PBO dan PB 1. Keluaran PBO dan PB I ini
akan menentukan arah pergerakan robot ini. Robot ini akan bergerak ke dinding 1
sekiranya PBO = 1 dan PB 1 = 0, manakala robot akan bergerak ke dinding 2 sekiranya
PBO = 0 dan PB 1 = 1. Robot akan berhenti bergerak apabi la PBO=O dan PB 1=0. Dua suis
mekanikal disambungkan kepada liang C (PCO - PC I) digunakan sebagai penderia sentuh
di hadapan (PCO) dan belakang (PC 1) robot untuk mengesan sebarang pelanggaran
dinding 1 atau dinding 2. Anggap sistem mikropengawal M68HC 11 mengendalikan
dalam ragam ikat-but dengan hablur/kristal 8Mhz. 5ila lihat lampiran untuk datasheet
bagi pemacu motor L293B.
PBO PBI Arab ~ e r a k a n robot
0 0 Berhenti
0 1 Bergerak ke dinding 2
1 0 Bergerak ke dinding I
1 1 Berhenti
JADUAL 53
Robot akan bergerak ke arah dinding 1
apabila de motor berpusing arah lawan
jam dan akan bergerak kearah dinding 2
apabila de motor berpusing arah jam.
Rajah ini menunjukkan robot sedang
bcrgcrak kcarah dinding 1 dengan
pusingan de motor arah lawan jam.
PENDERIA
SENTUH
DC MOTOR
DAN RODA
RAJAH 53
6
-SEL4533
a. Jelaskan perbezaan antara motor arus terus dengan motor pelangkah.
12
MARKAH]
b. Jelaskan sebab motor arus terus tidak boleh disambung terus ke MC68HC11?
/1 MARKAH]
c. Lukis litar yang lengkap untuk robot ini dengan mengunakan mikropengawal
MC68HC 11 dalam ragam ikat-but dengan menggunakan hablur/kristal 8Mhz.
Perantaramukaan pemacu motor arus terllS dengan mikropengawal adalah
menggunakan pemacu motor L2938 (rujuk lampiran). Dua suis mekanikal normal(y
open digunakan sebagai penderia sentuh. Labelkan dengan jelas litar anda.
114 MARKAH]
d. Tuliskan satu aturcara llntuk membolehkan robot ini bergerak ke dinding I sehingga
penderia sentllh PCO menyentllh dinding. Jika ada sentuhan, robot akan undur dengan
serta-merta. Robot ini akan terus mengundur sehingga penderia sentllh PC I
menyentuh dinding 2. Jika ada sentuhan dengan dinding 2, robot akan bergerak
semula ke dinding 1 dan proses ini akan berlliang sehingga jumlah kitar pergerakan
adalah 10 kali. Labelkan dengan .ielas aturcara anda.
18MARKAH]
7
-SEL4533
84.
a) Tiga paparan LED 7-ruas jenis katod sepunya (common cathode) hendak
disambungkan kepada satu mikropengawal M68HCII seperti yang ditunjukkan di
dalam Rajah S4. Anod bagi paparan 7-ruas akan disambungkan kepada liang B (Port
B) manakala katodnya akan disambungkan kepada liang C (Port C) pada bit 0, 1, dan
2 (PCO, PCI dan PC2). Bit PCO akan memilih digit paling bemilai manakala bit PC2
memilih digit terkecil nilai. Anggap digit paling kiri sebagai digit paling bemilai.
Tiga transistor NPN digunakan sebagai suis pemilih bagi katod paparan 7-ruas
tersebut. Lukiskan Iitar lengkap yang menunjukkan bagaimana sambungan ini
dibuat kepada liang B dan liang C pada M68HC11.
110MARKAH]
M68HC11
8 a a
PBO-PB7 f--,/t--....
3
I I
-
I_I.
Katod
PCO-PC2 f----fl:....-....
I
-
I I
IJ.
a
-
I I
IJ.
Katod
e
e
RAJAH 84
b) Bagi sambungan yang anda buat dalam soalan bahagian a), tuliskan satu atur cara
untuk memaparkan nombor '3.14' pada paparan tersebut menggunakan teknik
paparan bermultipleks. Gunakan pengkodan secara perisian bagi memaparkan
nombor tersebut. Anggap subrutin lengah selama 20ms (LENGH20) telah ada.
110 MARKAH]
c) Jelaskan apakah yang dimaksudkan dengan 'melantun' dalam suis mekanikal ?
Mengapakah masalah 'melantun' mesti dihapuskan ? Tunjukkan bagaimana masalah
'melantun' ini dapat dihapuskan dengan cara peri sian dan berikan keratan aturcara
yang sesuai. 15 MARKAH]
8
-SEL4533
85.
Satu sistem perhubungan berasaskan mikropengawal MC68HC II telah digunakan untuk
melakukan komunikasi sesiri di antara komputer dan satu modul input/output (I/O yang
menerima dan menghantar data dari dan kepada computer tersebut. Modul I/O ini
digerakkan oleh mikropengawal M68HCII seperti di dalam Rajah S5 di bawah. Sistem
ini menghantar data secara sesiri dan dalam format 1-8-1 dengan kelajuan 9600 bps
menggunakan kristal 8Mhz. Dalam proses penghantaran dan penerimaan data secara
berterusan, komputer akan menghantar 5 bait data yang mana:
I. Bait pertama adalah aksara '@', diikuti I bait arahan, I bait data input, I bait
data output dan terakhir adalah I bait hasiljumlah bait arahan, bait data input
dan bait data output.
II. Apabila bait '@' dibaca oleh modul I/O, bait arahan akan disimpan di alamat
$01, bait data input dan data output di alamat $02 ke $03 dan I bait data hasil
jumlah ini akan disimpan di alamat $04.
111. Bait arahan, bait data input dan bait data output akan dijumlahkan tanpa
mengambilkira limpahan yang berlaku. Hasil penambahan 3 bait nombor tadi
dibandingkan dengan bait hasiljumlah (bait kelima dari proses penerimaan).
iv. Jika kedua-dua nombor tadi adalah sama, modulllO akan menghantar kod 'Q'
sebagai bait arahan bersama-sama dengan data-data asal yang diterimanya
kepada komputer. Jika tidak sama, kod 'E' akan dihantar.
Komputer
(Pengawal
Utama)
Modul
1/0
(68HC II
RAJAH S5: Rangkaian komunikasi pengawal I/O dan komputer
ata- ata yang JADUAL 85 D d
Contoh @ II
Bait
data
Fungsi Bait Arahan
mula
d'l 11antar dan fIungsl setlap
b
alt
. d
ata
22 55 77
Data Data Jumlah
Input Output
9
-SEL4533
Jawab soalan-soalan berikut:
a. Apakah yang dimaksudkan dengan 'kadar baud' dalam perhubungan siri MC68HC \ \
dan nyatakan tiga (3) perkara yang mesti dilakukan oleh pengatucara sebelum
pengantaramuka siri dalaman boleh digunakan serta tuliskan arahan-arahan yang
berkaitan untuk tujuan tersebut. [5 MARKAH]
b. Daripada soalan (a), diberi satu subrutin yang bernama BACA IAKS yang akan
membaca satu bait data dari pengantaramuka perhubungan siri MC68HC 11 serta
memulangkan data yang dibaca dalam penumpuk A. Tuliskan satu subrutin Jain
bernama SIMPAN untuk melaksanakan operasi bahagian (ii) diatas
BACAIAKS BRCLR SCSR,X $20 BACAIAKS
LDAA SCDR,X
RTS [5 MARKAHI
c. Tulis satu subrutin bernama CHECK yang menyemak nilai jumlah seperti dalam
operasi (iii) diatas. Subrutin ini memulangkan nilai 0 dalam penumpuk A jika ada
ralat atau nilai Ijika sah. [5 MARKAHI
d. Daripada soalan (c) diatas, tuliskan arahan-arahan yang akan menyemak hasil subrutin
SEMAK dan melaksanakan operasi yang dinyatakan dalam bahagian (iv) diatas.
Diberi subrutin TULIS 1AKS untuk menghantar data kepada pengantaramuka
perhubungan siri. Perlu diingat, data yang dihantar perlu mengikut format yang
diberikan. Tetapi untuk tujuan in, ID Destinasi adalah komputer dan ID Sumber
adalah bebas.
TULIAKS BRCLR SCSR,X $80 TULIAKS
STAA SCDR,X
RTS \lOMARKAHI
10-6
Table 1 MC68HC11 A8 Instructions, Addressing Modes, and Execution Ti'mes
(Sheet 1 of 6)
Example: Tabie 10-1 Cycle-by.Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.
Source
I
Operat'icn IBoolean Expression I
Address,ng Mach'lne Coding
1m
Cycle I
Condition Codes
Form(s)
Mode tor (Hexadecimal) by
I
Operand
Opaoee1Operand(s)
c::> (.)
Cycle" S X H r N Z V C
I
IAcd Accumulators AS->A INH 181 1 2
I
21
ABA
ABX !Acd S to X IX-OO;S IX INH
I
3AI
,
3 2-2 1 - - - . - -
AB\' IAdd 8 to Y IY -00:8 IY INH 183A 2 4 2-4 .. ..........
ADCA IAdd with Carry to A
AMC-A IAIMM 89 Ii 2 2 3-1 --1j!il
(opr)
A DIR 99 dd 2 3
4-1
A EXT Sg hh II 3 .. S-2
! AIND,X A9 rt 2 4 6-2
i
A INDS 18 A9 ff 3 5 7-2
ADC8 (opr) IAdd wilh Carry to B B-M ... C-S 81MM C9 ii 2 2 3-1
I- ., -: ! , ,
I '
8 DIR D9 dd 2 3 4-1
I
a EXT F9 hh II 3 4 5-2
I
e IND,X E9 rt 2 4 6-2
I
!
B IND,Y 18 E9 rt 3 5 7-2
ADDA (opr) rdd Memory to A
IA+ M -> A
AIMM
I
88 Ii 2 2 3-1
A DIR 98 dd 2 3 .1-1
AEXT Ba hh II 3 4 5-2
...
A IND,X ABrt 2. 4 6-2
I
-.
I
A IND,Y 18 AS H 3 5 7-2
ADDS (opr) Add Memory to a i8 + M -t a
a IMM
I
caii 2 2. 3-' -!!lJl
I
a DIA DB dd 2 3 4-1
I
8 EXT Fa hh II 3 4 5-2
8IND,X Ea ff 2 4 62
B IND,Y 18 Ea II 3 5 7-2
ADDD (opr) Add 16-Bil to D 10 ... M:M ... , --l D IMM C3U kk 3
4 3-3 .. .. Z!li
I
DIR D3 dd 2 5 4-7
EXT F3 hh II 3 6 5-10
IND,X E3 H 2 ,,6 6-10
IND,Y 16 E3 rt 3 7 7-8
AM-.A
[AIMM
84"
2 2 3-'
--e.!!O ..
ADIR 94 dd 2 3
4-,
A EXT 84 hh II 3 4 5-2
AIND,X A4H 2 4 6-2
A IND.Y 18 A4/f 3 5 7-2
AND B with Memory aM -t B a IMM
I
Col. ii 2 2 3' -110. I
80lR D4 dd 2 3
4-'
I
B EXT F4 hh II 3 4 5-2
I
B IND,X E4 H 2 4 6-2
I
B IND.Y 18 E4 H 3 5 7-2
Arithmetic Shilt Left
-
EXT
781hh
II 3 5 5-8 ----11 n
11II1I I) 0
IND,X 66 It 2 6 6-3
C b7 bO
IND,Y
1a6Sr
3 7 73
AINH 46 1 2 2,'
aINH 58 1 2 21
Arithmetic Shift Left Double
I -
INH 05
,
3 22 -1111
. D--lIJ-..[o-o
C b15 bO
Arithmetic Shift Righi
[(I I lili I1-0
EXT 77 hh II 3 6 58 . -" J n 1
IND,X 67f( 2 6 6-3
07 bO C
IND.Y 1867 It 3 7 73
I AINH 47 1 Z 2-1
SINH S7 1 2
IBranch if Carry Clear ?C",Q IREL 24 rr 2 3 8-1 ...... -........
Clear Sit(s)
M(mm) .... M
DIR 15 dd mm 31 6 4.10 ---110
IND,X 1D It mm

7 6-13
IND,Y 18 1D H mm 8 7-10
IBranch 11 Carry Set REL 25 rr 2 3 8'
................
1Branch II = Zero ?Z=1 REL 27 rr 2 3 81
...............
BranCh H Zero ?NEIlV=O REL 2C rr 2 3 8-1
.................
Branch if > Zero ? Z +(N Ell V) ,. 0 REL 2E rr 2 3 8-'
................
, 3,anCIT iI Higher ?C+Z=O REL 22 rr 21 3 8-'
................
Branch II Higher or Same 7 C =0 IREl 24 rr 2/ 3 8-1
...............
.
ANDA (opr) lAND A with Memory
AN08 (opr)
ASL (opr)
ASLA
ASL8
ASLO
ASR (opr)
ASRA
ASRB
BCC (rei)
BClR (opr)
(msk)
BCS (rei)
BEQ(rsl)
BGE(rel}
BGiUel)
BHI (rei)
BHS (rei)
Cycle-by-cycle numoer prOVides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation,
MOTOROLA CPU, ADDRESSING MODES, AND INSTRUCTION SET MC6BHC11A8
TECHNICAL DATA
1/

Table 10-1 MC68HC11 AS Instructions
1
Addressing Modes, and Execution Times
(Sheet 2 of 6)
11
2
II
II
kk
II
I Source I
Operation 800lean Expression Addressing Machine COding
"'I i Cycle
Condi:ion Code.
Form(s) Mode for (Hexadecimal) .!! U by
I I
Operand
Opcode I Operand(s)
Cycle"
SXHINZVC
181TA (apr) 16it(S) Test A with Memory
A-M AIMM 651ii 2 2 3-'
_ " O
A OIR 95;dd 2 3 <1.'
A EXT 851hh II 3 <1
52
I
A INO.X A51H 2 <1 62
A IND,Y 18 A51rt 3 5 72
6iT6 (apr) 9it(s) ,esl B with Memory 8-M BIMM C5 Ii 12 2 31
; , 0 .
8 DIR OS dd 2 3 <1-1
I
8 EXT F5 hh II 3 <1 52
BINO.X 135 H 2 <1 5-2
B INO,Y 16 E5ff 3 5 72
BlE (rei) Braner! if Zero ? Z + (N 6 V) = 1 IREL I
2Flrr 121 3
I
81 1- - ...
BlO (rei) 8ranch if Lower 'I C=l REl 251rr 2 3 \ 81 ... - .. --- -
ElS (rei) Branch if Lower or Same 1'1 C + Z = 1 IREL. 23 rr 2 3 81 j - - -
BLT (rell !Branch If < Zero I? N S V = 1 REl 2D rr 2 3 I 8-1 _._--.-.:.-
8MI (rei) ,Branch if Minus !? N = I HEL 2e rr 2 3 8-1
..............
ENE (rei) Branch if Not = Zero ?Z=O REl 26\rr 21 3 8-1
..
BPl(rel) it Plus . I? N =0 REL 2Arr 2\ 3 8'
........... ..
BRA (rell IBranch Always I? 1 = 1 REL 20 rr 2\ 3 8-1 .... -.............
BRCLR(opr) Branch if Bit(s) Clear ? M" mm = 0 OIR mm rr

6 411
..................
(msk) lNO,X lF
1
H mm rr 7
I
6-14
(rei) lNO,Y 181 F If mm rr 8 7-11
BRN (rei) Branch Never 111 =0 REL 21 rr 12 3 8-1 ... --.......
BRS"-I (apr) IBranCh if Bit{s) Set ? (M) -mm = 0 OIR 12 dd mm rr 4 6 4-11 I -
(msk) INO,X 1E If mm IT 4 7 6-147
(rei) IND,Y 181: H mm rr 5 8 11
6S810pr) Set 8il(s) M .. mm....,M OIR
I
141dd mm
3 6 4-10 - ... ! 10
(msk) INO,X lCff mm 3 7 6-13
I
lNO,Y 181CIf mm 4 8 710
8SR (rei) 6ranch to Subroutine See Special Ops REL
i
80 rr 2 6 8-2
-.............
6VC{rel) Branch if Overflow Clear ?v=O IREL 28 rr 21 3 81
...............
BVS (rei) IBranch if Overr!ow Sel ?V=l REL 29 rr 2 3 8-'
-...... -......
CBA ICompare A 10 B A-B INH I 11 1 1 2 21 - .. - I ! ! I
ClC Clear Carry Bit 10 .... C INH OC, 1 I 2 21 - - - 0
CLI Clear Interrupt Mask 0 ..... 1 INH OE 1 2 2-1
_. 0

EXT 7F hh II
I;
6 58 - - -01 00
lNO,X 6Fff R R
18 6F If 3 7 7-3
ClRA Clear Accumulator A 0...., A AINH 4FI 1 2 2-1 ---0100
ClRB Clear Accumulator B O....,B B INH 5FI
,
2 21 ---0100
CLV Clear Over.low Fiag O.... V INH OAI 11 2 2-1 - - - - - O
CMPA (apr) Compare A to Memory A-M AIMM 81 ii 2 2 3-1 . - - I ; I I
AOIR 91 dd 2 3 4-1
A EXT Bl hh 3 4 5-2
AINO,X Al H 4 6-2
, AINO,Y 18 Al It 3 5 72
CMP8 (cpr) Compare 8 10 Memory 8- M 81MM Cl Ii 2 2 31 ---Ilt!
80lR Dl dd 2 3 4-1
i 8 EXT F1 hh 3 4 5-2
I
I
8INO.X 131 If 2 4
B INO,Y 18 E1 r: 3 5
ICOM (apr)
11's Complement Memory Byte SFF - M -l- M EXT 73 hh 3 6
I
5-8 -:101
INO,X 63 ff 2 6 63
i INO,Y 1863 If 3 7 73
COMA [l'S Complement A SFF -A .... A IAINH 43 1 2 2-1 . - . I 10 1
COM6 11's Complement S SF;: - B ..... B IS INH 53 1 2 2\ ----I!Ol
I"DIO'"
Compare D to Memory 16Bil 0- M:M ... 1 IMM
lA 831il
.4 5 3-5 - ..... ! ! ! !
DIR 1A 93 dd 3 6 49
EXT
1A B31hh
4 7 5il
INO.X lA AS H 3 7 611
I
'I INO,Y CDA3H 3 7 7-8 I
-
"Cycle-by-cycle number provides a reference to I abies 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation.
Example: Table 10-1 Cycle-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.
MC68HC11A8 CPU, ADDRESSfNG MODES, AND INSTRUCTION SET MOTOROlJ\
TECHNICAL DATA 10-7
10-8
."
-
Table 10-1 MC68HC11 A8 Instructions, Addressing Modes, and Execution Times
(Sheet 3 of 6)
I Source I
Operation \ Boolean Expression! Addressing
I
Machine Coding
<II
., Cycle Condition Codes
.,
c:;
I Form(s) i
I Mode for
(Hexadecimal)

"'"
by
Operand
Ope ode Operand(s)
c:> U
Cycle"
SXHINZVC
ICPX (opr)
!Compare X to Memory 16-Bil IX M:M+1 IMM 8C ii 3 4 33 . - . ! ! !
OIR 9C dd 2 5 4.. 7
I
EXT BC hh II 3 6 5-10
I
IND,X ACII

6 6-10
,
I
INO,Y CDAC If 7 78
'Cpy (opr) Compare Y to ,Iemory IY-M:M ;.1 IMM 18 BC jj kk 4 5 35 ........ : ! !
168il DIR 189C dd 3 6 4-9
i
EXT 18 BC hh II 4 7 5.. 1
i
IND,X lAAC II 3 7 611
IND,Y 18 AC It 3 7 78
.IDAA IDec,mal Adjust A IAdiust Sum to BC D INH 191 1 2 21 ........ : ! !
IOEC (opr) !Decrement Memory Byte M-l- M
!EXT
\
7Arh
II

6 58
I- -.-, ! !
INO,X 6A If 6 63
I
I
IND,Y 18 6A:I 7 73
DECA Oecremenl Accumulator A A-l .... A AINH 4A
1
1 2 2'
.......
: ! 1
DECS Decrement Accumulator B 8-1....., B j81NH SAl
,
2
2'
........ ! ! ..
DES !Decrement Stack Poimer SP -1 ->SP IINH 341 111 3 23
................
DEX Decremen.t Index Register X lX-l .... IX IiNH 09 1 3 2-2
.. -_ ... ! ..
DEY Decrement Index Register Y lY -1 .... IY ]INH 18091 121 4 2-4 - ........ ! .. -
IEORA (opr)
EXClusive OR A with Memory AEI M ..... A A1MM 88 ii 2 2 31 - - ! 10
ADtR 98 dd 2 3 4-1
A EXT 88 hh II 3 4 5-Z
IEORB (opr)
A IND,X' A8 H 2 4 6-2
AIND,Y 18 AS If 3 5 72
EXClusive OR B with Memory Be M .... B 81MM C8 ii 2 2 31 . -' ! : 0
B OIR OS ad 2. 3 41
EJ EXT FS hh II 3 4 5-2
BIND,X E8 tl 2. 4 6-2
BINO,Y 18108 If 3 5 7-Z
FDiV Fractional Oivide 16 by 16 D/IX -;. IX; r D INH
I
03 1 I 41 I 217 - .. - : ! t
IDIV Integer Divide 16 by 16 ;)/lX .... IX; r .... D INH 02. 1 41 2-17 I -.. -! 0 i
IINC (opr)
Increment Memory Byte M+ 1 .... M
IEXT
7C hh II 3 6
I
5-8
lND,X 6C H 2 6 63
IND,Y 18 6C If 3 7 73
liNeA Increment Accumulator A IA + 1 .... A AINH toC
11 2
I
21 -.... .;. -
INCB Increment Accumulator B Is + 1....., B BINH sci 1 2
I
2-1 ... -!!! I
INS Increment Stack POinter SP + 1 .... SP INH
I 31 1 3 23 ...... -.. -..
IINX Increment'lndex Regis!er X
fIX.l-IX
lNH 08 1 3 2-2
.......... ;. ..
INY IIncrement Index Register Y IY + 1 -4IY IINH 1808 21 4 2-4 1 --- ., _.
JMP (op,)
i
Jump See Special Ops S<T 7:: hh II 3 3 51
...... -.... ..
IND.X 6E H 2 3 61
,
IND,Y 18 6E. If 3 4 7-1
JSR (opr) IJump to Subroutini!
Isee Special
OIR 9D dd

5 48
I' .. --..
I
EXT BD hh II 6 5-12
INO.X AD H 6 612
IND,Y 18 AD H 7 7-9
LOAA (0": IL'" ,
M .... A AIMM 86 ii 2. 2 31 - . _. ! ! 0
ADIR 96 dd 2 3 4-1
A EXT 86 hh II 3 4 5-2
I
AIND,X AS H
.'
2. 4 6-2
I
I A IND,Y 18 A6 ff 3 5 72
LDAB (opr) Load Accu mulalor 8 M -+ B 81MM Caii
2. 2 3-1 : : O
I
8 DIR 06 dd 2 3 4-1
8 EXT Fe hn \I 3 4 52
8INO,X E61f 2 4 62
i 81ND,Y 18 E6 If 3 5 72
ilDD (cpr) 'load Double Accumulalor D M B IMM CCji kk 3 3 3-2 - . - - ! ! O

DC dd 2 4 4-3
FC nh II 3 S 54
iINO,X
EC If 2 5 6S
IND,Y 18 EC II 3 6 7-S
Cycleby-cycle number proVides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-bycycle operation.
Example: Table 10-1 Cycle-by-Cycle column reference 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.
MOTOROLA CPU, ADDRESSING MODES, AND INSTRUCTION. SET
MC68HC11Jl,8
TECHNICAL DATA
I
II

Set. ....
Table 10-1 MC68HC11 A8 Instructions, Addressing Modes, and Execution Times
(Sheet 4 of 6)
Source
I
Form(s)
I
LOS
:LJX (apr)
I
ILDY (apr)
LSL (opri
LSLA
LSLB
I
LSLD
LSR (opr)
LSRS

ILSRD rogicai Shift Right Double
I
I
I
MUL
INEG (apr)
NEGA
NEGB
NOP
ORAA (apr)
I
I
!ORA8 (apr)
I
I
I
"SHA
3HB
IpSHX
PSHY
PULA
IPULB
!PULX
iFULY
iROL (apr)
!
IROLA
!
Opera lion Boolean Expression Addressing Machine Coding
] I eycle
Condition Cades
Mode for (Hexadecimal)
s: U by
I Operand
Opcode I Ooerand(s)
W10 I Cycle' SXHINZVC
I
ILoao Slack Painter
M:M T 1 --> SP
6E\ij
3 3 3-2
. _. .; ! 0
DIR 9E dd

4 43
EXT
BElhh
II 5 5-4
I IND,X .00E II 5 6-6
I
IND,Y 16 AE If 5 76
I
ILoac Index Regisler X M:M + 1 -->IX IMM
CElii
kk 31 3 32 -,-::0
DIR DE dd 2 4 4-3
i
EXT FE hh II ' 3 5 5-"
IND,X EE II 2 5 66
I
IND,Y CD EElli 3 6 7-6
!LOad Index Regisler Y
M:M + 1 -; IY IMM 18 CE1ij kk 4 4 3e
_.. .;! O
DIR 16 DEldd 8 5 <l5
IEXT
16 FE(h
II 4 6 56
IND,X lA EE If 3 6 6.. 7
I
IND,Y 18 EE II 3 6 7-0
Logical Shift
1EXT 78 hn II 3 6 5-8 ..
- INO.X 68 If 2 6 6-3
I
0-1 i I I I. I I [1-0
INDY 186811 3 7 i
3-7
I
C b7 b:l A INH 48 1
I
2-'
SINH 58 1 2-1
Logical Sh,ft Leh Double
I
-
INH 05
1
1 3
\
22 ........ ! ! : !
O-W ....rn-o
c b'S bO
Logical Shift Right EXT 74 hh II 3 6 S6 -- .. Z!il
- INO,X' 64 II 2 6 6-3
0 1II1 i II1I
oINO,Y 18641f 8 7 7-3 -.
b7 bO C A INH 44 .. 1 2 21
SINH 54 1 2 21
I - IINH
04 1 8 22
r-,0 ! ! !
o-rn.._[O-O
blS DO C
IMUlliply 6 by 6'
[AXS --> D IINH 3D 1 10 2-13 - - - . - - - !
! I
2'5 Complement Memory Byte O-M-->M EXT 70 hh n 3 6 5-8 . - .. ! ! ! I
INO.X 60 ff 2 6 6-3
IND,Y 1860 II 3 7 7-3
2'5 Complement A IAINH
I
40 1 2 2-1 ........ ! ! ! !
2'5 Complement 8 0- 8 .... 8 SINH
I 501 11 2 2-1 ........ ! ! I !
INo Operation No Operation lNH I 01 1
2 .
21
........ -......
OR Accumulator A (Inclusi'ls) A+M-->A
IAIMM
8A ii 2 2 3'
- ... : ! iJ
AOIR 9A dd 2 3 4-1
IAEXT
SA hh II 3 4 5-2
. AIND,X AAff 2 4 62
AIND,Y 18AAH 3 5 72
OP, Accumulator 8 (Inclusive) B+M ... 8 BIMM CAii 2 2 31 ... no-
S DIR OA dd 2 3 4-1
B EXT FA hh II 3 4 52
B IND,X EAff

4 62
SIND,Y 18 Ef'. It 5 7-2
Push A onto Slack A --> Stk, SP SP-1 AINH 36 1 3 2-6 ........ -.......
Push B on10 Slack B --> Stk, SP '" SP-1 SINH 87 1 3 26
........ -......
IPush X onto Stack (La First) IX --> Stk, SP " SP-Z INH 3C 1 4 2-7 ...... - ....
Push Y onto Slack (La First) IY Stk, SP "SP-2 lNH
I
1830 2 5 2-8 ....... -......
Pull A Irom Stack Sp " SP T 1. A...Slk AINH 321 1 4 29
I _.. _...
IPull 8 Irom Slack Isp" SP + 1, B-Stk B INH 33 11 4 2-9
........ _......
r-
IPull X Irom Stack (Hi Firs:) Isp" SP + 2, IX... Slk INH 38 1 5 I 210
.... _.. - - ....
IPull Y Irom Stack (Hi First) sp " SP + 2, IY<-Stk INH
I
1838 2 6 2-11
_...... ......
IRolate Left
I
EXT 79 hh II 3 6 5-a ........ ! : ! !
-
IND,X 69 If 2 6 63
: ID-i I II ! I I ' t-Q
IND,Y 186911 3 7 73
[ROls--l
C b7 bO C AINH 49
I
2 z-,
i
SINH 59 2
I
2-1
-Cycleby-cycle number prOVides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation.
Example: Table 10-1 Cyc!e-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.
MC68HC11A8
TEChNICA,L DATA
CPU, ADDRESSING MODES, AND INSTRUCTION SET MOTOROLA
i 0-9
Uf
Stq>33
Table 10-1 MC68HC11 AS Instructions, Addressing Modes, and Execution Times
(Sheet 5 of 6)
\ Source I
Operation Boolean E.xpression \ Addressing
Machine Coding

Cycle Condition Codes
\
Form(s)
for (Hexade cimaJ)
U
by
>
I I
Operand Dpcode Operand(s)
o (.)
Cycle"
SXHINZVC
!ROR (opr)
IRctate Righ I

EXT 76 hh )1
3} 6
5-8 .. - - ! Z!
-
INO.X 66 If 2 6 6-3
t
!FCRA
i j II! ! Iii
o IND.Y
19 66 f( 3
1
7 73
bi be c AINH
46 1 2 2-1
[ROP.S B INH 56 1 2 21 I
I
IR:\ IReturn trom Interrupt Special ODS INH 38 1 I 12 I 2'4 Zl.!!!!!!
IRrS
Return Irom Subroutine See Special Ops IINH 391 1 5 I
212
-. __ .....
JScA Subtract 8 from A A-G_A INH 10 1 2 21 ........ : ! ! !
ISeCp. (Opr)
Suotract With Carrl from A A-M-C....:.A AIMM 82 ii 2. 2 31 .. !!Z!
AOIR 92 dd 2 3 41
I
A EXT B2 hh II 3 4 52
A IND,X A21f 2 4 62
A IND,Y 18 A2 If 3 5 72
IS8CB (opr) Subtract wi tn Carrl Irom B 8-M-C_B 8\MM C2ii 2. 2 3"
........ ! ! t t
1 I
B OIR D2 dd 2 3 41
B EXT F2 hh II 3 4 52
8IND,X E2 fl 2 .. 6-2
B IND,Y 18 E2 fl 3 5 7-2
js"C
Set Carry l-+C INH
I
00 11 2.
2.:, 1
SEI Set Inlerruot Mask 11...,\ INH I
OF 1 i 2 21 I --1 . -
ISEV ISe' Overflow Flag h INH [ DB 1 2 2-1 _. --. ,.
I"'"' '00' I"m. "","m"",,"
A....,M A OIR 97 cd
1.1
3 4-2
\.... Z! O
A EXT 87 hh II
.. 5-3
AIND,X A7 H 4 65
A INO,Y 18 A7 ff 5 7-5
STAB (apr) Store Accumulalor 6 801M B OIR 07 od 2 :3 42 ... !! o
8 EXT F7 hh II 3 4 53
8IND.X E7/t 2 4 65
e IND,Y 18 E7 If 3 5 75
STD (opr) Siore Accumulator 0
IA - M. B 01 M + 1
OIR DO dd 2 4 4.4 ... ! ! 0
EXT FD hh 1\ 3 5 5-5
IND.X ED tf 2 5 6-8
IND.Y 18 ED fl .3 6 7-7
S-:-OP SlOP Inlernal Clocks INH CF 11 2 2- 1 [..... -..
)o."'S (apr) Siore Slack Pointer SP_ M:M,. 1 DIR
9Frd
12.
.. 4.4 ...... ! a .
I
EXT BF hh 1\ 13 5 55
I
IND,X Af ft
I;
5 68
i
IND.Y 18 AF ft 6 7-7
ISTX (opr)
ISlore Index Regioler X IX..., M:M.,.l DIR DFdd 2 4 4-4 ---1!0
EXT FF hh 1\ 3 5 5-5
i
IND,X EF H 2 5 6-8
! I
IND,Y CO EFtl 3 6 77
;STY (opr) lSlore Index Register Y IY M:M +1 DIR
18
DF
Idd
3 5
I
46 _)10
I
EXT 18 FF hh II 4' 6 57
IND,X 1A EF ft 3 6 69
IND,Y 18 EF ff 3 6 7-7
SUBA (opr) Subtract Memory Irom A A-M ...,A AIMM 80 ii 2 2 3-1 .. - ! ! !l
A DIR 90 dd 2 3 4.'
I A EXT 80 hh II 3 4 5-2
A IND,X Mit 2 4 6-2
A IND,Y 18 AO II '3 5 I ;-2
SUBS (apr) ISubtract Memory from B B-M .... B BIMM COii 2 2 ! 3-1 ... -!! ! I
I
B DIR DO cd 2, 3
I
41
8 EXT Fa hh II

.;
5-2
8IND,X EO ff 4 6-2
,
81ND.Y 18 EO If 5 j-2 ;
SUBD (opr) Subtract Memory from 0 D-M:M.l_0 IMM 83 ii kk 3
.;
33 .. P' P t I ! !
DIR 930d 2 5 47
EXT 83 hh 11 3 6 510
IND,X A3itt :2 6 610
IND,Y 18 A3ifl 3 7 78
'SWI Software Inlerrupt See Special Ops INH 3FI 1 14 I 215 1- -
TAB Transler A. to 8 !A-8 IINH I
16; 1 2 21 - .. ! ! O
,AP ITransl erA. to CC Register A ->CCR IINH 06: I 2 I 21 ll::!!:!
T3A iTransler B to A IB ...,A IINH 17: 1 2 \ 2-' ---- !l0
Cycle-by-cycle numDer prOVides a reference to Tables 10-2 through 10-8 which detail cycleby-cycle operation.
Example: Tab Ie '0-1 Cycle-by-Cycle column reference number 2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.
MOTOROLA CPU, ADDRESSING MODES, AND INSTRUCTION SET MC68HC11A8
1010 TECHNICAL DATA
II
-;>
- SE:L . .
Table 10-1 MC68HC11A8 Instructions, Addressing Modes
l
and Execution Times
(Sheet 6 of 6)
'",
I
Condition Codes CYC!5 Machine Coding Addressing Boolean Expression til Operation
Source
U'"
by (Hexadecimal) Mode tor
Form(s) :::: '"
I
>
(.)
t:l
Cycle' Operand SXHiNZVC Operand(s) Opcode
......... -
111
..
I
2-20 00 INH Address Bus Counts
ITEST ITEST (Only in ,est Modes)
...............
2-1 07 111 2
ITP!'I ITransler CC Register [0 A ICCR _A IINH
.... ,,00
EXT 70 hh II
6 I 59
IINO.X
\,8, (op,\ ITeSi Zero or Mlnus
IM-'J
II
i
60 it 6 I 5"
i JIND.Y
I
18 6D ff 7
I 74
.... ! 0 0
I I
1 2
I
21
A-O IAINH I
40

11 2 21 -noo B INH SO
!ISTE I
Ie - 0
SP + 1 -; IX INH ,TSX lTransler Stack POInter to X
jTSY !7ransler Stack Pointer to Y ISP ... 1 -; IV IINH
ITXS ITransle, X to Staok Pointer IX - 1 -; SP
1'( - 1 -; SP
Stack Regs & WAiT
IX .... O. D .... IX
IY D. O .... IY
INH
in'S
iTrans!er Y to Slack Pointer INH
iv\'.A.1 /Wail tor Interrupt INH
IXGDX I 0 with X INH
!XGDY IE.xoh:lngo 0 with Y INH
1
3
4
...... - .......
1 \ 3
I
23 30\
\
4
I
25 I . -....
I
1830 2
351 3
I
2-2
I
................
18351 12
<I
I
24
.,.
2-16
[... , ....
I
3E 11
2-2 --.. .. -.... i
I
8F
.... _..........
18 SF 2 2" I
'Cycleby-cycle number p,ovldes a reference to Tables 102 through 10-8 which detail cycle-by-cycle operation.
Example: Table 10-1 CyclebyCycle column reference number2-4 equals Table 10-2 line item 2-4.
"Infinity or Until Reset Occurs
"'12 Cycles are used beginning with the opcode fetCh. A wail state is entered which remains in effect for an integer
number of !vi PU E-c!ock cycles (n). until an inierrupt is recognized. Finally, two additional cycles are used to fetCh
the appropriate interrupt veclor (14 + n total).
dd =8Bit Direct Address ($0000 -SOOFF) (High Byte Assumed to be $00)
ff = 8-Bit Positive Offset sao (0) to SFF (255) (Is Added to Index)
hh = High Order Byte of 16-Bit Extended Address
Ii =One Byte of Immediate Data
jj = HiQh Order Byte of 16-Bit Immediate Data
kk =Low Order Byte of 16-Bit Immediate Data
/I = Low Ord er Byte of 16B11 Extended Address
mm = 8-Bit Bit Mask (Set Bits to be Affected)
rr =Signed Relative Offset $80 (- 128) to $7F (+ 127)
(Offset Pelative to the Address Following the Machine Code Offset Byte)
MC68HC11A8
CPU, ADDRESSING MODES, AND INSTRUCTION SET
MOTOROL.Jl..
TECHNICAL DATA
10-11
Table 3 MC68HC11A8 Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 1 of 2)
(The register block can be remapped to any 4K boundary.)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Bit 0
$1000
,----.
PA7
I
PAS PA5 PM PA3 PA2 PA1 PAD
$1001
I
$1002 STAF STAI CWOM HNOS OIN PlS EGA INVB
$1003 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PCO
$1004 PB7 PB6 PBS P84 PB3 PB2 PBl PSO
$1005 PCl7 PCl6 PClS PCl4 pel3 PCl2 PCL1 PClO
$1006
$1007 oDC7
_.
ODC6 DOCS 00C4 DDC3 DDC2 00C1 ODCO
$1008 0 0 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 P01 PDO
$1009 0 0 ODDS 0004 0003 0002 0001 DODO
$100A PE7 PE6 PES PE;4 PE3 PE2 PEl PEO
$1008 FOC1 FOC2 FOC3 FOC4 FOes 0 0 0
$100e OC1M7 OC1M6 OC1MS OC1M4 OC1M3 0 0 0
$1000 OC107 OC1D6 OC105 OC104 OC103 0 0 0
$lOOE Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit 8
$100F Bit7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BilO
$1010 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bil8
$1011 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BilO
$1012 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit 8
$1013 Bil7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
$1014 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit 8
$1015 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BilO
$1016 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bil8
$1017 Bil7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
$1018 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit 8
$1019 Bil7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BilO
S101A Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Sil8
$1018 Bit7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
$101C Bil1s 14 13 12
..
11 10 9 Bit 8
---
- ~ . __._-
$1010 Bil7 6 S 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
$101 E Bil15 14 13 12 11 10 9 BH8
S101F Bil7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
$1020 OM2 OL2 OM3 OL3 OM4 OL4 OMS OL5
$1021 0 0 EDG1B EDG1A EOG2B EDG2A EOG3B EDG3A
$1022 OC11 OC21 OC31 OC41 OCsl IC11 IC21 IC31
$1023 OC1F OC2F OC3F OC4F OC5F lC1F IC2F IC3F
$1024 TOI RTII PAOVI PAIl 0 0 PR1 PRO
$1025 TOF RTIF PAOVF PAIF 0 0 0 0
PORTA
Reserved
PIOC
PORTC
PORTS
PORTCl
Reserved
DDRC
PORTO
OORD
PORTE
CFORC
OC1M
OClO
TCNT (High)
TCNT (low)
TIC1 (High)
TIC1 (low)
TIC2 (High)
TIC2 (Low)
TIC3 (High)
TIC3 (low)
TOC1(High)
TOC1 (Low)
TOC2 (High)
TOC2 (Low)
TOC3 (High)
TOC3 (low)
TOC4 (High)
TOC4 (low)
TOCS (High)
TOCS (Low)
TCTl1
TCTL2
TMSK1
TFLG1
TMSK2
TFlG2
MC68HC11A8
MOTOROLA
MC68HC11 A8TS/O
9
Table 3 MC68HC11A8 Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 2 of 2)
(The register block can be remapped to any 4K boundary.)
Bil7 6 5 4 3 2 BitO
DDRA7 PAEN PAMOD PEDGE 0 0 RTR1 RTRO
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO
SPIE SPE DWOM MSTR CPOl CPHA SPR1 SPRO
SPIF WCOl 0 MODF 0 0 0 0
Bit7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
I TCLR 0 SCP1 SCPO RCKB seR2 SCR1 SCRO
R8 T8 Q M WAKE 0 0 0
TIE TCIE RIE ILiE TE RE RWU SBK
TORE TC RDRF IDLE OR NF FE 0
R7iT7 Rsrrs R5fT5 R4rr4 R3IT3 R2fT2 R1rf1 Rorro
CCF 0 SCAN MULT CD CC CB CA
Bil7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 eito
Bil7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BilO
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BilO
---
ADPU CSEL IRQE DlY CME 0 eR1 CRG
----
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO
ODD EVEN 0 BYTE ROW ERASE EELAT EEPGM
RBOOT SMOD MDA IRV PSEl3 PSEL2 PSELl PSELO
RAM3 RAM2
RAM' RAMO REG3 REG2 REG1 REG.O
TILOP
I
0 oeeR CBYP DISR FCM FCOP TCON
0 0 0 0 NOSEC Noeop ROMON EEON
PACTl $1026
PACNT $1027
SPCR $1028
SPSR $1029
SPDR $102A
BAUD $102B
$102C SeeR1
$1020 SCCR2
$1Q2E SeSR
$102F SeDR
$1030 ADCTL
$1031 ADR1
$1032 ADR2
$1033 AOR3
$1034
ADR4
$1035
Reserved
$1038
Reserved
$1039
OPTION
$103A
COPRST
$103B
PPROG
S103C
HPRIO
$1030
INIT
$103E
TEST1
$103F
CON FiG
MOTOROLA
MC68HC11A8
MC65HC11 A8TSID
10
L293B
L293E
PUSH-PULL FOUR CHANNEL DRIVERS
OUTPUT CURRENT 1A PER CHANNEL
PEAK OUTPUT CURRENT 2A PER CHANNEL
(non repetitive)
INHIBIT FACILITY
HIGH NOISE IMMUNITY
SEPARATE LOGIC SUPPLY
OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION
DESCRIPTION
The L2938 and L293E are quad push-pull drivers
capable of delivering output currents to 1Aperchan
nel. Each channel is controlled by a TIL-compatible
logic input and each pair of drivers (a full bridge) is
equipped with an inhibit input which turns off all four
transistors. A separate supply input is provided for
the logic so that it may be run off a lower voltage to
reduce dissipation.
Additionally, the L293E has external connection of
sensing resistors, for switchmode control.
The L293Band L293E are package in 16 and 20-pin
plastic 0 IPs respectively; both use the four center
pins to conduct heat to the printed circuit board.
PIN CONNECTIONS
DIP16 L293B
CHIP (liABLE 1 1
16 J V:;:;
INPUT 1
OUTPUT'
GNO
GNO
OUTPUT 7
INPUT 2
V
s
April 1993
2
15 ~ INPUT 4
3
14 ~
OUTPUT 4
L
13 ~
GNO
5
12 ~ GNO
6
11 ~ OUTPUT 3
7
1 0 ~
INPUT J
8
9 ~ CHIP EHABLE 2
s- "169
DIP16
ORDERING NUMBER: L293B
POWERDIP (16 + 2+ 2)
ORDERING NUMBER: L293E
POWERDIP (16+2+2) - L293E
CHIP ENolBlE 11
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
SEN5E 1
I
GNO
liND
S>ENSE 2
OUTPUT 2
'''PUT 2
1
20 ~ V,.,,.,
2
19 ~
INPUT 4
1
18 ~
OUTPUT'
4 n ~
SENSE 4
5
16 ~
GND
6
1; GMO
7
14 ~
SEN5E 1
8
13 ~
OUTPuT 3
OJ
12
INPUT 3
V. 110 11 ~ C H I P ENABLE 2
Ss.S?
1/12
2/12
1-'-------.. 1293E
20 V
u
or-........-,.'g L[:
2
L293B - L293E
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
DIP16 - L293B
5

L293
13
II

'--__--=9'-t -C
POWERDIP (16+2+2) - L293E
M \
I) 0-
'II .IT'
0
I
I

J. I ----40--_... 1_D
S-515l/z
6/12
L293B - L293E
Figure 6: Output Voltage versus Figure 7: Output Voltage versus
Input Voltage Inhibit Voltage
G-4lH
G- 4J OJ
lis' Z4Y
'lss= Vi =5Y
I I
H
ILf-T
am
b=25C
USC -
-40'C
II
VCEntl
2.5 Vinhibit(V)
e--
VSK 24'1
Vinlubil =5 V
Vs - 'ICE &oat H
'I
,
T..mIl" ZS"C
I
1ZSC
-4OC
J
I
II
/I
VCE sat L
J
Z
APPLICATION INFORMATION
'.5 2
Figure 8: DC Motor Controls Figure 9: Bidirectional DC Motor Control
(with connection to ground and
to the supply voltage)
+1Is
cr-oP---_.----.,
A
\0
8
5-51631'
Vinh A M1 B M2
H H Fast Motor Stop H Run
H L Run L Fast Motor Stop
L X Free Running X Free Running
Motor Stop Motor Stop
L = Low H = High X = Don't Care
8
V
inh
-
Inputs Function
Vinh = H C=H;D=L Turn Right
I
C=L;D=H Turn Left
C=D Fast Motor Stop
Vinh = L C=X;D=X Free Running
Motor Stop
L = Low H =High x = Don't Care
I I CONFIDENTIAL
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEL 4743 / SZE 4213
BASIC DIGITAL VLSI
PROF. DR. MOHAMED KHALIL BIN
MOHDHANI
DR. SHAIKH NASIR BIN SHAIKH HUSIN
SEC / SEL / SEM/ SET / SEW
01/02
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
3 MAY 2009
ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY
COVER
SEL4743
2
FORMULAE & PARAMETERS:
Supply voltage: V
OD
=2.5 V
Drain current:
IIDI =!k'! : Gsi-ivrl)Vrom - v:W](1 + IAVDSI)
Vmin =mine IVosl-IVTI, IVosI, IVDSAT!)
VT =VTO + r[ 2F + VSBI- 2FI]
Standard t ranSIS
. t
or parame ers: t
V
TO
(V)
y (V
u
.,)
NMOS 0.43 0.4
PMOS -0.4 -0.4
q>F(V) VOSAT (V) k' I
-0.3 0.63 115
I
0.3 -1 -30
I
Question 1
(a) Data for an unknown short channel pMOS transistor (do not assume standard
transistor parameters) with W/L = 10 is given in Table 1. Assume the
transistor does not operate in velocity saturation and q>F = 0.3 V. Calculate VTQ, A,
y, and k
p
'. [20 marks]
Table 1
Vas (V) VDs (V) VBS (V) IIDJ
1 -0.4 -1 0 3.29
2 -1.5 -1 0 400
3 -2 -1.5 0 814.3
4 -2 -2.5 0 1135
5 -1.5 -2 1 338.6
(b) A circuit with standard transistor parameters is shown in Fig. 1. Both transistors
have identical sizes, and V
DD
= 2.5 V. Explain why V
x
is < 1.25 V. Ignore body
effect in your analysis. Do not perform calculation to determine the actual value
ofVx [5 marks]
Fig. 1
SEL 4743
3
Question 2
Table 2 shows data for an inverter with long channel transistors. Both transistors never
operate in velocity saturation. Transistor parameters are: k
n
' = 80 IlAN2, k
p
' = 20 IlAN2,
An =A
p
=0 V-I, V
Tn
=0.65 V, (W/L)n = 1.5. Vo
o
is 5 V.
Table 2
Yin (V) V
out
(V)
1101 (Il A)
1 1.5 4.87 44
2 2.5 2.5 209
(a) Determine VTp' [10 marks]
(b) Determine (WIL)p. [5 marks]
(c) Determine output voltage when Yin =3 V. [10 marks]
Question 3
Given a Boolean function f = AB + CD + E .
(a) Obtain a single CMOS logic circuit that implements the function. [5 marks]
(b) Give the size of each transistor, in units of A, so that the gate has similar rise and
fall times to that of an inverter with (W/L)p = 6 fJ2 A. and (W/L)n = 3 fJ2 A..
[6 marks]
(c) Determine the logical effort of the gate for input A. [4 marks]
(d) Draw a stick diagram for your logic circuit. Use the convention shown in Fig.
3.You should use a single active strip for both PMOS and NMOS transistors, and
you must minimize the output capacitance. If you need to rearrange your circuit to
meet the constraints, please do. In this case, show your new circuit. [10 marks]
[==:J active
poly
metal1
X contact cut
Fig. 3
1 I SULIT
KODKURSUS
KURSUS
PENSYARAH
PROGRAM
SEKSYEN
MASA
TARIKH
SESI 2008/2009
SEM 4333
REKABENTUK SISTEM MEKATRONIK
PROF. MADYA DR. ROSBI BIN MAMAT
SEM
01
2 JAM 30 MINIT
6 MEl 2009
ARAHAN KEPADA CALON
JAWAB EMPAT (4) SOALAN SAHAJA.
2
-SEM4333
S1.
a) lelaskan apa yang dimaksudkan dengan 'penyelakuan perkakasan di dalam gelung
(hardware-in-the-loop simulation)' di dalam proses rekabentuk suatu sistem
mekatronik. Berikan satu contoh bagaimana penyelakuan ini dapat mengurangkan
kitar pembangunan sistem mekatronik. [6 MARKAH]
b) Satu sistem motor arus terus dengan kawalan angker boleh diwakili oleh litar
elektromekanik yang ditunjukkan di dalam Rajah Sl.l. Voltan masukan vQ(t) akan
menghasilkan daya kilas T(t) yang berkadar terus dengan arus angker i (t):
a
T(t) =K,iQ(t)
Daya kilas ini seterusnya menghasilkan sudut putaran aci e(t) manakala pusingan aci
pula menghasilkan voltan balik di dalam litar angker:
i) Dengan menggunakan analogi galangan, dapatkan hubungan va' Vb' i
a
di dalam
litar angker. [5 MARKAH]
ii) lika nilai aruhan (La) di dalam litar elektrik dan geseran (B) boleh diabaikan,
tunjukkan bahawa rangkap pindah bagi motor arus terus dengan kawalan
angker diberikan oleh:
[6 MARKAH]
8(s) = K,
Va(s) s(RaJs +K/K
b
)
Unsur pasif sistem putaran mekanik diberikan di dalam Rajah S1.2.
iii) Tuliskan rangkap pindah bagi motor arus terus ini jika motor ini mempunyai
parameter-parameter berikut: R =50, K =O.05N.m.A-I, K =O.05V.s.rad-
1
,
a I b
dan J = 2N.m.s
2
.rad-
1
[2 MARKAH]
iv) Lukiskan gambarajah blok penyelakuan bagi motor arus terus dengan parameter
yang diberikan di dalam bahagian iii) di atas jika blok-blok penyelakuan yang
ada hanyalah blok-blok berikut: [6 MARKAH]
~ ~
l
I
~ ~
~
"" L.
~
1J
Penjumlah
Pengamir Pembeza Gandaan
3
-5EM4333
B
i/t)
T ~
O(t)
Mekanik
Rajah 51.1: Motor arus terus dengan kawalan angker
J I JD
Inertia

. .
TCt) =J e(t) T(t) =B(B
1
(t) - B
2
(t))
T ialah tork T ialah tork
J ialah momen inertia B ialah pemalar likat
Rajah 51.2: Unsur pasif sistem putaran mekanik
Elektrik
4
-SEM4333
82.
a) Berpandukan satu fungsi dalaman satu penderia pintar (smart sensor), jelaskan
dengan ringkas bagaimana fungsi dalaman ini dapat mengurangkan kos senggara dan
masa henti sesuatu produk yang menggunakan penderia pintar. [5 MARKAH]
b) Satu pengekod menokok dengan cakera optik yang ditunjukkan di dalam Rajah S2.1
digunakan untuk mengesan halaju putaran satu motor arus terus. Cakera optik
tersebut menghasilkan dua isyarat keluaran A dan B dengan tempoh yang ditunjukkan
di dalam Rajah S2.1. Jejak pada cakera direka supaya keluaran A dan B adalah
berbeza fasa 90 (kuadratur). [9 MARKAH]
(i). Kirakan halaju putaran motor tersebut di dalam unit putaran per minit (rpm).
(ii). Jelaskan dengan ringkas bagaimana arah putaran motor tersebut dapat ditentukan
daripada isyarat A dan B ?
it'.". Jejak A
a. __.---- A
----,I
-.
...... ,
--
.. .....--Je-jakS- 8_1 I L
.....__ ,.... 0.5 saat ~ I
Rajah S2.1: Cakera optik dan isyarat keluaran pengekod menokok
c) Rajah S2.2 menunjukkan sebahagiari dari pemacu motor arus terus jenis L298 di
dalam konfigurasi tetimbang-H yang digunakan untuk kawalan dwihala motor.
i) Jelaskan cara kerja tetimbang-H ini dengan merujuk kepada fungsi pin-pin C, 0
dan Yen. [6 MARKAH]
ii) Jika pin Yen diberikan isyarat bermodulat lebar denyut (pulse-width modulated),
terangkan hubungan di antara halaju motor dengan lebar denyut tersebut.
[5 MARKAH]
::I!:oon F
Inputs Function
Ve" = H C=H:D=L Forward
C=L:D=H Reverse
C=D Fast Motor Stop
Vee. = L C=X:D=X Free Running
Motor Stop
L =Low H =High I 1/2 l.29SN
- - - - ~ ... _ , - , ~ _ .. ........,,--,,------+-'---<Ov""
0
0
112
c-{>: L<}
TO CONTROL pS
CIRCUI'T --......,
i
Rajah S2.2: Pemacu motor L298
t---DBO
t---DB1 2
AD558
DAC
V
OIJT
GND
GND
+V
CC
CS
pea t-------------l
5
-SEM4333
83.
a) Terangkan dengan ringkas satu (1) faedah dan satu (1) keburukan menggunakan
mikropengawal sebagai pelantar pengawal terbenam di dalam sistem mekatronik.
[4MARKAH]
b) Rajah S3.1 menunjukkan satu penukar digital ke analog (DAC) jenis AD558
disambungkan kepada mikropengawal M68HCll. AD558 adalah DAC jenis 8 bit
yang memberikan keluaran 0 hingga 2.56 volt bagi sambungan seperti di dalam Rajah
S3.1.
i) Kirakan 'resolusi' bagi penukar digital ke analog ini di dalam unit peratus dari
skala penuh (percent of full-scale %FS). [5 MARKAH]
ii) Jika atur cara di bawah dilaksanakan oleh M68HC 11, kirakan voltan yang
dihasilkan oleh penukar digital ke analog tersebut. [6 MARKAH]
LDX #$leee
LDAA #%eeeeeeel
STAA DDRC,X
LDAA #$AB
STAA PORTB,X
BCLR PORTC,X $el
BSET PORTC,X $el
M68HC11
PBa
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
~ 0 -- +2.56V
V O U T ~ ~ ~ : ~ T ~
VovrSELECT
-----
+5V
Rajah S3.1: Sambungan AD558 kepada M68HCll.
6
-SEM4333
c) Satu transduser tekanan mempunyai rangkap pindah seperti yang ditunjukkan di
dalam Rajah S3.2. Voltan keluaran transduser tersebut ialah O.IV pada tekanan 2 PSI
dan O.25V pada tekanan 15 PSI. Satu penukar analog ke digital dengan voltan skala
penuh 0-5V digunakan untuk membaca transduser tekanan ini. Rekakan satu litar
penyesuai isyarat yang sesuai untuk membolehkan penukar analog ke digital ini dapat
membacajulat tekanan 2-15 PSI dengan skala penuh 0-5V.
[10 MARKAH]
Voltan keluaran
Volt
0.25
0.1
2 15 Tekanan/PSI
Rajah 83.2: Rangkap pindah transduser tekanan
7
-SEM4333
84.
Sudut guling pergerakan satu kapal boleh dimodelkan oleh rangkap pindah berikut:
G (s) =B(s) = 2.5
p T(s) s(s2+11s+28)
Di mana e ialah sudut gulingan dan T ialah tork masukan kepada kapal tersebut.
a) Rekakan satu pengawal terbitan berkadaran bagi mengawal sudut gulingan kapal
tersebut yang memenuhi prestasi berikut: peratus lajakan PO ~ 10%, dan tiada ralat
keadaan mantap. Gunakan kaedah londar punca. Tunjukkan langkah rekabentuk anda
dengan jelas. Rangkap pindah bagi pengawal terbitan berkadaran adalah seperti
berikut: [14 MARKAH]
b) Jika pengawal terbitan berkadaran di dalam bahagian a) di atas hendak dijadikan
pengawal digital secara perisian dengan tempoh persampelan T =50 milisaat,
dapatkan persamaan pembeza yang memberikan algoritma pengawal digital tersebut.
[11 MARKAH]
9
-SEM4333
a) Dengan menggunakan rumus penalaan PI yang diberikan di dalam Lampiran 2,
tentukan nilai parameter pengawal PI (K
c
' 1;) bagi sistem elektromekanik ini.
Tunjukkan langkah rekabentuk anda dengan jelas. [12 MARKAH]
b) Jika pengawal PI di dalam bahagian a) di atas hendak didiskretkan menjadi pengawal
digital, tunjukkan bagaimana anda memilih tempoh persampelan (7) yang sesuai bagi
pengawal PI ini. [3 MARKAH]
c) Dengan menggunakan penghampiran pembeza ke belakang (backward difference):
i) Tuliskan persamaan pembeza bagi algoritma pengawal PI digital ini.
[7MARKAH]
ii) Tunjukkan bahawa rangkap pindah bagi pengawal PI digital di dalam
ungkapan operator anjak undur Z-I hasil dari pendiskretan ialah:
[3 MARKAH]
a
l
dan a
2
pemalar yang anda dapat dari bahagian i) di atas.
\ CONFIDENTIAL 1
SESSION 2008/2009
COURSE CODE SEP 4003
COURSE
PHYSIOLOGY AND INTRODUCTION TO
MEDICINE
LECTURER DR. YUSOF BIN OMAR
PROGRAMME SEP
SECTION 01
TIME 3 HOURS
DATE 28 APRIL 2009
This booklet has three (3) parts:
SECTION A (Objective question)
Choose the most CORRET answer. Answer all the questions in OMR paper.
SECTION B (Short question)
Answer all the questions.
SECTION C (Eassy question)
Choose two (2) questions only.
COVER
2
SEP4003
SECTION A: OBJECTIVES QUESTION (40 MARKS)
1. Which activity is NOT related to diastolic phase?
A. Second heart sound at early phase.
B. Nonnal reading of sphygmomanometer is 80 mmHg.
C. Isometric contraction of the ventricle.
D. Opening of A-V valves.
2. What is the feature of cardiac muscle similar to skeletal muscle?
A. Branching and interconnected.
B. Involuntary.
C. Innervated by autonomic nerves.
D. Myofibril.
3. Which statement is TRUE about cardiac systole?
A. First heart sound heard at the beginning of the systolic phase.
B. Isometric contraction expels the ventricle blood into the aorta.
C. Opening of A-V valves.
D. Contraction of papillary muscle.
3
SEP4003
4. Arrange the answer according to the sequence flow of electrical impulse in the heart
conductive system.
1. AV node 2. SA node 3. Bundle of His 4. Purkinje fibers 5. Internodal fibers
A. 2 - 1 - 3 - 5 - 4
B. 2 - 5 - 1 - 3 - 4
C. 1 - 5 - 2 - 3 - 4
D. 1- 2 - 3 - 4 - 5
5. There are structures involved in Tidal Volume Respiration, EXCEPT
A. Intercostal muscles.
B. Intrathoracic pressure.
C. Lung elasticity.
D. Mediastinum.
6. Which statement is TRUE about Larynx?
A. The vocal cord is in the cricoid cartilage.
B. Adam's apple refers to the prominent bone of Hyoid bone.
C. Epiglottis attached to the posterior surface of the Thyroid cartilage.
D. The whole internal wall is lined by stratified columnar epithelium.
4
SEP4003
7. Feature of the lung is
A. It receives deoxygenated blood from superior vena cava.
B. Gas exchange begins at respiratory bronchus.
C. Pleural visceral attaches to the thoracic wall.
D. Increase thoracic cage diameter is associated with increase lung volume.
8. Choose the TRUE statement of gas exchange in the alveoli.
A. The alveoli gas pressure is 76mmHg.
B. Nitrogen has gradient partial pressure in the alveolus and capillary.
C. Oxygen partial pressure in the pulmonary vein is equivalent to oxygen in the alveolus.
D. Capillary blood flows to the alveolus has low Carbon dioxide partial pressure.
9. Passive flow of venous blood to the right atrium is NOT aggravated by
A. Upright body position.
B. Lower limbs muscle contraction.
C. Venous valves.
D. Respiration.
10. The branch of aorta is
A. Right carotid artery.
B. Radial artery.
C. Inferior mesenteric artery.
D. External iliac artery.
5
SEP4003
11. Plasma capillary filtration depends on several factors EXCEPT
A. Hydrostatic pressure.
B. Osmotic pressure.
C. The capillary diameter is greater than venule.
D. Permeability of capillary membrane.
12. Which statement is TRUE about the blood vessels?
A. Endocardium is an extension layer of tunica adventitia.
B. Tunica media is thicker in aorta.
C. The blood pressure in the capillaries is greater than arterioles.
D. Pulmonary veins have no valves.
13. Which condition refers to natural passive acquired immunization?
A. Vaccination.
B. Rhesus incompatibility.
C. Infection.
D. Circulating antibodies in the plasma.
14. Choose the TRUE statement about blood grouping composition.
A. Blood group 0 composes antigen A and B.
B. Blood group AB can donate to all blood groups.
C. Serum with no antibodies A and B can receive blood from blood group 0 only.
D. All answers above are false.
6
SEP4003
15. Which cell is NOT classified as polymorph nuclear granulocyte?
A. Neutrophil.
B. Monocyte.
C. Basophil.
D. Eosinophil.
16. The FALSE features of the skin is
A. Blood vessels in dermal layer constricted in hot atmosphere.
B. Nail is a keratinized dead cell from the bone.
C. Black colored hair caused by melanin pigmentation.
D. Upright skin hair caused by involuntary contraction of the arrector muscle.
17. Lymphatic vessels over the right upper limbs return to the blood circulation at
A. Superior vena cava.
B. Cisterna chyli.
C. Opening at left subclavian vein.
D. Opening at right subclavian vein.
7
SEP4003
18. Animal fat consists of
A. Mixture of saturated and unsaturated fat.
B. Fatty acids only.
C. Saturated fat only.
D. All answers above are true.
19. The movement of ovum in the uterine tube is aggravated by
I. Peristalsis II. Mucous
III. Ciliated epithelium IV. Fimbrae
A. I, III and IV.
B. I, II and III.
C. III only.
D. I, II, III and IV.
20. Menstrual phase is characterized by
A. Corpus luteum producing progesterone.
B. Stimulation of LH.
C. Broken down of endometrial lining.
D. Fertilized ovum.
8
SEP4003
1. How the testis maintains its temperature at 34 degree Celsius?
I. Testis inside the body II. Covered by skin fold
III. Fat layer IV. Cremastric muscle contraction
A. I and II.
B. I, II and III.
C. II, III and IV.
D. I, II, III and IV.
22. Which statement about male reproductive organ is INCORRECT?
A. The life span of spermatozoa is one day.
B. Urethra is in the corpus spongiosum.
C. Normal male produces 40 - 100 million spermatozoa per 5 mI.
D. A spermatozoon has mitochondria.
23. Outer layer of the tympanic membrane is formed by
A. Fibrous tissue.
B. Mucous membrane.
C. Hairless skin.
D. Thin fibro-elastic cartilage.
9
SEP4003
24. Which statement is TRUE?
A. Convergence refers to the three dimensional vision.
B. Retina has refractive power.
C. Numerous rods cells lining Macula hitea.
D. Optic disc is called blind spot.
25. Choose a CORRECT pair.
A. Sclera - Choroid.
B. Cornea - Iris.
C. Retina - Rod cells.
D. Ciliary body - Lens.
26. The FALSE statement about nerve.
A. Impulse moves faster in mylinated nerve.
B. Axon carries impulse from dendrite to nerve cell.
C. Neuron is a unit of nerve cell.
D. Connecting place between dendrites is called 'synapse'.
10
SEP4003
27. Oxygen in the blood circulation is carried by
A. Saturated plasma.
B. Haemoglobin.
C. Attaches to red blood cell wall.
D. Plasma protein.
28. Normal characteristic of life cell EXCEPT
A. Intake of saturated oxygen from plasma.
B. Meiosis.
C. White blood cell responds to immune reaction.
D. ATP for metabolism.
29. The TRUE statement about renal
1. Produce erythropoietin II. Osmosis regulation
III.Acid-base balance regulation IV. Renin-angiotensin
A. I. C. I, II and III.
B. I and II. D. I, II, III and IV.
11
SEP4003
30. The most sensitive part in the bladder wall is called
A. Prostate.
B. Fundus.
C. Trigone.
D. Transitional epithelium.
31. Ciliated epithelium is found in
A. Oral mucosa.
B. Fallopian tube.
C. Intestinal mucosa.
D. Oropharynx.
32. Which has NO phagocytic effect?
A. Monocyte.
B. Kuffer cell.
C. Neutrophil.
D. Eosinophil.
12
SEP4003
33. The TRUE statement about normal vertebrae is
A. Lordosis is markedly seen at cervical and lumbar vertebra areas.
B. The 1st cervical bone is an axis bone.
C. Spinal cord is terminated at 7th cervical bone.
D. The 8th cervical nerve comes out from the 8th cervical vertebrae.
34. Upper neuron nerve decussates in
A. Proximal spinal cord.
B. Medulla Oblongata.
e. Cerebrum.
D. Pons.
35. Cerebrospinal fluid is produced by
A. Choroid plexus.
B. 4
th
ventricle.
C. Dura meter.
D. Cerebellum.
13
SEP4003
36. What is the function of Cerebellum?
A. Coordinates voluntary movement of various muscles.
B. Ensuring smooth, even, precise actions of various muscle activities.
C. Maintenance of the balance and equilibrium of the body.
D. All answers above are true.
37. Vitamin D3 in human body is produced by
A. Skin.
B. Bone.
C. Food intake.
D. Hormone.
38. Feature of Mosaic model is
A. Hydrophobic molecules line inner outer layer.
B. Sodium pump is made up of phospholipids.
C. Simple diffusion is an active transport.
D. A bilayer of protein and phospholipid molecules.
14
SEP4003
What is the function of ribosome?
A. To detoxify toxin.
B. Amino acid synthesis.
C. Produces polypeptides.
D. Template for DNA.
Differentiation between eukaryotic and prokaryotic ceIls
A. Plants have prokaryotic ceIls.
B. Prokaryotic DNA is enveloped by nucleus membrane.
C. Eukaryotic is bigger than prokaryotic cell.
D. Mitosis does not exist in prokaryotic cells.
1
15
SEP4003
SECTION B: SHORT QUESTIONS (20 MARKS)
1. Name the heart structures related to conductive system in Figure 1. (5 Marks)
2----
3 - - - - - - - - - . . . . : : : : : - ~ ~ ~ ~
.. _ " " ' P '
4
5
FIGURE 1
16
SEP4003
2. Name all the anatomical views in Figure 2. (10 Marks)
1
-C---Jr----------- 5
61
. ~ - - - + - - - - - -
--L-. 3
1
0--
8
0--9
10
17
SEP4003
4-----U
7 ---------,r
FIGURE 2
18
SEP4003
3. Name the anatomical areas of the cerebrum in Figure 3. (5 Marks)
5
4,
FIGURE 3
19
SEP4003
SECTION C: ESSAY (40MARKS)
Choose TWO questions only.
1. The process of fluid filtration and reabsorption in the capillary is the result of 'effective net
pressure' over the proximal and distal capillary. "Effective net pressure" is developed by the
sum of pressure factors in the capillary and interstitial cells.
Define all the factors involved and explain how these 'effective net pressure' are developed.
(20 Marks)
2. Transmission of sound in the ear produces fluid wave in the cochlea and then ended at the
round window. Organ of Corti able to differentiate the amplitude and frequency of sounds
based on the character of fluid wave developed in the cochlear.
a) Describe the character of fluid wave related to high, medium and low frequency sounds.
(10 Marks)
b) Describe the character of fluid wave in the cochlear related to various amplitude sounds.
(10 Marks)
20
SEP4003
3. Several factors influence the contraction activity ofthe striated muscle. One of them is an
isotonic and isometric contraction. Explain,
a) The different between isotonic and isometric contraction.
(10 Marks)
b) List down the factors influence the contraction activity.
(10 Marks)
\ CONFIDENTIAL I
8!!IM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEP4043
CLINICAL ENGINEERING
PROF. DR. JASMY BIN YUNUS
MR. SYED MOHD NOOH BIN SYED OMAR
SEP
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
30 APRIL 2009
SECTION A - ANSWER THE QUESTION.
SECTION B - ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
2
SEP 4043
SECTION A (30 Minutes)
Answer the questions
Question 1
A. Give the defmition of active medical device
.' " ..;;
':.,.:{
..........................'
, ,.' ;
...
. .
[4 Marks]
B. Explain the meaning of symbols above
[6 Marks]
C. Describe how you would conduct enclosure leakage current test on the medical device
which has the symbols above on it. Assume the device has no exposed conductive
parts.
[10 Marks]
3
SEP4043
SECTION B (2 Hours)
Answer 4 questions only
Question 2
A. Ultrasound is usually used in 3 major areas in hospital. Describe how ultrasound is
used for medical diagnosis in these three areas.
[10 Marks]
B. A woman who is 6 months pregnant is suspected of having hairline fracture in her
right fibula. Discuss the possibility of using the following imaging modalities to
diagnose the problem.
a. MRI
b. Ultrasound
c. X-ray
[10 Marks]
Question 3
A. What is meant by the term medical location? Hence, define the following terms in
relation to medical location
a. Group 0
b. Group I
c. Group 2
[8 Marks]
B. Assuming a company has developed a haemodialysis machine for use in rural areas
using solar energy, determine which medical location group should this machine be
categorized under? Provide justification for your answer.
[12 Marks]
4
SEP 4043
Question 4
A. Explain the Law of Grotthus-Draper and its application to therapy.
[10 Marks]
B. A pulsed SWD diathermy machine has waveform as shown below. The peak pulse
power is 800W. Dose II therapy requires power of 80W; determine whether this
machine is capable of meeting this requirement.
watt(W)
OFF ON
+------_.
800
400
2 4 6
8
terns)
Fig.l Pulsed SWD diathermy machine parameter
[10 Marks]
Question 5
A. What is the RF immunity value for medical devices in critical care unit? Why is EMC
important in healthcare environment?
[10 Marks]
B. A private hospital is to be built in a commercial area where there is a TV transmitter
located about half ki.lometer within the vicinity. Measurement conducted showed that
this is just within the limit allowable for critical care medical devices. What step
should be taken to ensure that an ICU ward can be set up complying with EMC
standard for healthcare facilities?
[10 Marks]
5
SEP 4043
Question 6
A. There are 4 elements of dependability when describing critical software system for use
in healthcare institution. One element is reliability, describe the other three elements.
[10 Marks]
B. Using infusion pump as an example, describe ways and means of achieving reliability
to ensure patient safety.
[10 Marks]
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEP 4123
INSTRUMENTATION AND MEASUREMENT
IN MEDICAL
MR. AB. RAHIM BIN AB. RAHMAN
SEP
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
7 MAY 2009
COVER
2
SEP4123
ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY
Ql.
(a) You may answer the following questions with the aid of circuit diagrams,
mathematical expressions, charts and (or) graphs.
(i) Briefly describe at least two advantages of an instrumentation amplifier
compared to a single ended amplifier. [4 marks]
(li) How do you differentiate between a common-mode signal and a difference mode
signal flowing in a pair of conductors? [4 marks]
(iii) What does Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) shows? Discuss. [2 marks]
(b) Refer to the instrumentation amplifier circuit in Figure Ql.
(i) Derive the output equation of the circuit in terms of difference-mode gain, A<J and
common-mode gain, Ac. [7 marks]
(ii) Deduce the expression for CMRR. [3 marks]
(iii) If each resistor has a maximum resistance's tolerance of n%, derive the new
expression for CMRR in term ofn. [5 marks]
3
SEP4123
>-.......... .. vo
Figure Ql
4
SEP4123
Q2.
(i) What type of sensor that needs to be incorporated in a dc bridge circuit?
[2 marks]
(ii) What type of sensor that needs to be incorporated in an ac bridge circuit?
[2 marks]
(iii) The supply to the bridge circuit can be voltage or current. Which one is better in
terms of its output fidelity? Discuss. [2 marks]
(iv) If the sensor used is a nonlinear device, the output produced is also nonlinear.
Suggest some solutions to overcome this problem. [4 marks]
(b) Refer to Figure Q2 (a) and Figure Q2 (b). The circuits in these figures are bridge
circuits using R(1+o) as their sensors. 0 is a fractional changes in resistance of the
sensor. The sensors in both circuits may sense different type of parameters. For
example the first sensor sensing the heat and the second sensor sensing the
pressure.
(i) Derive the expression for the output voltage, v
o
[10 marks]
(ii) Between these two circuits which one gives better performance? Discuss.
[5 marks]
5
SEP4123
Figure Q2 (a)
R(1+8)
R
Vo
Figure Q2 (b)
6
SEP4123
Q3.
(i) Draw and label completely a typical ECG waveform. [2 marks]
(ii) In standard ECG recording there are five electrodes connected to the patient:
right arm (RA), left arm (LA), left leg (LL), right leg (RL), and chest (C). Draw
the electrical connections for 12 standard leads ECG recording. [8 marks]
'(b) Refer to Figure Q3.
(i) The instrumentation amplifier depicted in Figure Q3 is similar to the one in
Figure Q1, except the addition of non-inverting amplifier and integrator circuit.
If this is a three electrodes ECG amplifier circuit, what would be the function of
the integrator circuit? Explain in detail how this circuit interacts with the signal
coming from the patient. [8 marks]
(ii) If the cut-off frequency of the integrator circuit is O.05Hz, what is the value of
Rx for C
x
= 1flF. [4 marks]
(iii) Using the value ofR
x
in Q3 (b)(ii), calculate the time required by the integrator
circuit to do the correction if the time required for this is 10 time-constant.
[3 marks]
7
SEP4123
Figure Q3
8
SEP4123
Q4.
(i) Define the systolic and diastolic blood pressure. Give one example how these
pressures are recorded. [4 marks]
(ii) Define heart rate, stroke volume and cardiac output. What is the cardiac output
of a patient if his heart is beating at a rate of 60 beats per minute and producing
a stroke volume of 40ml per beat? [6 marks]
(b)
(i) Draw a mercury column sphygmomanometer, the apparatus used to measure
blood pressure. In your drawing show how the cuff is wrapped around the
patient's upper arm at a point about midway between the elbow and shoulder.
The stethoscope is placed over an artery distal to the cuff.
Describe how you are going to measure systolic and diastolic blood pressure
using this apparatus.
Refer to Figure Q4 (a), the oscillations in cuff pressure can be detected by
electronic pressure sensor. lithe pressure sensor can be programmed to detect
the onset of systolic and diastolic pressure, draw the block diagram of an
electronic pressure measuring circuit that can be included in the blood pressure
apparatus. Draw the related waveforms at every stage of the block diagram.
Describe how you perform the calibration of the final output waveform so that
the reading displayed can be regarded as a true reading. [7 marks]
200
Mean
120
80
40
9
SEP4123
co '""
!
:t:
[

t::
:I
u
0
Oscillations in cuff pressure
Figure Q4 (a)
10
SEP4123
(ii) The simplified version of cardiac output equation produced by Edwards
Laboratories for cardiac output measurement using thermodilution method is:
co = (60)(1.08)(C
1
)(V
1
)(T
B
- T
1
)
IT'B dt
where:
CO is the cardiac output in liters per minute
60 is the conversion factor for seconds to minutes
1.08 is a composite of other constants, dimensionless
C
t
is a dimensionless correction factor for the injectate temperature rise in
the catheter and is published by catheter manufacturer specific to each
different type
Vr is the injectate volume, in liters
T
B
is the preinjection temperature of the blood in degrees Celsius
T
r
is the preinjection temperature of the injectate in degrees Celsius (Note:
either iced or room temperature injectate may be used)
T'B is the postinjection temperature of the blood at the measurement site
Refer to the diagram in Figure Q4 (b) and also with the aid of properly drawn
thermodilution curve ofT'B versus time t, describe how the cardiac output
computer performs the cardiac output measurement. [8 marks]
11
SEP4123
Balance
---0
lvre
Isolator
Integrator
f
f------O
Recorder
output
r----...., vo =
>-----.,.-1 Analog kv;{1vy
divider
"Start"
...:c....
Control
logic and
timing
TB-T
J
and
constants
Digital
panel
meter
Overrance
indicator
Figure Q4 (b)
12
SEP4123
Q5.
(i) State Boyle's law. [2 marks]
(ii) State Charles' law. [2 marks]
(iii) State Dalton's law. [2 marks]
(iv) Refer to Figure Q5 (a), describe how the exchange of 02 and CO
2
occur
between capillary and the body cell. [4 marks]
Capillary
Blood plasma
Red blood
cell
Interstitial
space
Figure Q5 (a)
13
SEP4123
(b)
(i) Figure Q5 (b) shows various lung volumes and capacities. Describe all these
volumes and capacities with your own words. [8 marks]
5000
IRV
2000
1V
1000
6000 !------r----.,_---------......---r-----r-
Ie
VC
TLC
RV
OL...----__~ ____.L. _ _ . . l . ~ __L. _
Time
Figure Q5 (b)
14
SEP4123
(ii) Figure Q5 (c) is a flow rate transducer. This transducer has 50mm diameter
mesh with grid density of 158 wires per centimeter. This mesh offers a pressure
difference of approximately O.009cm H20 per IOL/min gas flow. Describe how
this transducer can be calibrated to measure air flow rate (volume per unit of
time) and also how, by slight modification in measurement it can be used to
measure lung volumes. [7 marks]
V
o
Differential
electrical
pressure
1----.. signal
transducer
output
I
I Mesh
Airflow ----
: obstruction
I
!
Figure Q5 (c)
15
SEP4123
Q6.
(i) What is EEG?
[2 marks]
(li) Since the EEG amplitude is in f..lV range, suggest methods of amplification
to be employed and also noise reduction to be implemented in the amplifier
design. [6 marks]
(iii) Normally EEG signal is classified into five frequency bands i.e. Delta (0.5 to
4Hz), Theta (4 to 8Hz), Alpha (8 to 13 Hz), Beta (13 to 22Hz) and Gamma (22
to 30 Hz and higher). What is the basis of this classification? [2 marks]
(b) (i) Let say the instrumentation amplifier in Figure Q6 (a) is used to amplify the
EEG signal, describe how you are going to increase the gain of the amplifier
and how you are going to reduce the electrical noise in the circuit. Discuss.
[7 marks]
(li) Figure Q6 (b) is depicting the electrode and amplifier connection to a patient.
Classify the three modes of connection for diagram (a), (b) and (c) in
Figure Q6 (b). What are the advantages of each type of connection in terms of
their signal amplitude and noise? Discuss. [8 marks]
16
SEP4123
Figure Q6 (a)
17
SEP4123
Chart Paper Movement
30mmls
Only 5 Channels
of a Multichannel
Recording System
Are Shown.
Common Reference
(a)
Common Reference
Summing Resistors ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
(b)
Only 5 Channels
of a Multichannel
Recording System
Are Shown.
(c)
Only 4 Channels
of a Multichannel
Recording System
Are Shown.
Figure Q6 (b)
I CONFIDENTIAL I
SESSION 2008/2009
COURSE CODE SEP4253
COURSE MEDICAL TOMOGRAPHY
LECTURER DR. EKO SUPRIYANTO
PROGRAMME SEP
SECTION 01
TIME 2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
DATE 20 APRIL 2009
INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATE ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY
COVER
- 2
SEP 4253
1. The physical half-life of 113mIn is 1.7 hours. A sample of 113m In has a mass of2 Ilg.
a. How many 113m In atoms are present in the sample?
(1 mark)
b. How many 113m In atoms remain after 4 hours have elapsed?
(1 mark)
c. What is the activity of the sample when t == 4 hours?
(l mark)
d. Specific activity is defined as the activity per unit mass of a radioactive sample.
What is the specific activity of the 113m In sample after 4 hours?
(1 mark)
e. Enough 113m In must be obtained at 4 p.m. Thursday to provide 300 kBq at 1 p.m.
Friday. How much l13m In should be obtained?
(1 mark)
2. Calculate the energy (eV) of:
a. a y-ray with a wavelength of I pm
(1.5 marks)
b. a radio wave with a frequency of 100 MHz (FM broadcast band).
(1.5 marks)
3. An x-ray tube emits 10
12
photons per second in a highly collimated beam that strikes a
O.l-mm-thick radiographic screen. The beam is assumed to consist entirely of 40 keY
photons. The attenuation coefficient of the screen is 23 m-
I
, and the mass energy
absorption coefficient of the screen is 5 m-
I
for 40 KeV photons.
a. Find the total energy in KeV absorbed by the screen during a 0.5 sec exposure.
(2 marks)
b. Calculate the total number of electrons bombarding the target of an x-ray tube
operated at 200 rnA for 0.1 sec.
(2 marks)
c. Draw the main components of a modern x-ray tube.
(4 marks)
- 3
SEP 4253
4. If a dose of 0.05 Gy (5 centigray [cGy]) is delivered uniformly to the uterus during a
diagnostic x-ray examination, how much energy is absorbed by each gram of the
uterus?
(3 marks)
5. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of high voltage radiography?
(3 marks)
6. A 37-Bq sample of 14C02 is contained within a current-type ionization chamber. The
ionization current is converted to alternating current and is measured by the voltage
drop method with a precision resistance of 10
12
n. Assuming that all the energy of the
from 14C is deposited in the gas and that the ac signal is not amplified, what
voltage is developed across the precision resistance?
(3 marks)
7. Explain how image noise and patient dose in CT scanning are influenced by the signal
to noise ratio, the size of each resolution element and the slice thickness.
(3 marks)
8. A stenosis produces a high speed jet in vessel. The maximum velocity of red blood
cells (RBCs) in the stenosis is 80 cm/s. The travel time required for sound waves in
soft tissue is 13 Ilsec/cm of the depth.
a. Find the minimum PRF that must be used to avoid aliasing for pulsed Doppler at
7.5 MHz. Assume that the angle of sonation is adegrees.
(2 marks)
b. Find the field of view (FOY) if the PRF calculated in 8.a. is used for imaging.
(2 marks)
c. Sketch the block diagram of pulsed Doppler ultrasound machine and draw the
signals from every block.
(4 marks)
9. In magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), the static magnetic field is supplied by the
main system (static) magnet. This magnetic field defines the axis about which protons
precess.
a. Find the energy di fference between low and high energy states of protons in a 1
tesla magnetic field.
(2 marks)
4
SEP 4253
b. Sketch the block diagram ofMRI system and draw the electric signals from its
components.
(4 marks)
c. Find the maximum temperature rise produced during an MRI session in which a
SAR 00 W/kg is applied for 5 minutes. The typical value of heat capacity for
human soft tissue is 3470 J/(Kg_C).
(3 marks)
10. A diagnostic x-ray generator has a busy work load of 1000 mA-min/wk at 100 kVp.
The tube is positioned 4.5 m from a wall between the radiation room and a
radiologist's office. The wall contains 3 cm of ordinary concrete. For a use factor of
0.5, what is the thickness oflead that must be added to the wall? (REFER TO
FIGURE 1 and TABLE 1)
(5 marks)
[Table I
IThkkJt(... of It."do if)- ) cOt, ....... -n hit "?' "f" 11 1:: :)(a!,'Ch:-tl htD" \'W".fjl;1.'> of OldmAn Connef... it . t .....
tIro.ld Il.., lk"m,
n
., ,\
'.
1 ..
"
<
L'
, .
, ,

. ,
.. t': :
"
\ .:0;,.1
2
, li"! '1 't IF
l. 1
., "
,
t
., ir.:
ill;
ii.' J '\t
- 5
SEP 4253
U)
0.5
0.2
0.1
CD
c::
o
l
t)

z
o

:;') C,OOt
Z
14:
I
....
04'
Figure 1
I CONFIDENTIAL I
!lIM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEP 4263
BIOMEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING
DR. NASRUL HUMAIMI BIN MAHMOOD
SEP
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
3 MAY 2009
ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS IN PART A AND PART B.
ANSWER TWO (2) QUESTIONS IN PART C.
THIS IS CLOSE BOOK EXAM, HOWEVER STUDENTS ARE ALLOWED TO BRING
DOUBLE-SIDED NOTE IN ONE A4 SIZE PAPER ONLY.
COVER
2
SEP 4263
PART A (25 MARKS)
Instruction Answer ALL questions.
1. What is the smallest information element of a picture? (l mark)
2. What is medical imaging? (2 marks)
3. The two transmission windows for electromagnetic energy through the
human body are in which regions of the spectrum? (2 marks)
4. Refer to Figure Al of the magnetic resonance image and corresponding
histogram when answering the following question.
C/)
Q,1
.25
c.
Image Histogram
A ~
o 2B8 576 865 1153
Data Value
Figure At
What features in the image correspond to the peaks at 0-60, 720-865,
and 865-1000 most likely represent?
(3 marksJ
5. Give!!!l. advantage and disadvantage of using Positron Emission
Tomography (PET) in medical imaging. (3 marks)
3
SEP 4263
6. Given a single 3x3 window of unfiltered values in Figure A2 (a).
5 3 6
2 1 9
8 4 7
* * *
*
X
*
* * *
(a)
Figure A2
(b)
What is the value of mean and median filtered of X in Figure A2(b)? (3 marks)
7. Figure A3 shows the three standard orientations of slice (or tomographic)
images. Name the type of orientation for (a), (b) and (c). (3 marks)
(a) (b) (c)
Figure A3
8. Figure A4 shows the three imaging techniques that produced the results in (a), (b),
and (c). Name the appropriate imaging technique for each of them. (3 marks)
(a) (b)
Figure A4
(c)
4
SEP 4263
9. Among the 3 proposed histograms, which is the one corresponding
to the shown image in Figure A5? Justify your answer shortly. (3 marks)
Histogram 1 Histogram 2 Histogram 3
Figure AS
10. Describe basic equation and draw figure of perspective camera model. (2 marks)
5
SEP 4263
PARTB
Instruction Answer the QUESTION 1.
QUESTION 1 (25 MARKS)
The general idea of image registration is to put two images of the same thing into spatial
alignment or figure out how to "superimpose" them.
a) There are two typical goals of image registration; comparative analysis and composite
analysis. Describe both analyses.
(7 marks)
b) Figure Bl is two computed tomography (CT) chest scans showing a substantial
change in a tumor over time. Determine 3 types of variations between 2 images in
Figure Bl.
(6 marks)
Figure B1
c) As a biomedical engineer, you have been asked to align 2 chest x-ray images taken of
the same patient at different times. Describe a standard approach might you used in
order to complete the task given.
(12 marks)
6
SEP 4263
PARTe
Instruction Answer ONLY TWO out of three questions (QUESTION 1 to
QUESTION 3).
In the physic of Magnetic Resonance, to activate macroscopic magnetism from an object, it is
necessary to line up the spin vectors. This is accomplished by exposing the object to a strong
external magnetic field. For a spin - liz system, the Boltzman relationship is as follows:
N _ _t =exp(/}..EJ
N,j, kT,
where Nt is the pointing-up spins, N,j, is the number of pointing-down spins, !ill is the
energy difference between the two-states, T
s
is the absolute temperature of the spin system,
and k is the Boltzman constant. In practice, it is assumed that !ill T
s
.
Using the above relationship show that the magnitude of the bulk magnetization along the
positive direction of the z-axis at equilibrium is
where nis the Planck's constant divided by 2n, ris the gyromagnetic constant, B
o
is the
strength of the applied magnetic field in the positive z-direction, and N
s
is the total number of
spins. Please give all necessary details and explain your assumptions in your derivation.
(25 marh)
8
SEP 4263
The three basic imaging modalities in nuclear medicine are planar imaging, Single Photon
Emission Computed Tomography (SPECT) and Positron Emission Tomography (PET). In
planar imaging, the primary mechanism for creating images in planar scintigraphy is to detect
and estimate the position of individual scintillation events on the face of an Anger camera.
The other two imaging methods (SPECT and PET) require computed tomography image
reconstruction methods.
a) Describe the basic principles of SPECT and PET in tenus of how does its work in
order to produces images of slices within the body. What factors limit the image
quality in SPECT and PET?
(15 marks)
b) Consider an Anger camera with 9 square photomultiplier tubes arranged in a 3x 3
array as shown in Figure C1. Each tube is numbered, and the recorded pulse heights
of the tubes are: 5, 10, 15, 10,40,30,0,5, 10, in the order of the tube numbers.
y
1 2 3
I
4 5 6
7 8 9
'---------
x
Figure Cl
Calculate the value of the Z-pulse and detenuine the position of the event.
(10 marks)
"END OF QUESTIONS SHEET"
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
!lIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SET 3573
MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
DR. NOR HISHAM BIN KHAMIS
SET
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
23 APRIL 2009
COVER
SET 3573
- 2
1. a. Why conventional open wirelines are unsuitable for microwave transmission?
(2 marks)
b. An air-filled coaxial transmission line has outer and inner conductor radius
equal to 6 cm and 3 cm, respectively. Calculate the values of
1. inductance per unit length (2 marks)
ii. capacitance per unit length, and (2 marks)
iii. characteristic impedance of the line. (3 marks)
c. The primary constants for a coaxial cable at 1 GHz are L == 250 nH/m, C = 95
pF/m, R == 0.006 Q/m, and G = O. Determine
i. if the line can be considered a low-loss transmission line (3 marks)
11. the attenuation coefficient a; (2 marks)
111. the phase constant p, (2 marks)
iv. the phase velocity up, (2 marks)
v. relative permittivity t;-, and (2 marks)
VI. power loss for a length of 10m, when the input power is 500 W.
(2 marks)
vii. discuss the changes to other constants if the relative permittivity of the
cable is increased. (3 marks)
SET 3573
- 3
2. a. What are scattering parameters? (2 marks)
b. Describe the procedure to determine the scattering parameters of a two-port
network. (6 marks)
C. 1. Calculate the scattering parameters of the two three-port networks
illustrated in Figure Q2. The three-port network consist combinations
of microstrip lines, of characteristic impedance Zo and length 'A., and
lumped resistor of specified magnitude. Normalize the scattering
parameters to ZOo Ignore fringing field effects at the junctions.
(12 marks)
11. Compare the results ofthe networks. (5 marks)
R
R=ZJ3
(i)
(ii)
Figure Q2
SET 3573
- 4
3. a. Sketch the electric and magnetic field patterns for
1. a coaxial line, (3 marks)
ii. a balanced strip transmission line, and (3 marks)
iii. a microstrip transmission line. (3 marks)
b. Give three (3) reasons why standing waves are detrimental to the overall
operation of a microwave system. (6 marks)
c. The VSWR for a standing wave pattern set up by an unknown load is 2.0 with
a voltage minimum at 102.5 nun. When the load is replaced by a short circuit,
there are voltage minima at 25.1 and 123.3 mm, the smaller value being closer
to the generator.
i. What is the normalized load impedance referred to the attached short-
circuit plane? (5 marks)
11. If the previous readings had been obtained when the plane of the
replacement short circuit was 5.0 nun in front of the actual load plane,
what would be the normalized load impedance at the load plane.
(5 marks)
SET 3573
5
4. a. Figure Q4 shows a microwave device.
1. Name the device and describe how does the device works. (5 marks)
11. What is this device used for? (3 marks)
FigureQ4
b. A rectangular waveguide of length 30.48 ern is air-filled with dimensions of
2.28 cm x 1.01 em is operated at 9.2 GHz using the dominant mode. Find
the cut-off frequency, (2 marks)
ii. guide wavelength, (2 marks)
111. phase velocity, (3 marks)
IV. characteristic impedance, and (3 marks)
v. total loss in the waveguide. (4 marks)
vi. What will happen if the waveguide is filled with a substrate of higher
dielectric permittivity? (3 marks)
, CONFIDENTIAL I
!lIM
SESSION 2008/2009
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SET 3583
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
DR. SHARIFAH KAMILAH BT SYED YUSOF
SET
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
4 MAY 2009
SECTION B - ANSWER TWO (2) QUESTIONS.
THIS IS OPEN A4 PAPER EXAM.
COVER
- 2
SET 3583
2008/09 sem. 2
SECTION A: Answer ALL questions.
Q.l (a) If a system's main performance criterion is bit-error probability, which of the
following two modulation scheme would be selected for transmission over an
AWGN channel?
coherent 8-ary orthogonal FSK with E
b
=8 dB
No
coherent 8-ary orthogonal PSK with =13 dB
No
(Assume that a Gray code is used for the MPSK symbol-to-bit assignment,
and show computations.) (18 marks)
(b) You need to make modulation choice for a real-time communications system
operating over an AWGN channel. The required data rate and bit error
probability are 12 kbitsls and 10-
5
You have a choice of either M-ary QAM or
non-coherent orthogonal M-ary FSK for a modulation scheme. Given the
available bandwidth is 2.4 kHz and the available EblN is 16 dB. By referring
to Figure 1, which M-ary system would you choose and why? (7 marks)
Ill'V (l")it.ll"l/Hz)
16
Region for
V'lIhich R:> C
8
4
Shannon
limit

..
Region tor
vvhich U C
0'
M = 64
.
.H 16
....
(3) M;/;=8_- ..1':::", .... -CD
- :11 = 4 jJU3
..... , Direction of
in""'lpr-ovinrl PH
;<'--- .. 2'-0+: 30 Ei.ll"" (dB!
Note; scale' 1
uhungo
.H=
:?
.II =
.
8
Legend
Collar-ant MPSK, = 10"
S
Noncol-,erent orthogol'"lal MFSK, F'" 1 a .
Coheren.t O.AM, PI; =, 10 ;J
Figure l: Bandwidth efficiency plane
, /4
- 3
SET 3583
2008/09 sem. 2
Q.2 (a) Explain briefly the difference between multi-user DS/CDMA system and
multi-user FH/CDMA system. (5 marks)
(b) Consider a FH/MFSK system. Let the pseudonoise (PN) generator be defined
by a 20-stage linear feedback shift register with a maximal length sequence.
Each state of the register dictates the new center frequency within the hopping
band. The minimum step size between centre frequencies ( hop to hop) is 200
Hz. The register clock rate is 2 kHz. Assume that 8-ary 8-ary FSK modulation
is used and the data rate is 1.2 kbits/s.
I. What is the hopping bandwidth? (4 marks)
ii. What is the chip rate? (4 marks)
Ill. How many chips are there in each data symbol? (7 marks)
iv. What is the processing gain in dB? (5 marks)
- 4
SET 3583
2008/09 sem. 2
SECTION B: Answer TWO questions only.
Q.3 (a) Consider that a 100 kbits/s data stream is to be transmitted on a voice grade
telephone circuit with a bandwidth of 3 kHz.
i. Is it possible to approach error-free transmission with an SNR of 10
dB? Justify your answer. If it is not possible suggest system
modifications that might be made. (10 marks)
(b) Consider the following binary sequence
11101001100010110100 ...
i. Use the Lempel-Ziv algorithm to encode this sequence. Assume that
the binary symbols 0 and 1 are already in the codebook. (10 marks)
ii. What is the compression ratio? (2 marks)
iii. Can a compression be achieved from (ii)? Explain your judgement?
(3 marks)
QA Consider a (6,3) code whose generator matrix is
o 0
101
o 1IJ
G 1 0
o 1 1 1 0
(a) Find all the codewords of the code. (10 marks)
(b) What is the error-correcting capability ofthe code? (2 marks)
(c) What is the error-detecting capability of the code? (2 marks)
(d) Find H, the parity-check matrix of the code. (4 marks)
(e) How many 2-bit error pattern can this code correct? Lists out the possible
error patterns. (2 marks)
(f) Compute the syndrome for the received vector 1 I I 0 0 1. Is this a valid
vector? If not, what was the most probable sent message? (5 marks)
- 5
SET 3583
2008/09 sem. 2
Q5. (a)
An analog signal is peM formatted and transmitted using binary waveforms
over a bandlimited channel of 100 kHz. Assume that 32 quantization levels
are used and the signal is transmitted using 8-ary PAM waveforms. The
overall equivalent transfer function is of raised cosine type with roll-off r=0.6.
1. Find the maximum bit rate that can be used by this system without
introducing lSI. (7 marks)
ii. Find the maximum bandwidth of the original analog signal that be
accommodated with these parameter. (7 marks)
(b) Proof in detail that for the coefficients for MMSE equalizer, c can be
formulated as C=Ryd'IRyy where Ryy is the autocorrelation of the received signal
to the equalizer and Ryd is the cross-correlation of the received signal and the
desired output from the equalizer. (6 marks)
(c) Spread spectrum (SS) techniques can provide impressive error-performance
benefits against interfering signals. One might therefore think that such SS
techniques might provide similar benefits against AWGN. Explain why this is
TABLE 3-1 TABLE OF
x .O(x)
0 5.000000e-01
0.1 4.601722e-01
0.2 4.207403e-01
0.3 3.S20886e-Ol
0.4 3.4457 83e-O 1
,..,
~ e - 0 1
not possible.
O(x) VALUES
x
2.4
2.5
2..6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Q(x)
8.197534e-03
6.209665e-03
4.6611Sge-03
3.466973e-03
2.555131e-03
1.865S12e-03
Re-03
X
4.S
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
(5 marks)
O(x)
7.933274e-07
4.791830e-07
2.866516e-07
1.69826Se-07
9.964437e-06
5.790128e-OS
3.332043e-OS
I CONFIDENTIAL \
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SET 4523
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
DR. SEVIA MAHDALIZA BT IDRUS
SET
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
28 APRIL 2009
COVER
-2
SET 4523
Q1. (25 MARKS)
(a) Let say, you are given a step index fiber and a graded index fiber of 10m each.
You are asked to determine that both of the fibers should only support single mode
transmission. How do you compare and comment on the size of each fiber. State
any assumption(s) made. (8 marks)
(b) A 40/125;.on graded index (GRIN) fiber has a core axis refractive index of 1.5 and
a relative refractive index difference of 1.3 %. It was found that the fiber supports
approximately 94 guided modes for a light emitting diode (LED) with an emission
wavelength of 1550 nm.
i. Estimate the characteristic index profile, a for this fiber. (7 marks)
ii. Determine the cut-off value of the normalized frequency to support single-
mode transmission in the fiber. (3 marks)
(c) The fiber in Q 1(b) that support only single mode transmission is used to support a
100 km repeater less optical link for high speed data communications. If the
optical power coupled into the fiber is -2 dBm, estimate the power at the output
end ofthe fiber. (7 marks)
-3
SET 4523
Q2. (25 MARKS)
(a) As a design engineer, you have been assigned to analyze a proposed optical
link as illustrated in Figure Q2. However the task is limited by the information
given below.
An optical source in the transmitter module which has an rms spectral
width of nm.
The optical fiber which is a step index fiber with a core refractive index
1.528 and the relative refractive index difference of 0.9%.
Receiver
Transmitter
Channel: Silica optical fiber
Length: 11 0 Ian
Figure Q2
By making reasonable assumption(s), estimate the value of if the
maximum achievable bit rate ofthe link is 100 kbits/s. (12 marks)
(b) Table Q2 is the electro-optical characteristics extracted from of a commercial
light source data sheet.
Table Q2
Electro-Optical Characteristics rv'lili. Typ.
Center wavelef1gth lim 1265 BOO 1330
Spectral width nm 70
Spectrum vs. temperaturecoefficient nm,.oC 0.75
Spectral lNidth vs. temperature coefficient nmiOC 0.3
Optical time ns 4.0
Forward current mA ISO
Output pov>'er ulN
Into 50-micron core, multimode fib<?r at 150 rnA
Option 1 40
Option 2 80
Into 9-rnicron core, sfnglemode fiber <'It 150 mA.
Option 1 4
Option 2 8
Base on the given data,
(i) Calculate the overall power conversion efficiency (multimode fiber
option 2) if the corresponding forward voltage across the diode is 1.4
volt for a forward current of 150 mA. (6 marks)
(ii) Deliver your observation on the differences of the output optical power
for option I using a multimode fiber and a single mode fiber. (7 marks)
-4
SET 4523
Q3. (25 MARKS)
(a) A 500km optical link operated at minimal attenuation wavelength is implemented
with five splices each having a loss of 0.1 dB. The laser diode used couples an
optical power of X dBm into a pigtail fiber connected to it. The receiver records
an optical power of -30 dBm. Determine the optical power coupled into the fiber.
You are required to describe all assumptions made. (5 marks)
(b) An optical fiber link connects HLDN and KWSP separated 2-km apart. The
components used in the link are given in table below.
i. Estimate the maximum bandwidth achievable assuming a step index
profile and multimode graded index fiber. (4 marks)
ii. Compare the bandwidth achievable between a multimode step index fiber
and a. (4 marks)
iii. By making reasonable assumption(s) estimate the power arriving at the
receiver for both fiber profile. (4 marks)
Table Q3
Light source Fiber
Wavelength: 1320 nm Axial refractive index: 1.51
Spectral width: 20 nm Numerical aperture: 0.4
Output power: -2 dBm Size: 62.5/125 )lffi
(c) Compare the various properties of the light emitted from a light emitting diode
and an injection laser diode. Hence, further explain why injection laser diode
produces small spectral width and the benefit of it to broadband communication.
(8 marks)
-5
SET 4523
Q4. (25 MARKS)
(a) By referring to the selected photodetectors characteristic listed in Table Q4,
Table Q4
Photodiodes PIN APD
/Technology Ge InGaAs Ge InGaAs
Operating 1.. hAm) 0.8-1.9 1.0-1.7 0.8-1.9 1.0-1.7
Gain 1 1 50-200 10:'40
Dark Current (nA) 50-500 1-20 50-500 1-5
Re$ponsil.'ity(A/W) OS-0.7 0.6"0:9 3-30 5-20
Response Time (ns) 0.1-1 0.05-0.5 0.5-1 0.1-0.5
BW(GHz) 0:5-3 110 0.4-0.7 1-10
I. Estimate the operating wavelength of the InGaAs PIN photodiode if it has a quantum
efficiency of65% when photons of energy 1.5xlO-
19
J are incident upon it. (4 marks)
ii. Calculate the incident optical power required to obtain a photocurrent of . 5 ~ when
the Ge PIN photodiode is operating as described above. (4 marks)
iii. When the incident optical power is 0.5 ~ W , the output current from the InGaAs APD
(after avalanche gain) is 15 ~ A . Determine the multiplication factor of the APD under
its maximum responsivity operating at a wavelength of 1.55J.lm. (5 marks)
(b) A high input impedance amplifier which is employed in an optical fiber receiver has an
effective input resistance of 4 MQ which is matched to a detector bias resistor of the
same value; determine;
i. The maximum BW that may obtained without equalization if the total capacitance C
T
is 6 pF. (4 marks)
ii. The mean square thermal noise current per unit bandwidth generated by this high
input impedance amplifier configuration when it is operating at a temperature of
300K. (4 marks)
iii. Compare the maximum BW obtained when the high input impedance amplifier is
replaced by a transimpedance amplifier with a 100kQ feedback resistor and an open
loop gain of 400. (4 marks)
-6
SET 4523
Q5 (25 MARKS)
(a) Provide the source of attenuation of a silica optical fiber with regard to the
wavelength used. (7 marks)
(b) You are assigned to analyze the digital optical system illustrated in Figure Q5 that
was implemented to connect data management system of the Jusco Bukit Indah
and Jusco Tebrau City which placed 25km apart. A graded index fiber having an
axial refractive index of 1.48 and a cladding with refractive index 1.46 was used
as the channel. A pig-tailed high power laser diode was used as the light source.
The optical power at the end of the pigtail is 10 dBm at 1550 nm having a spectral
width of 2 nm. The receiver utilises a PIN photodiode having a sensitivity of -50
dBm and tenninated with an FCIPC connector.
i. Sketch the system block diagram with standard label. (5 marks)
ii. Estimate the optical power received by the PIN photodiode assuming
that an optical splice wiIl impose an attenuation of 0.2 dB on the link
and an SC connection has a maximum loss of 1 dB. (5 marks)
iii. Calculate the maximum bit rate achievable by the optical channel.
(5 marks)
IV. What is your suggestion to Jusco higher management in order to
improve the system for future used? (3 marks)
Laser diode
Graded index fiber: n)=1.48, n2=1.46 PIN photodiode
0.....--------------,/,/--------3
SC connector
Splice Amplifier an
decoder circui
-
Figure Q5
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SET 4533
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
PROF. DR. THAREK BIN ABD RAHMAN
SEE I SET
01/02
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
20 APRIL 2009
COVER
2
SET 4533
Q 1. (a) Describe briefly on the following mobile communication system
(i) Paging System
(5 Marks)
(ii) Cordless Telephone System
(5 Marks)
(b) Describe the advantages of Wireless Networking?
(8 Marks)
(c) Consider a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) operating at 2.4GHz with 100m
coverage from Access Point (AP) having the effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of
18dBm. If the free space condition exist between the AP and the user which is located at
100m away calculate the carrier to noise ratio at the user terminal having antenna gain of
2 dB. The noise level of the user terminal is -1 OOdBm.
(7 Marks)
Q2. (a) Describe briefly the following propagation mechanism:
(i) Reflection
(4 Marks)
(ii) Diffraction
(4 Marks)
(iii) Scattering
(4 Marks)
(b) A GSM 900 cellular radio system has radio base station (RES) antenna gain of 10 dB
at height of 200 m above the ground and mobile station (MS) antenna gain of 2dB and 3
m above the ground. The power transmitted from RES is 10 Wand the noise figure of
MS is 2 dB. The noise level of MS is -100 dBm. The distance between RES and MS is
10lan.
(i) By using Okumura model, calculate the received power in watt at MS in an
open area.
(6 Marks)
(iii) If Rayleigh fading occur at MS calculate transmitted power at RES if the
percentage of the receiving signal below noise level is 2% of the time iffree
space condition exist between RES and MS.
(7 Marks)
3
SET 4533
Q3. (a) Describe the differences between conventional mobile radio system and cellular radio
system.
(4 Marks)
(b) Describe two types ofcells ( micro and macro cell) used in cellular radio systems.
(4 Marks)
(c) If total bandwidth of 10 MHz is allocated to GSM 900 cellular radio system calculate
the total number of channels available in a cell. Assume seven cells per cluster being
used.
(4 Marks)
(d) A city has an area of 7000 square km having cellular radio system using seven cells
per cluster. Each cell is 10 square km and the service provider is allocated with 10.5
MHz of bandwidth of spectrum and a channel bandwidth of 25 KHz. By assuming a
Grade of Service (GOS) of2% for Erlang B System and traffic per user is 0.03 Erlang
and seven cells per cluster, calculate:
(i) Number of cell in the city
(2 Marks)
(ii) Number of channel per cell
(2 Marks)
(iii) Traffic intensity of a cell
(3 Marks)
(iv) Number of users in each cell that can be supported
(3 Marks)
(v)
Total number of user in the city that can be supported
(3 Marks)
4
SET 4533
Q4. (a) What are the advantages of using satellite?
(5 Marks)
(b) What are the advantages and disadvantages of using Geostationary Satellite?
(5 Marks)
(c) A C Band Satellite has the following specification for the down link:
Transmitted Power 100 dBW
Satellite Antenna Gain 20 dB
Earth Antenna Diameter 3 m
Earth Station Antenna Efficiency 60 %
Earth Station System Noise Temperature 100 K
(i) Calculate carrier to noise (ClNo) ratio at the Earth Station
(7 Marks)
(ii) Calculate the G/T for the Earth Station receiver
(5 Marks)
(iii) Describe two factors that lead to signal degradation on satellite link.
(4 Marks)
Q5. (a) Explain why higher frequency is used for uplink and lower frequency for downlink
in satellite communication.
(5 Marks)
(b) A satellite is in a circular orbit around the earth. The altitude of satellite's orbit
above the surface of earth is 250km. What is the orbital period of the satellite in the
orbit?
(7 Marks)
(c) In a satellite link, the propagation loss is 200dB. The receiver G/T is lldBIk and
carrier to noise ratio (ClNo) is 50dB. Calculate of the satellite effective isotropic
radiated power.
(7 Marks)
5
SET 4533
(d) Describe briefly the concept of mobile satellite system referring to Iridium system.
(6 Marks)
0
.JI
URIAN AREA
/

--;;;.
7
-7
h.=
3m
Loo'"
60
t....
ill'"
J

10'" l.o'"
./

I."'"
i....
1.0" ",,17'
l..--'"
"""'" ,
.II
100
..-
--
-
V !/
.....,..
.... l/
80
10"" ./ /
--
ioo"""" ...

6:
l......- I...-
-

IfiI""
/
---
I---"" V
I""'"
v
0
.I
50
--
I--" -v V
40
L-o
"""
Lo' ./
-
./ ".
-

3:
Ju
,....
.-. i-"
I"'" --:.,7 [7'
""" .j,.o ......
!ll".
oJ'
.,.
20
--""'"'
-"
.,
10
,... L"...ol"'"
--"
./

J
,.
5
20 -
1".000
loo"""

2 -
1.0-
""".
I
10
4
100
80
S
"D
60
-
-"0
..
..
so
-
I
c
40
z
o
30
-
ti
-
20 .!

IIJ -
10 ..
.....
S
tt
z
c 2
ffi
2:
o
U;
c(
ca
100 200300 500100 1000 2OOO!OOO
FREQUENCY f( MHz)
Fig .1 Medium Attenuation
6
SET 4533
5
o
35
;;;
;
;;
30
;
;
"
,#
I
2S
j
20
f
....
I
15
;;
;;
;
10
100 200 300 500 700 1000 2000 3000
FI'eqwrIcy f (11Hz)
Fig.2 Correction Factor for Diffeent Types of Terrain
7
SET 4533
Rayleigh Paper
~ 99.9
iii')
~ 990
IS 96.0
< 90.0
~ 800
~
2 :>0.0
...J
<
~ 30.0'
II)
/:)20.0
w
II')
::1
j
-10 o
.20
10
Sr..;'NAL PC'WER NOI;(MAUSED TO THE MEDIAN (dB)
CU;: Of "tHE ~ e C E r v E D SIGNAL PO'Nf1< PLOTTED ,ON R.... Y'..E!GH PAPER
Fig. 3 Rayleigh Paper
8
SET 4533
Fig. 4 Earlang B Chart
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SET 4543
ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION
ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMAD KAMAL B L ~
ABDUL RAHIM
SET
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
24 APRIL 2009
COVER
- 2
SET 4543
ANSWER FOUR QUESTION
Ql (a) A RF front end radio receiver has the following specification. The frequency
received at the antenna is 900 MHz and the intermediate frequency (IF) of the
receiver is 100 MHz.
Subsystem Noise Figure GainILoss
RF Amplifiers 4 dB 20 dB
Mixer 8 dB 6 dB
IF Amplifier 15 dB 20 dB
(i) Draw the block diagram of the front end receiver (3 marks)
(ii) Calculate the local oscillator frequency and the image frequency
(4 marks)
(iii) If the input noise power from a feeding antenna is H = kTaB where T
a
=
15 K, k = 1.38 x 10.
23
JIK, find the output noise power in dBm. The
overall bandwidth of the receiver is 200 kHz.
(6 marks)
(b) Figure Q1 shows the characteristic of the amplifier and the third order distortion.
The 1 dB compression and the third order intercept points are shown in that
graph. From the graph:
(i) Determine the gain of the amplifier (3 marks)
(ii) 1 dB compression point (3 marks)
(iii) Third order intercept for the amplifier (3 marks)
(iv) Amplifier gain at 0 dEm input and the amount of amplifier loss
(3 marks)
,.,
- .J
SET 4543
Q2 (a) A specification of the bandpass filter to be used in a cellular receiver system is described
below:
Operating frequency - 1710 - 1785 MHz
Isolation at least 20 dB at 1805 MHz
Butterworth response
Impedance = 50 ohm
(i) Find the filter order
(4 marks)
(ii) Draw the circuit diagram of low pass filter prototype using T network
(3 marks)
(iii) Draw the circuit diagram of band pass filter using T network
(3 marks)
(iv) Find the values ofL and C for the band pass filter.
(10 marks)
(b) If the response of the filter has to be changed to Chebyshev response with 0.5 dB equal
response, find the new number of filter order? What can you conclude from this [llter
response compared to the Butterworth response?
(5 marks)
Q3 (a) Starting from the first principle of reflection coefficient (S I J ,S22) and transmission
coefficient (S21,SI2) show that for two port network with S-Parameter terminating with
impedance load ( ZL )and impedance source (Zs) , the en and rout can be written as:
(10 marks)
(b) A transistor has S parameters as folllows
SI I = 0.7/-70 , S21 = 5.5/85 , S12 = O . 2 / - 1 O ~ , S22 = 0.7/-45 .
(i) Investigate the stability of the transistor (2 marks)
- 4
SET 4543
(ii) Draw the stability circle for load and source of the transistor (10 marks)
(iii) Find the maximum gain under unilateral condition
(5 marks)
Q4 (a) A mixer is a three port devices that uses a nonlinear or time varying element to
achieve a frequency conversion. Draw the block diagram using RF diode as a mixer
for
(i) single ended mixer
(4 marks)
(ii) double balance mixer
(4 marks)
(iii) image reject mixer
(4 marks)
(b) A sinusoidal carrier signal VRF(t) = 0.01cos(6.283 x 106t ) is fed into a mixer to mix with a
signal from local oscillator VLO(t) = 0.01 cos(9.142 x 106t ). The mixer consists of a
second-order nonlinear device. The equation for the non linear device is
i(t) =1
0
+b{v
iIF
(t) +V
w
(t ))+ C{V
RF
(t)+ V
w
(t)Y +....
(i) Derive the output current of nonlinear device expression.
(7 marks)
(ii) List frequencies and amplitude signals at the output of the nonlinear device
(5 marks)
(iii) What is the intermediate frequency? (2 marks)
(iv) If the carrier signal is frequency modulated sketch (i) the RF and (ii) IF
wavefonn
(3 marks)
- 5
SET 4543
QS (a) (i) For either the one port negative resistance oscillator or the two port
oscillator, show that 1 L1in = 1 for steady state oscillation.
(6 marks)
(ii) A one port oscillator uses a negative resistance diode having
1
m
=1.25L40 , with Z = 50 ohm at it's desired operating frequency is 6 GHz.
Design a load matching network for a 50 ohm impedance
(6 marks)
(b) (i) Draw the circuit diagram of Hartley and Colpitts oscillator and explain the
difference between these two oscillators.
(6 marks)
(ii) Design a 50 MHz Colpitts oscillator using a transistor in common emitter
configuration with ~ = gm/Gj = 30, and a transistor input resistance of Rj = l/Gj
= 1200 ohm. Use an inductor with L
3
= O.lIlH with a Q of 100
(7 marks)
- 6
SET 4543
o
turaHon
+--+-IJ
1:;;;, dB compress..'on point
., 20 ..-.+---- -+,..... --+-----i
80
60 40 20 o
.,: 10
Figure Ql
-7
SET 4543
Transistor Equations
[ =S + S12
S
21[/,
In 11 l-S
22
[
/,
c - (S22 - M
ll
)'
L IS2l-ILf
C - (S1 \ - M n r
s - \S111
2

Filters Transformation
Low-pass High-pass Band-pass Band-stop
gk
R
gk
M
R 1

-gk , L OJ
o
OJcRgk T
i
We
OJogkR
T
gk

R

I1R J..L..
{))c
R
-c
OJcg
k
-8
SET 4543
Table 1 Element values of equal ripple Low pass filter prototype for O.s dB ripple
N gl g2 g3 g4 gs g6 g7 gg g9 glO
1 0.6986 1.0000
2 1.4029 0.7071 1.9841
3 1.5963 1.0967 1.5963 1.000
4 1.6703 1.1926 2.3661 0.8419 1.9841
5 1.7058 1.2296 2.5408 1.2296 1.7058 1.000
6 1.7254 1.2479 2.6064 1.3137 2.4758 0.8696 1.9841
7 1.7372 1.2583 2.6381 1.3444 2.6381 1.2583 1.7372 1.0000
8 1.7451 1.2647 2.6564 1.3590 2.6964 1.3389 2.5093 0.8796 1.9841
9 1.7501 1.2690 2.6678 1.3673 2.7239 13673 2.6678 1.2690 1.7054 1.0000
10 1.7543 1.2721 2.6754 1.3725 2.7392 1.3806 2.7231 1.3485 2.5239 0.8842
Table 2 Element values of Maximally flat Low pass filter prototype
N gt g2 g3 g4 gs g6 g7 gs g9 glO
1 2.000 1.0000
2 1.4142 1.4142 1.0000
3 1.0000 2.0000 J .0000 1.0000
4 0.7654 1.8478 1.8478 0.7654 1.0000
5 0.6180 1.6180 2.0000 1.6180 0.6180 1.0000
6 0.5176 1.4142 1.9318 1.9318 1.4142 0.5176 1.0000
7 0.4450 J .2470 1.8019 2.0000 1.8019 1.2470 0.4450 1.0000
8 0.3902 1.1111 1.6629 1.9615 1.9615 1.6629 1.1111 0.3902 1.0000
9 0.3473 1.0000 1.5321 1.8794 2.0000 1.8794 1.5321 1.0000 0.3473 1.0000
10 0.3129 0.9080 1.4142 1.7820 1.9754 1.9754 1.7820 1.4142 0.9080 0.3129
- 9
SET 4543
2 n 1 n 5 0 i I) 10.0
Figure 1 Attenuation versus normalized frequency for equal ripple filter prototypes
0.5 dB
50 t - - - ~ _ ...._ .._-_....._....... ......., .....
:
~
::i
~ ~ O t - - - ~ . ---_.__.-.-.....
:(
Figure 2 Attenuation versus normalized frequency for maximally flat filter
- 10
SET 4543
IIAMI: TIn.E owe. NO
IMPEDANCE OR ADMITTANCE COORDINATES
i---::......,...---.----
; to__o 't"fIU,TO" -.......
RLOi.Ai....._ ... SCALC
.._m... ....._._. ._')" .. 1! , 0 ......... ............,.............. a e II ........

,
! ! ,,
...........-- 1"l;.l."IlCi 9 S i i

e t l!: $ iJ a !
. .
..
0

(: c c
., :; ;,
0
.
0
\ CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SET 4593
ACOUSTICS ENGINEERING
ASSOC. PROF. DR. MOHAMED NGASRI BIN
DIMON
SEE/SET
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
21 APRIL 2009
SECTION B - ANSWER TWO (2) QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
2
SET 4593
SECTION A
1. (a) Using appropriate figure, discuss the propagation of sound waves due to wind
velocity effect.
(4 marks)
(b) Sound wave with the frequency of 500 Hz impinges on a wall surfaces with
aperture radius, r ::: 0.01 meter. Using appropriate figure, discuss the effect of
sound wave impinge on that wall.
(4 marks)
(c) Derive mathematically the Sound Pressure Level (SPL) for a point source.
(4 marks)
(d) Using appropriate figure, discuss two (2) characteristics of dipole sound source.
(4 marks)
(e) Discuss briefly the followings
(i) STI 0.5
(ii) RT60 1.5 second for empty. class room.
(4 marks)
2. (a) A monopole sound source produces SPL 80dB at radius, r ::: I meter. This
monopole sound source is later positioned at the edge of floor and wall. Based
on above
(i) Calculate new SPL at radius r ::: 1 meter
(4 marks)
(ii) Calculate Sound Intensity (I) and Sound Power (W) at radius r ::: 1
meter.
(4 marks)
(b) At X ::: 0 meter and Y ::: 0 meter, there is a sound source A produce 8 Wart
power. At X ::: 0 meter and Y ::: 6 meter height, there is sound source B produce
6 Wart power. At X ::: 8 meter and Y ::: 0 meter, Calculate the followings
3
SET 4593
(i) What is individual SPL due to sound source A and sound source B.
(4 marks)
(ii) What is the SPL combination due to sound source A and sound source B.
(2 marks)
(iii) What is individual sound intensity level (SIL) due to sound source A and
sound source B.
(6 marks)
3. (a) Discuss thoroughly 2 factors contributing optimum speech transmission index
(ST!) for an enclosed room.
(5 marks)
(b) With appropriate example, discuss thoroughly 2 factors contributing the quality
of reverberation time (RT60) for an enclosed room.
(4 marks)
(c) The lOOOm
3
empty classroom untreated RT60 at 1 kHz is 2.0 second. The
classroom is able to accomodate 60 students. Based on the above
(i) Determine the optimum empty RT60.
(2 marks)
(ii) Determine the amount of sound absorber in Sabine required with 60
students in order to achieve optimum RT60.
(5 marks)
(iii) Suggest which area that should be treated to achieve optimum RT60.
(2 marks)
(iv) Discuss the most suitable treatment material that shall be used to
acoustically treat the area suggested in (iii) above.
(2 marks)
4
SET 4593
SECTIONB
4. (a) Discuss accordingly the followings
(i) STC 45
(ii) NC 35
(4 marks)
(b) There are three possible factors contributing to disturbing noise transmission into
an enclosed room. Discuss thoroughly
(i) How disturbing noise intrusion due to diaphragm action can occur.
(2 marks)
(ii) Through appropriate diagram, how this noise intrusion through
diaphragm action can be minimize.
(2 marks)
(c) There are three possible techniques for possible noise reduction option. For the
noise reduction option control in the path, discuss accordingly 3 ways that can be
implemented in reducing noisy noise level.
(5 marks)
(d) A sound source was placed in the adjacent two room called transmission room.
The SPL measured in the receiving room are as follows.
Freq (Hz) 125 250 500 lk 2k 4k 8k
SPL (dB) 62.5 57.5 55 52.5 50 47.5 45
(i) Determine the NC of the sound measured at the receiving room.
(2 marks)
5
SET 4593
ii) Determine the minimum improvement of sound insulation required in dB
for the dividing wall between transmission and receiving room at octave
band centre frequency from 125Hz to 8 kHz to have NC 40 at the
receiving room. The minimum improvement of sound insulation is to
achieve NC 40 in the receiving room.
(5 marks)
5. (a) Derive the mathematical equation for the definition of sound absorption
coefficient. This derivation shall be based on energy conservation rule.
(4 marks)
(b) Using appropriate examples, discuss thoroughly the component of sound
absorption coefficient.
(4 marks)
(c) Mathematically, describe the Reverberation Time (RT60) develop by Sabine and
Eyring.
(4 marks)
(d) As a sound engineer, you are required to design sound system in an enclosed
room.
(i) Suggest the Sound Pressure Level (SPL) variation coverage in that
room. Explain your suggestion.
(3 marks)
(ii) Discuss briefly 4 factors to result in optimum sound system quality in
relation to your selection of type of loudspeaker, layout pattern and
layout density.
(5 marks)
6
SET 4593
6. (a) A sound source was placed at centre height in the middle of a semicircular tunnel
with radius 3.0 meter. The length of the semicircular tunnel is 30 meter.
The sound pressure measure is 0.22 Pa. Based on the above
(i) Determine the type of sound wave propagation inside that tunnel.
(2 marks)
(ii) Calculate SPL at a distance of 2 meter and 4 meter from the sound source
of the same height.
(3 marks)
(iii) Calculate Sound Intensity Level (SIL) and Sound Power Level (SWL)
as in (ii).
(5 marks)
(b) As an acoustics engineer, you are requested to suggest acoustics criteria for a
classroom with 60 students. This classroom has an adjacent classroom also with
60 students. Based on the above
(i) Suggest 4 acoustics criteria that requires consideration and attention to
have good and functioning class room.
(5 marks)
(ii) Suggest lTIlDlmUm sound Transmission Class (STC) for the dividing
adjacent class room back wall.
(2 marks)
(c) As an acoustics engineer, you suggest the use of perforated wall panel as parts of
multipurpose wall. Discuss this suggestion acoustically.
(3 marks)
Constant
c = 340 mls P = 1.2 kg/m
2
1
0
=1X 10-
12
w/m
2
W0 = 1 X 10-
12
W
Po =2 x 10-
5
Pa
a (l person) =0.35
7
SET 4593
Reverberation tim.e criteria
r
O.ti -_....
. ~ - ~ ..+
\-ri--- -_.
: ~ i : i
0.6 .1. .tt j 1:...
10' lUll.
VOI.UME om'
--
----
8
SET 4593
90 l----,....--,-----,------r------r---,---,
(dB)
Aras
tekanan
. bunyi
jalur
ciktaf
'" ""-. --.. J _
............ . NCSS _--+__--1
\. '" . ..
i'\" ".'. ""'"
30
. """. f'..... --NC250
\ :..'" '. '.' I '. :
20
." .. l:'S..... Nao ---t---\
" 1 "-. I ___
...... r-----.. NelS
I
10 __...lr-- __
63 125 250 500 1000
2000 4000 8000.
Frekuensi jalur tengah oktaf(Hz)->
I CONFIDENTIAL I
!lIM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEU 2012
ELECTRONICS
DR. SHARUL KAMAL BIN ABDUL RAHIM
DR. MOHD JUNAIDI BIN ABDUL AZIZ
MR. WAN MOHD FATIHILKAMAL BIN
WAN MOHD RIDZWAN
MDM. NORAINI BT ZAKARIA
5MB 1SMI 1SMK 1SMM 1SMP 1SMT 1SMV
01/02/03/04/05/06/07/08
2 HOURS
26 APRIL 2009
PART A - ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.
PART B - ANSWER THREE (3) QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
2
SEU2012
PART A (ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS)
Ql
(a) Describe how do you perform the forward biasing and the reverse
biasing of a p-n diode. [2 marks]
(b) Sketch the three V-I characteristics ofthe ideal, practical and complete model of
a silicon diode. [3 marks]
(c) Calculate the diode current, 1
0
in the circuit of Figure QI. (use practical diode
model with diode offset voltage ofO.7V) [2 marks]
Si
10V 2.5kQ
Figure Ql
(d) Repeat question Ql(c) when the lOV dc voltage source in the circuit is replaced
by O.5V. Explain your answer. [3 marks]
3
SEU2012
Q2
(a) Show that with a proper circuit diagrams, how one is going to bias the emitter
junction, JE and the collector junction, Je of a Bipolar Junction Transistor so that
the operation of transistor can fall into the following regions:
(i) Cut off Region
(ii) Active Region
(iii) Saturation Region [3 marks]
(b) For a transistor operating in the active region one can write Ie=o:IE+I
eo
where Ie
is the collector current, IE is the emitter current and leo is the reverse saturation
current at collector junction. All currents are in true direction currents. Prove that
where is defined as [3 marks]
(c) Sketch and label the I-V output characteristic of a common emitter transistor.
Mark the active region, the saturation region and the cut-off region on that I-V
characteristic curve. [3 marks]
(d) Given that 0:=0.987, calculate the corresponding value [1 mark]
4
SEU2012
Q3
(a) Give two major advantages of a Field Effect Transistors (FET) over a Bipolar
Junction Transistors (BJT). [2 marks]
(b) Describe in your own words why (gate current) I
a
is effectively OA for a Field
Effect Transistor (FET). [2 marks]
(c) Is FET a one-charge or two-charge carrier device? [1 mark]
(d) Draw the symbols for n-channel and p-channel FET. Show also the direction of
the current flow. [2 marks]
(e) Draw the transfer characteristic of a FET and write the equation of the transfer
curve. Explain all the variables used in the equation. [3 marks]
5
SEU2012
Q4
(a) Draw and label the basic op-amp unit with its five important pins. Give three
examples of its applications. [4 marks]
(b) Basic Op-Amp consists o f _ ~
and at least one
input and input
[2 marks]
(c) Please draw a two-input summing amplifier circuit. [3 marks]
(d) If the feedback component used in an operational amplifier is a capacitor, the
resulting connection is called [1 mark]
6
SEU2012
PART B (ANSWER THREE QUESTIONS ONLY)
Q5
(a) Refer to Figure Q5 (a). A transformer secondary winding whose output is 12V
(rms) sinusoid at 50Hz is used to drive a bridge rectifier whose diodes' conduction
can be modelled as O.7V voltage drops. The load R is a lk.Q resistor.
(i) Draw and label completely the output voltage waveform, Yo. [3 marks]
(ii) What is the peak voltage, V
op
and peak current, I
p
values? [2 marks]
(iii) What is the average value of the output voltage, VDc? [3 marks]
(iv) If 0
1
is open circuited, what will be the new output voltage waveform?
Sketch the new output waveform. [4 marks]
AC line
I
-.
voltage
+
240V 50Hz
R
V
o
lOon
Figure Q5 (a)
7
SEU2012
(b) If a suitable filter capacitor and a regulator Ie 7812 are connected at the output
terminal as in Figure Q5 (b), determine the following:
(i) The output waveforms across the filter capacitor, Vc, and across RL. Sketch
the waveforms with respect to the input signal, v
s
' [4 marks]
(ii) What are the new values of the load voltage, VL and the load current, I?
[4 marks]
vcr
_ -=4700l!F
-
I
+
AC line
voltage
240V 50Hz
Figure Q5 (b)
8
SEU2012
Q6
Refer to Figure Q6.
Given that PDc=Pac=hfe=200, VBE=O.7V, Vr=26mV.
(a) Calculate:
(i) VTH and R
TH
[3 marks]
(ii) ICQ and VCEQ
[5 marks]
(b) Draw the ac equivalent circuit at mid-band using hybrid 1t model and completely
label it. [3 marks]
(c) Calculate:
(i) Input impedance, Zj and output impedance, Zoo [4 marks]
(ii) Voltage gain, Ay =VJVs [5 marks]
Vee
20V
C
2
R 1Ol1F 1
--+10
58kO
C
1
1011F I
B
+
--+
R
L
+
V
V
o
2.7KO
S
r
R
2
1
Vi
C
E
12kO
2211F
Zj Zo
Figure Q6
9
SEU2012
Q7
Refer to Figure Q7.
The JFET has I
Dss
= 4mA and VGS(OFF)=V
p
= -4V.
Please do the following:
(i) Calculate the values of VGSQ and IDQ. [8 marks]
(ii) Calculate the value VDSQ' [4 marks]
(iii) Draw and completely label the small signal equivalent circuit at mid-band.
[4 marks]
(iv) Calculate the voltage gain, Av=VclVi. [4 marks]
V
cc
=12V loss= 4mA
Vi
V
p
= -4V
ID1
2KQ
27MQ
4 7 ~ F
4 7 ~ F (
0
+
I
Vos
"V
V
O
470J.!F 1
2MQ lKQ
-
Figure Q7
I CONFIDENTIAL I
!lIM
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEU2052
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY FOR
MANAGEMENT
DR. TANCHEE WEI
MR. ZURAIMY BIN ADZIS
SlID
01/02/03
2 HOURS
26 APRIL 2009
SECTION A - ANSWER TWO (2) QUESTIONS ONLY.
SECTION B - ANSWER ANY TWO PARTS ONLY.
COVER
-2
SEU2052
Section A
Question 1.
a) Referring to Figure Qla, answer the following questions:
1. Determine the equivalent resistance, RTOTAL.
ii. Calculate the current which flows out from the voltage source, Is.
Ill. Calculate the power absorbed by the equivalent resistance, PRo
iv. Based on the answer obtained in l(a)i, if another resistor, Rx = 2 Ohms, is
connected between point A and B as shown in the circuit, calculate the new
equivalent resistance, RTOTAL(NEWj and the new value of the source current,
Is(NEWj.
(18 marks)
10 n
A
20 n
Vs = 5 V
B
b) Referring to Figure Q1b, answer the
6.25 n
following questions:
1. Write the current equation based on
Kirchhoffs Current Law.
Vs
ii. Calculate the value ofthe voltage Vj.
20V
111. Calculate the value of the current Ix.
iv. Determine the value of the current /y.
15 n
Figure Qla.
100
Figure Qlb.
(12 marks)
-3
SEU2052
Question 2.
a) In Malaysia, the line frequency is 50 Hz. Given that a voltage source is a pure
sinusoidal wavefonn with 240 Vnns.
1. Sketch the voltage wavefonn described above, for complete 2 cycles.
n. Detennine the value of the peak-peak voltage, Vp_p and label it on your
sketching in 2(a)i.
111. Detennine the value of the period, T and label it in your sketching in 2(a)i.
IV. Define the meaning of "instantaneous value". Give one example from the
voltage wavefonn in 2(a)i.
(10 marks)
b) Given that wavefonn ofvj(t) and V2(t) as shown in Figure Q2b with frequency of
50 Hz, answer the following questions:
1. Write the function for both wavefonn vdt) and V2(t).
11. Sketch the phasor diagram ofvj(t) and V2(t).
(6 marks)
Voltage (V)
CrJt
2rr:

'.
,.
i
..
Figure Q2b
c) For a balance three phase system,
1. Sketch a balance star connection three phase system.
11. Label all the line voltage and phase voltage.
lll. If the magnitude of the phase voltage is 120 V, detennine the line voltage.
(7 marks)
-4
SEU 2052
Continued Question 2
d) Referring to Figure Q2d, calculate the apparent power of the circuit, S.
(7 marks)
100 50
50
-j20
j100
Figure Q2d
-5
SEU2052
Question 3. Answer all of the following questions.
a)
i) Protection against overcurrent is necessary for conductors and equipments.
What type of damage will happen to conductors and equipments when
overcument flows through conductor or any equipment?
ii) List down the devices that are used for overcurrent protection. Briefly explain
how these devices operate when current which is higher than the rated value
flows through the protection devices.
(14 marks)
b)
i) Joe works in an electrical fan shop. When the air-conditioner broke down, he
turned on 20 similar (identical) fans at the maximum speed to cool down
customers. Each fan is rated at 50 W. How much energy is used for a period of
8 hours? How much would he have to pay if the electricity tariff is 40 sen per
kWh?
ii) In the evening, Joe turned off 10 fans and reduced the speed of all the
remaining fans to half of the maximum speed. Assuming that the power
consumed is reduced to be half when the fan operates at half of the maximum
speed, determine the cost of electricity when the fans are turned on for 8
hours.
iii) Compare the cost of the case when Joe uses fans to the case when Joe uses an
air conditioning system, where in both cases are turned on for 8 hours at the
maximum capacity. Assuming that the air conditioning system is rated at 4 hp.
(Note: 1 hp = 746 watt).
(16 marks)
-6
SEU2052
Section B
Question 4. Answer any 2 ofthe following questions (part a, b, c and d).
a) Explain the function of a transfonner and draw the general structure of a single
phase transformer. Label the following elements in your sketching:
i) Primary Voltage (V 1) and Secondary Voltage (Vz)
ii) Primary Turns (Nt} and Secondary Turns (Nz)
iii) Primary Current (II) and Secondary Current (lz)
iv) Core
(20 marks)
b) A loudspeaker is driven by an audio amplifier.
i) What is the purpose of using an amplifier?
ii) Give an example of an electrical appliance that uses an amplifier and briefly
explain the usage of the amplifier in that appliance.
iii) What is the difference between types A and type AB transistor amplifier in
terms of the number of transistors used and its application?
(20 marks)
-7
SEU2052
Continued Question 4
c) Electrical generators convert mechanical energy to electrical energy.
i) Explain the concept of generating electrical energy with simple sketches.
(Use an open loop as the rotor and permanent magnets as the stator.)
ii) Depending on the position of the rotor, sketch the AC voltage waveform
(e.m.f) that produced across the loop's ends.
(20 marks)
d) A linear power supply converts 240 V alternating current to 19 V direct current.
i) Describe the steps required to change the 240 V (AC) to 19 V (DC) and state
the supply type (AC or DC) with the help of diagrams showing the supply
waveform transformations.
ii) In some cases, there are needs to convert the level of a DC supply to another
level of DC value. This process requires DC to DC converters. List down 3
types of DC to DC converter and briefly explain the differences among these
three types.
(20 marks)
-8
SEU 2052
Bahagian A
Question 1.
a) Merujuk Figure Qla, jawab soalan-soalan di bawah:
1. Dapatkan rintangan setara, RTOTAL.
11. Kirakan arus yang mengalir keluar dari sumber voltan, Is.
Ill. Kirakan kuasa yang diserap oleh rintangan setara, PRo
IV. Berdasarkan jawapan dari l(a)i, jika sebuah perintang lain, R
x
= 2 Ohm,
disambungkan di antara A dan B seperti dalam litar, kirakan rintangan setara
yang baru, RTOTAL(NEWj dan nilai baru arus bekalan, IS(NEW) .
(18 markah)
10 n
A
20 n
Vs =5V
15 n B
Figure Qla.
b) Merujuk Figure Qlb, jawab soalan
6.25 n
soalan di bawah:
V. Tuliskan persamaan arus
berdasarkan Kirchhoff s Current
Vs
Law.
20V
vi. Kirakan nilai voltan Vi
V11. Kirakan nilai arus Ix.
VIll. Dapatkan nilai arus /yo
10 n
Figure Qlb.
(12 markah)

-9
SEU2052
Question 2.
a) Di Malaysia, frekuensi talian adalah 50 Hz. Diberi sebuah bekalan voltan
gelombang sinusoid tulen dengan nilai 240 Vrms.
1. Lakarkan gelombang voltannya, untuk 2 kitaran lengkap.
11. Dapatkan nilai voltan puncak ke puncak, Vp_p dan tandakan pada lakaran
anda di 2(a)i.
111. Dapatkan nilai tempoh ( sela masa), T dan tandakan pada lakaran anda di
2(a)i.
IV. Terangkan maksud "nilai ketika". Berikan satu contoh pada gelombang
voltan pada 2(a)i.
(10 markah)
b) Diberi gelornbang vJ(t) and vlt) seperti pada Figure Q2b dengan frekuensi 50
Hz, jawab soalan-soalan berikut.
1. Tuliskan pemyataan fungsi untuk kedua-dua gelombang vJ(t) and V2(t).
11. Lakarkan garnbarajah pemfasa vJ(t) and V2(t).
(6 markah)
Voltage (V)
--"...
.- -'.
,. .V2(t)
'.
\
\
GJt
2rc
,
,
1
,
,"
I
Figure Q2b
c) Untuk sebuah sistern 3 fasa yang seimbang,
1. Lakarkan sarnbungan sistern 3 fasa bintang.
11. Labelkan semua voltan talian dan talian fasa.
111. Jika voltan fasa ialah 120 V, dapatkan nilai voltan talian.
(7 markah)
-10
SEU2052
Continued...... Question 2
d) Merujuk Figure Q2d, kirakan kuasa ketara litar, S.
(7 markah)
100 so
so
-j20
j100
Figure Q2d
-11
SEU 2052
Question 3. Jawab semua soalan.
a)
i) Perlindungan dari arus lampau adalah perlu untuk pengalir dan perkakasan.
Apakah jenis kerosakan yang akan berlaku terhadap pengalir dan perkakasan
apabila arus lampau melaluinya?
ii) Senaraikan peranti peranti yang digunakan untuk perlindungan arus lampau.
Terangkan secara ringkas cara peranti tersebut beroperasi apabila arus yang
lebih dari kadaran mengalir melaluinya.
(14 markah)
b)
i) Joe bekeIja di sebuah kedai kipas. Apabila alat penghawa dingin rosak, dia
menghidupkan 20 kipas yang sarna jenis pada kelajuan maksimum untuk
mendinginkan pelanggan. Setiap kipas berkadaran 50 W. Berapa banyak
tenaga digunakan untuk 8 jam? Berapakah yang perlu dibayar jika tariff
elektrik ialah 40 sen setiap kWjam?
ii) Di waktu senja, Joe mematikan 10 kipas tersebut dan perlahankan kelajuan
kipas lain kepada separuh dari laju maksimum. Dengan anggapan kuasa
dipakai ialah separuh apabila kelajuan kipas separuh dari maksimum, dapatkan
kos eletrik apabila kipas-kipas tersebut dihidupkan selama 8 jam.
iii) Bandingkan kos apabila Joe menggunakan alat penghawa dingin, di mana
dalam kedua-dua keadaan, ianya dihidupkan selama 8 jam pada keupayaan
maksimum. Anggap alat penghawa dingin berkadaran 4 kuasa kuda. (Nota:
kk = 746 watt).
(16 markah)
-12
SEU 2052
BahagianB
Question 4. Jawab 2 dari 4 soalan berikut (bahagian a, b, c dan d).
a) Terangkan fungsi pengubah (transformer) dan lukiskan rajah susunan am
pengubah satu fasa dan tandakan bahagian-bahagian berikut pada rajah tersebut;
i) Voltan Utama (V I) dan Voltan Sekunder (V2)
ii) Lilitan Utama (NI) dan Li1itan Sekunder (N2)
iii) Arus Primer (II) dan Arus Sekunder (12)
iv) Teras
(20 markah)
b) Sebuah pembesar suara dipacu oleh sebuah penguat audio.
i) Apakah tujuan menggunakan penguat?
ii) Berikan contoh sebuah perkakasan elektrik yang menggunakan penguat dan
secara ringkas terangkan penggunaan penguat dalam perkakasan tersebut.
iii) Apakah perbezaan di antara penguat transistor 'type A' dan 'type AB' dari
segi bilangan transistor yang ada dan penggunaannya?
(20 markah)
-13
SEU 2052
Continued... Question 4
c) Penjana elektrik menukarkan tenaga kinetik kepada tenaga elektrik.
i) Terangkan konsep penjanaan tenaga elektrik dengan lakaran yang paling
ringkas (sebuah gelung terbuka sebagai rotor dan magnet kekal sebagai stator).
ii) Berdasarkan kedudukan rotor, lakarkan voltan a.u. yang terhasil merentangi
bukaan gelung.
(20 markah)
d) Sebuah bekalan kuasa 'linear' menukarkan 240 Varus ulang-alik kepada 19 V
arus terus.
i) Terangkan langkah-langkah yang diperlukan untuk menukar 240 V (AU)
kepada 19 V (AT) dan nyatakanjenis bekalan (AU atau AT) dengan bantuan
rajah menunjukkan perubahan gelombang bekalan.
ii) Dalam situasi tertentu, ada keperluan untuk mengubah paras bekalan AT
kepada aras voltan bekalan AT yang lain. Proses ini memerlukan 'DC to DC
converter'. Senaraikan 3 jenis 'DC to DC converter' dan jelaskan secara
ringkas perbezaan diantaranya.
(20 markah)
\ CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SESSION 2008/2009
SEU2123
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
DR. AZLI BIN YAllYA
SPE
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
30 APRIL 2009
COVER
-2
SEU2123
Question 1
(a) In general, 'Metrology' is defined as 'Science of Measurement' which can be
divided into three sub-fields. Define the following sub-fields;
(i) Scientific or Fundamental Metrology [3 marks]
(ii) Applied or Industrial Metrology [3 marks]
(iii) Legal Metrology [3 marks]
(b) State the differences between
(i) Accuracy and Precision [4 marks]
(ii) Calibration and Measurand [4 marks]
B
d' . .. b R ol.R1RzR3C
Z
(c) An u nknown va ue 1 fior Hay n ge s resIstance IS gIven y, = z z
1+OJ .C.R
z
Show that this equation for R is dimensionally consistent when OJ =T-
1
,
C =jJ-1.L-1.T
z
and Rl'R
Z
,R
3
=jJ.L.T-
1
[8 marks]
-3
SEU2123
Question 2
(a) The relationship between Standard and Accuracy can be shown via the Diagram
of Traceability.
(i)
(ii)
Sketch the diagram of Traceability
Discuss the highest hierarchy in (i)
[2 marks]
[4 marks]
(b) Figure 1 illustrates the Josephson Junction concept.
I
Figure Q2: Josephson Junction
(i) Sketch the I-V characteristic of the arrangement shown in Figure Q2.
[2 marks]
(ii) Explain the Josephson effect [4 marks]
(c) The membership status of the ISO are categorized into categories (i), (ii) and (iii)
as follows. Elaborate each membership status in terms of its activities.
(i) Member bodies [2 marks]
(ii) Correspondent members [2 marks]
(iii) Subscriber members. [2 marks]
(d) Discuss the importance of "Conformity Assessment" (CA). [7 marks]
..
-4
SEU2123
Question 3
(a) Draw the internal structure of a D' Arsonval Galvanometer and use it to explain the
operating concept of Permanent Magnet Moving Coil (pNIMC). [5 marks]
(b) Figure Q3(a) shows a Wheatstone Bridge for measuring the unknown resistance, R
x
.
G is a galvanometer.
c
v

d
Figure Q3(a). Wheatstone Bridge
(i) Explain how the circuit works to ensure that it is 'balanced'. [3 marks]
(ii) Derive equation Rx in terms ofR
1
, R
2
and R3 when there is no deflection on G
[3 marks]
(iii) Find a suitable range value of potentiometer R
1
if R
x
value ranges from 500 n. to
20 kO, R
2
=2.5 kO and R3=4 kn. [6 marks]
(c) An Oscilloscope is used to measure electrical signals. The following Figure 3Q(b)
shows the internal construction of CRT based oscilloscope. Describe the operation.
[8 marks]
T1MEIOIV x-roo

5lgnld! W4YQf0nn
OCREEN
VOLW/O!V yroo
Figure 3Q(b). CRT based oscilloscope
.,
-5
SEU2123
Question 4
(a) Define the following:
(i) Data analysis [2 marks]
(ii) Qualitative data [2 marks]
(iii) Quantitative data [2 marks]
(b) An engineer at Hal fconductor Electronic Sdn. Bhd. has been assigned to measure
a leakage current of a circuit board. During inspection, the voltage showed
inconsistence reading at the same point which was due to the error in
measurement.
(i) List two possible sources of errors [3 marks]
(ii) Elaborate one of them [6 marks]
(c) A set of measurement for a Rod Diameter is shown in Figure Q4.
Sample No. Diameter
Measurement Distribution for Rod
1 0.299
Diameter
3
2 0.298
...
:::
Q)
3 0.298
S
Q)
....
::l
4 0.302
til 2
C1:l
Q)
S
5 0.302 4-<
0
>.
6 0.310
u
1
:::
~
0"
7 0.302
Q)
....
~
8 0.300
0
0.295 0.299 0.303 0.307 0.311 0.315
9 0.299
Diameter measurement
10 0.298
Figure Q4. Measurement of Rod Diameter
(i) Use the Chauvenet 's criterion to test the possibility of inconsistent data
measurement. [6 marks]
(ii) Calculate the new value of standard deviation. [4 marks]
-6
SEU2l23
Question 5
(a) Thermocouple is a measuring device for temperature measurement.
(i) Sketch the thermocouple construction. [3 marks]
(ii) Explain how the thermocouple works. [7 marks]
(b) Figure Q5(a) shows a fan system in a room, which will be activated when the room
temperature rises to 28
0
C. Device 1 is used to sense the temperature.
12V
~
.....
Fan 12V
8
7
YR1 ""'>.__--i
10k 4
Device 1
Figure Q5(a). Fan system
(i) Name Device 1. [1 mark]
(ii) Describe the operational principle of fan system in Figure Q5(a).
[7 marks]
(c) A steel bar as shown in Figure Q5(b) is used to represent a tensile stress of a strain
gauge that measures force on wires. The steel is subjected to a tensile force of 28000
kg. The Young's modulus is found to be 1.8 x 10
10
kg/m
2
Calculate the elongation,
M in meters. [7 marks]
I Length 0.4 meter I
J
Figure Q5(b). Steel bar
I CONFIDENTIAL I
SESSION 2008/2009
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SEU 3003
ELECTRONICS
MR. MOHD YUSOF BIN MOHD NOOR
SPE
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
26 APRIL 2009
PART A - ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.
PART B - ANSWER FOUR (4) QUESTIONS ONLY.
COVER
2
SEU3003
PART A (ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS)
Ql
(a) Describe how do you perfonn the forward biasing and the reverse biasing of a p-n
diode. [2 marks]
(b) Sketch the three V-I characteristics of the ideal, practical and complete model of a
silicon diode. [2 marks]
(c) Calculate the diode current, I
D
in the circuit of Figure Q1. (use practical diode
model with diode offset voltage ofO.7V) [2 marks]
Si
--... I
D
10V 2.5kO
Figure QI
(d) Repeat question QI(c) when the IOV dc voltage source in the circuit is replaced by
O.5V. Explain your answer. [2 marks]
3
SEU3003
Q2
(a) Show that with a proper circuit diagram, one can bias the emitter junction, h and
the collector junction, Jc of a Bipolar Junction Transistor in such a way that the
transistor can be operated in the following regions:
(i) Cut off Region
(ii) Active Region
(iii) Saturation Region [3 marks]
(b) For a transistor operating in the active region, one can write Ie=aIE+I
eo
where Ie is
the collector current, IE is the emitter current and leo is the reverse saturation
current at collector junction. All currents are in true direction currents. Prove that
Ic=PI
B
+(1 +p)Ieo where p is defined as p=aJ(1-a). [3 marks]
(c) Sketch and label the I-V output characteristic of a common emitter transistor.
Also mark the active region, the saturation region and the cut-off region on that I-V
characteristic curve. [2 marks]
4
SEU3003
Q3
(a) Give two major advantages ofa Field-Effect Transistor (FET) over a Bipolar
Junction Transistor (BJT). [2 marks]
(b) Is FET a one-charge or two-charge carrier device? [1 mark]
(c) Draw the symbols for n-channel and p-channel FET. Show also the direction of the
current flow. [2 marks]
(d) Draw the transfer characteristic of a FET and write the equation of the transfer
curve. Explain all the variables used in the equation. [3 marks]
5
SEU3003
Q4
(a) Draw and label the basic op-amp unit with its five important pins. Give three
examples of its applications. [3 marks]
(b) Basic Op-Amp consists of
and at least one
input and input
[2 marks]
(c) Please draw a two-input summing amplifier circuit. [3 marks]
6
SEU3003
Q5
(a) What is the difference between a latch and a flip-flop [2 marks]
(b) Convert the following decimal numbers to binary
(i) 11810
(ii) 1510
[2 marks]
(c) Convert the following binary numbers to decimal
(i) 100002
(ii) 0111011
2
[2 marks]
(d) Draw the symbol and truth table for the following:
(i) AND gate
(iii) NAND gate
[2 marks]
7
SEU3003
PART B (ANSWER FOUR QUESTIONS ONLY)
Q6
(a) Refer to Figure Q6 (a).
A transfonner secondary winding whose output is l2V (nns) sinusoid at 50Hz is
used to drive a bridge rectifier whose diodes' conduction can be modelled as O.7V
voltage drops. The load R is a lIen resistor.
(i) Draw and label completely the output voltage wavefonn (Va). [2 marks]
(ii) What is the peak voltage (V
op
) and current (I
p
) values? [2 marks]
(iii) What is the average value of the output voltage (VDc)? [3 marks]
(iv) If Dl is open circuited, what will be the new output voltage wavefonn.? Sketch
the new output wavefonn. [3 marks]
AC line
voltage
+
240V 50Hz
R
V
o
lOon
Figure Q6 (a)
8
SEU3003
(b) If a suitable filter capacitor and a regulator Ie 7812 are connected at the output
terminal as in Figure Q6 (b), determine the following:
(i) The output waveforms across the filter capacitor, Vc, and across R
L
. Sketch
the waveforms with respect to the input signal, V
s
[3 marks]
(ii) What are the new values of the load voltage, V
L
and the load current, I?
[2 marks]
+
AC line
v
s
-
I
voltage
12Vrms +
240V 50Hz
+
vcr
_ -=-4 7 0 0 ~ F
Figure Q6 (b)
9
SEU3003
Q7
Refer to Figure Q7.
Given that VBE=O.7V, Vr=26mV.
(a) Calculate
(i) V
TH
and R
TH
[3 marles]
(ii) ICQ and VCEQ [4 marks]
(b) Draw the ac equivalent circuit at mid-band using hybrid 7t model and completely
label it. [2 marles]
(c) Calculate
(i) Input impedance, Zj and output impedance, ZOo [2 marks]
(ii) Voltage gain, Ay=VJVs. [4 marks]
Vee
20V
R,
58kO
Is
-+
R
2
r
Vi 12kO
C
2
10llF
--+1
0
C,
R
s
10llF
+
-+I
s
5000
R
L
V
O +
2.7KO
V
S
221lF
C
E
I
Zj Zo
Figure Q7
10
SEV3003
Q8
Refer to Figure Q8.
The JFET has IDss= 4mA and VOS(OFF)=Vp= -4V.
Please do the following:
(i) Calculate the values of VOSQ and IDQ. [6 marks]
(ii) Calculate the value VDSQ. [2 marks]
(iii) Draw and completely label the small signal equivalent circuit at mid-band.
[3 marks]
(iv) Calculate the voltage gain, Av=VJVi. [4 marks]
Figure Q8
11
SEU3003
Q9
(a) Refer to Figure Q9 (a).
(i) What is the function ofOp Amp circuit in Figure Q9 (a). [1 marks]
(ii) Derive the mathematical equation for VJ'll. [4 marks]
(iii) Since R
x
can be varied, what is the range of VJ'll. [2 marks]
(iv) Calculate the range of the output voltage, V
o
ifVl= O.2V, R
1
= 20kO,
R
2
= 400kO and R
x
can be varied between on to 20kO [2 marks]
+V
ee
2
-Vee
-
-
Figure Q9 (a)
12
SEU3003
(b) Referring to Figure Q9 (b),
(i) Mathematically derive the equation for V
o
in terms of V1, V2and the various
resistors. [4 marks]
(ii) What is the value ofV
o
ifR
I
= R
2
= R
3
= Rf] = R
a
= Iill, Vl=2V
and V2 = IV. [2 marks]
Figure Q9 (b)
13
SEU3003
QI0
(a) Refer to the combinational circuit in Figure QIO (a).
(i) Derive the Boolean expressions for X and Y. [4 marks]
(ii) Using DeMorgan's Theorem, convert the Boolean equations ofY into one in
which the equation of Y can be implemented using NAND gates only.
[4 marks]
(iii) Draw the new logic circuit ofY. [2 marks]
A
B
C
o
E
F
x
G
H
y
Figure QlO (a)
I I SULIT
KODKURSUS
KURSUS
PENSYARAH
PROGRAM
SEKSYEN
MASA
TARIKH
SESI 2008/2009
SEU 3053
TEKNOLOGIELEKTRIK
PROF. MADYA DR. MOHD MUHRIDZA BIN
YAACOB
SPE
01
2 JAM
20 APRIL 2009
ARAHAN KEPADA CALON
JAWAB TIGA (3) SOALAN SAHAJA.
JAWAB SI DAN S2 DAN PILIH SALAH SATU DI ANTARA S3 ATAU S4.
-2
SED 3053
S1. (a) Sebuah bekalan 3-fasa seimbang sambungan delta dengan voltan talian
bernilai 400 V membekalkan beban 3-fasa seimbang sambungan bintang di
mana wayar neutral disambung ke bumi. Arus bernilai 25 A dengan faktor
kuasa 0.8 mengekor mengalir pada setiap fasa beban. Dengan mengambil V
RY
sebagai rujukan sertajujukan fasa positifRYB, tentukan pada beban;
(i) Nilai-nilai voltan talian dan voltan fasa (6 Markah)
(ii) Nilai beban ZR (5 Markah)
(iii) Nilai-nilai arus talian (6 Markah)
(iv) Gambarajah pemfasa bagi semua voltan fasa, voltan talian dan arus
talian (6 Markah)
(b) Sekiranya dua meter watt disambungkan seperti dalam Rajah SI, tentukan
bacaan pada kedua-dua meter watt tersebut serta jumlah kuasa yang
terhasit
(12 Markah)
-- ......... ... _, - ~ - _
R
, ,
I
+ '
Faktor
400LO'V kuasa =0.8
mengekor
~ - ..... - -.:Wl
meter wat t 1
I
y
y----_.- -'------:...._---J
meter watt 2
r---------- .. --.,
, I
, ,
, ,
, - I
, I
B ' ,
:. _. - - - - . _. _: W2
Rajah 81
-3
SED 3053
S2. Satu litar magnet berbentuk gelang yang diperbuat dari besi mempunyai tiga
bahagian bersiri, setiap bahagian mempunyai dimensi seperti berikut;
Bahagian 1: panjang 10 sm, luas keratan rentas 0.48 sm
2
Bahagian 2: panjang 8 sm, luas keratan rentas 0.9 sm
2
Bahagian 3: sela udara dengan panjang 0.5 mm, luas keratan rentas 1.2 sm
2
Bahagian 1 dan 2 mempunyai ciri-ciri magnet seperti dalam Jadual S2 dan nilai
ketelapan ruang bebas, flo diberi sebagai 4n x 10-
7
.
Jadual S2
I
B(Wb/m
2
) 0.25 0.50 0.80 1.00 1.20
H(Al/m) 120 280 500 800 1500
Sekiranya gegelung yang mempunyai 2500 lilit dililitkan di bahagian 1 dan juga
dengan mengabaikan kesan bocoran dan pinggiran;
(a) Lakarkan litar setara elektrik bagi litar magnet tersebut. (5 Markah)
(b) Tu1iskan persamaan daya gerak magnet (dgm) bagi litar tersebut
(3 Markah)
(c) Tentukan nilai-nilai fluks dan daya gerak magnet (dgm) yang diperlukan
untuk menghasilkan ketumpatan fluks sebanyak 0.3 Wb/m
2
di dalam ruang
udara. (23 Markah)
(d) Kirakan nilai arus yang perlukan dibekalkan untuk menghasilkan dgm
seperti di bahagian (c) di atas. (4 Markah)
I
-4
SED 3053
S3. (a) Lakarkan binaan sebuah pengubah satu fasa. Berdasarkan lakaran tersebut,
nyatakan struktur asas pengubah tersebut. Terangkan juga prinsip asas
kendalian pengubah serta pemindahan tenaga elektrik dari bahagian
primer ke bahagian sekunder. (10 Markah)
(b) Sebuah pengubah unggul satu fasa menghasilkan keluaran 6 V dari
bekalan 240 V, 50 Hz. Jika belitan primer mempunyai nisbah lilit-per-volt
sebanyak 3, berapakah bilangan lilit belitan sekunder pengubah tersebut.
(5 Markah)
(c) Jika pengubah dalam bahagian (b) di atas hendak dililit semula bagi
menghasilkan keluaran 14 V, berapakah bilangan lilit pada belitan
sekunder yang perlu ditambah. (5 Markah)
(d) Sebuah pengubah mempunyai belitan primer 600 lilit dan belitan sekunder
1800 lilit dengan luas keratan rentas 70 sm
2
. Jika belitan primernya
disambungkan kepada bekalan 400 V, 50 Hz, dapatkan nilai-nilai fluks
puncak, ketumpatan fluks dalam teras dan nilai voltan yang teraruh dalam
belitan sekunder. (10 Markah)
-5
SED 3053
84. (a) Mesin arns terns boleh dikendalikan samada sebagai penjana atau motor.
Dengan menggunakan rajah-rajah yang tertentu, jelaskan dengan terperinci
binaan dan prinsip kendalian mesin tersebut. (10 Markah)
(b) Sebuah mesin pirau arns terns 25 kW, 250 V mempunyai rintangan angkir
dan medan masing-masing bemilai 0.06 n dan 100 n. Tentukan jumlah
kuasa angkir yang dihasilkan apabila mesin tersebut berkendali sebagai;
i) Penjana yang membekalkan kuasa keluaran sebanyak 25 kW
(10 Markah)
ii) Motor yang mengambil25 kW kuasa masukan (10 Markah)
I CONFIDENTIAL I
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
tBJJIM
SESSION 2008/2009
SEI4143
COMPUTER PROCESS CONTROL
MR MOHAMAD SHUKRI BIN ABD. MANAF
SEI
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
25 APRIL 2009
COVER
-2
SEI4143
Ql.
a) There are seven (7) objectives in Process Control. Two of them are:
(i) Environmental protection
(ii) Equipment protection
Give an example of feedback and feedfoward control systems and briefly discuss
these two objectives when designing these systems.
(7 marks)
b) The process design has been prepared for the system in Figure Ql(b). The Key
variables to be controlled for the systems are composition, temperature and liquid
level. Answer the following questions.
I. Determine which sensors and final control elements are required so
that the important variables can be controled. Sketch them on the
figure where they should be located. You are required to use standard
SI symbols in your sketch.
II. Describe how the equipment capacities can be determined.
Ill. Select control pairings; that is, select which measured variable to be
controlled by adjusting which manipulated variable.
(8 marks)
ISOlvent ~
Reactant
Icooling I
Figure Ql (b)
-3
SEI4143
c) Referring to the flash separation process shown in Figure Q1(c),
(i) a high pressure in the drum is very dangerous. Explain how you
can design a controller to maintain the pressure in the drum so that
it does not exceed dangerous level.
(3 marks)
(ii) the pump can be damaged if no liquid is flowing out of the drum.
Explain how you can design a controller to protect the pump.
(4 marks)
(iii) the flow and the temperature of the feed must be maintained in
order to achieve smooth operation of the plant. Explain how this
can be achieved by designing appropriate controllers.
(3 marks)
A
Vapor
product
Feed
Liquid
Process Steam product
fluid
Figure Ql(c). Flash separation process
-4
SEI 4143
Q2.
a) The Level-flow system in Figure Q2(a) is to be analyzed. The flow Fa is constant.
The flow F
3
depends on the valve opening, whereas flow F
1
and F
2
depend on the
varying pressures (Level, L).
1. Determine the component material balances.
11. Determine the dynamic response of the levels and flows using
approximate linear model.
111. Find the transfer function in Laplace-form relating flow out (F
2
) to
input flow rate F3
Assume that the system is initially at steady state and a step increase in
F3 is made by adjusting the valve.
(15 marks)
1
1
Reservoir
Figure Q2(a)
-5
SEI4143
b) From Figure Q2(b) due to safety requirements, the level in tank should never go
above 1m. Using the equation in part (a) and the data given in Table Q2(b), find
out the remaining time (t) available for an operator to close the valve in Figure
Q2(b) if an alarm sounds when the reaches level 1 m.
(10 marks)
h
Fl
A
Figure 2(b)
Table Q2(b)
Parameter Value
F3 (initial) 0.001 (m
3
/min)
A Im
L
F3 0.002 (m
3
/min)
l/R 0.001 (m
2
/min)
-6
SEI4143
Q3.
a) List down advantages of digital control compared to analog control.
(4 Marks)
b) Discuss how the sampling rates of data will effect the tuning parameter for a PID
controller
(4 marks)
c) The dynamic response of the CSTR shown in Figure Q3 is given as follows;
dC
A
2
V dx =F(C
AO
- C
A
) - VkC
A
Where, A is product, V= volume (m
3
), F is flow rate (m
3
1h), C
A
= concentration
(mole/m
3
) and k=I.O h-
1
Given data V=2m
3
; F=] m
3
1h; C
A
(O)=O.5 mole/m
3
i.
11.
iii.
Linearize the equation above.
Formulate the transfer function CA/C
Ao
.
Analytically solve the linearized equation for a st
concentration of A (CAo).
(5 marks)
(6 marks)
ep change in the inlet
(6 marks)
Pure A
v
Figure Q3
-7
SEI4143
Q4.
a) Explain briefly three methods for PID tuning in process control.
(6 marks)
b) A process control design is given in Figure Q4.
- - - - -I
cp
,
1 *
t=rct>ummJ
Figure Q4
The process transfer function Gp(s) follow, with time in minutes:
~ (s) 3e-1.2' ( () C J
(Gp(s))r == - == --,-(----) l
VI (s) 1+ 2s % open
O5
(Gp(s)L == Al(s) == 1.3e- . ' (wt% J
v
2
(s) (1+14s) % open
I. For each system (Le. for temperature and composition), calculate the settling
time ofthe system when a unity gain controller is used.
(3 marks)
ii. Find the tuning parameters for a PID controller for each control variable
(temperature and composition). State clearly the method of PID tuning in your
design.
(10 marks)
c) Find the tuning parameter for PID for the closed process control G(s) given by the
following equation
K
G ( s ) = ~ - - -
S2(S +2)(s + 6)
(6 marks)
-8
SE! 4143
Q5.
a) Explain briefly 5 elements which should contain in a SCADA system.
(6 marks)
b) Sketch examples ofP&1 diagrams to illustrate each of the following control
approach commonly used in process industries.
\. A cascade controller.
ll.
iii.
An inferential controller.
A feedforward controller.
(4 marks)
(4 marks)
(4 marks)
c) For the non-linear three tank mixing process shown in Figure Q5, 3 sets of PID
controller parameters have been obtained using the Ciancone Correlation
diagrams for different values of Fa as shown in Table Q5(b). Design a gain
scheduling PID controller so that performance of the process can be maintained,
despite changing values of solvent, Fa.
Hint:
1 ~ 3 91-
1
[10 -15
4 16 = -4.5 8
[
- ~ . 5 1
5 25 0.5-1 0.5
(7 marks)
Pure A
~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - j
B
~ F '
I
I
,
I
I
I
V
I
F
I
I
XA2 ~
@
tetr
I
I
XA3
F
V
Figure Q5
-9
SEI4143
Table Q5(b)
Case Process parameters Controller parameters
FB
K
p
r KC
T] Td
A 3.0 0.087 11.4 13.8 25.1 1.82
B 4.0 0.064 8.6 18.6 19.0 1.4
C 5.0 0.052 6.9 23.1 15.2 1.10
-10
SEI4143
Attachment
Table of Commonly Used Equations
Component {Accumulation of component mass}
Material Balance = {component mass in}-{component mass out}
+{generation of component mass}
Energy Balance {Accumulation ofU + PE + KE}={U+PE+KE in due to convection}
-{U+PE+KE out due to convection}
+Q-W
Continuous form
PID algorithm
[ 1j dCV(t)]
MV(t)=K, E(t)+- E(t')dt'-T
d
+1
T
1
0 dt
Continuous PID
(in Laplace
Domain)
MV(s)
G,(s) =
E(s)
(1 J
= K, 1+-+Tds
1;s
I
Ziegler Nichol Table
P PI PID
0.5K
cu
0.45K
cu
0.6K
cu
K
c
't[ T
u
/2 Tu/1.2 -
'to T
u
/8 - -
1
Table Q4 (a) closed loop
PID Open Loop Tuning Bal'cJ 011 Step Respomt
C:outroller Type Pro 'pornonal
(;;lllJ
K
{'
Integral
Time
T
i
!)cri"atn ,
Tun"
T
d
Propoftwual 'July l'
r
(I.?( r
K. r
't..l.'
1
0

d",.,vntwt, (PU)':
1:-(-';.1
1
:2,0
1..
1
-I
, 0
Table Q4(b)

-1 1
SEI4143
C!ANCONE CORRELATIONS FOR DIMENSIONLESS TIJNING CONSTANTS, PID
ALGORITHM.
Disturbance (a,b,c)
Set point change (d,e,f)
10 __- ........................---.., 10.,..----------...
.JO '
o .IO.ID ;10..40 ..so .60 :1'0 Jl(l 1.0
.roL-L....iL....i--l--i-..l.--I.--I.--I--J
o .10.20.30 AD .so Jill .70 JIO .90 1.0
fInK:IicIII dIl.!;Ii_ PrIllItIll:l dead lime
(#) (dl
Ul..----------.......
1..0---------
.80 .10
,:'16 :70

:.40 ...

',JO
.30
..20 .20
.10 .10
mol....-i .....
o
..LJO-JCl......-Ail}..&-.-.50"' .. -..cKl"--.1O'--;IIOI... ....J
SO
"-..J
1
;& ..oL.... .I1...
0
.... .20 ........ .30 ... ;,.I,.4O ........... .5Q-......10 ...
JlnldilllldeelJ ... PlxlisdeIId timla
(b) (it')
.10
.SO
,1..----------...
JO
';'
+
..20
....

.10
........--I--I--l.--"-"-..l
AOr----------.......
...........J
o .10 3D AO .50 JlO .1t AD .90 Ul o .10.20 30 AD .SO AIlI :iIl ..110 .110 U)
...
PsIillion__
(il') {/)
--
-12
SEI4143
Ciancone correlations for Dimensionless tuning constants, PI algorithm.
Set point (c,d)
Disturbance (a,b)
III
:<
1.0
10

l<" 1.0
() I0 {\ 10
o 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 Oil 0.9 1.0 () n. I 0.2 OJ 0.4 05 0.6 0.7 O.ll 0.9 L(
to'raction dead time (8 r)
Fraction dead time (_0_)
(J+T
(n J (c)
LO 1.0
0.90 0.90
O.!W OJHI
0.70 070
;; C
+ 0.60 + 0.60
0.50'" 0.50
-- 0.40 ;.:;- 0.40
(UO (UO
ll.2U 0.20
0.10 0.10
0.00 0.00
o n.l 0.2 0.3 <J,4 0.5 U.6 0.7 0.8 0:<1 1.0 o 0.1 ll.2 0.3 0,4 U.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Fraction dead time ( () ) Frllclilln dead time (_e_)
'. 6+r
e+1'
(il) (d)
-13
SEI4143
Symbol for SI Drawing
FiRST LETTER(SI SUCCEEmNG lmERS
Measured or
Initiating
Variable
Modifier Passive Function Output Function Modifrer
A Analysis Alarm Alarm
B Burner User's Choice User's Choice User's Choice
C Conductivity Controller Closed (*)
D
Density, Specific
Gravity
Differential
E VoHage Primary Bement
F Row Ratlo
G
Gauging
(Dimensional)
Glass
H Hand High
I Current Indicator
J Power Scan
K Time Control Station
L Level Light Low
M Moisture Middle
N User's Choice User's Choice User's Choice User's Choice
0 User's Choice Orifice Open (*)
P Pressure Point (Test)
Q
Quantity, Event integrate, Totalize
R Radioactivity Record
S Speed, Frequency Safety Switch
T TempeTature Transmitter
U Multivariable Multifunction Multifunction Multifunction MultifUflction
V Viscosity
Valve, Damper,
Louvre
W Weight, Force Well
X Unclassified Unclassified Unclassified Unclassified Unclassified
y
User's Choice Relay, Computing
Z Position
Driver, Actuator,
Unclassified Final
Control Element
I CONFIDENTIAL I
!lIM
SESSION 2008/2009
COURSE CODE
COURSE
LECTURER
PROGRAMME
SECTION
TIME
DATE
SEM4153
ROBOTICS TECHNOLOGY FOR
AUTOMATION
PROF. DR. SHAMSUDDIN BIN MOHD AMIN
SEM
01
2 HOURS 30 MINUTES
8 MAY 2009
THIS EXAMINATION BOOKLET CONSISTS OF 13 PAGE n\lCLUDING THE FRONT
COVER
2
SEM 4153
QUESTION 1
Figure Ql(a) shows a robot work cell for assembling fire extinguishers. The work cell consists
of two robots, 4 welding machines, input and output gravity actuated part feeders, and a press
and marriage station (as shown in Figure Ql(b)).
The fire extinguisher is made up of 4 parts namely neck, upper tank, lower tank and skirt as
illustrated in Figure Ql(c). Firstly the neck is attached to the upper tank to form the upper part.
Then the skirt is assembled with the lower tank to form the lower part. Finally the upper and
lower parts are assembled together to form the fire extinguisher.
The robots used in the assembly task are the Yaskawa Motoman K30 revolute robots as shown in
Figure Ql(d). Taking the robot base the reference point (0, 0, 0), the skirts are located at (-1.5,
2, 1), the lower tanks at (-3, -2, ) and Sub Assembly 2 at (2, -2, 1). All dimensions in feet. The
robot speeds are as follow:
Jogging motion without load = 12 feet/sec
Jogging motion with load = 9 feet/sec
Straightline motion without load = 4 feet/sec
Straightline motion with load = 3 feet/sec
(a) The assembly of the lower part of the fire extinguisher is done at Sub Assembly 2 in
Station 1. Describe the detailed step by step activities of the robot (for RTM
computation). Table 1 shows selected RTM symbols and values. (6 marks)
(b) By using the RTM method, compute the cycle time to assembly the lower part of the
fire extinguisher (with the skirt weighing 3 lbs (pounds) and the lower tank weighing
8Ibs). (14 marks)
(c) What would you recommend to reduce the cycle time by 50 percent?
(5 marks)
3
SEM 4153
Table 1: Selected RTM Symbols and Values
Element Symbol Element time, s Parameters
Rl S/V+0.40 forS>V/2.5
0.40 for S< V /2.5
S =distance moved (ft)
V =velocity (ftlsec)
This is used for short moves
2 Ml
S/ V+0.40
0.40
For payloads ofless than 1.0 lb
forS>V/2.5 S =distance moved (ft)
for S < V /2.5 This is used for short moves
For payloads of between 1 and 5.0 lb
S / V+ 0.60 for S >V /2.5 S =distance moved (ft)
V= velocity (ft/sec)
0.60 for S< V/2.5 This is used for short moves
For payloads of between 5 and 15 lb
S/ V+0.90 forS>V/2.5 S =distance moved (ft)
0.90 forS< V /2.5 This is used for short moves
4.1 SE1 0.1 V V =previous velocity (ft/sec)
7.1 GR1 0.1 Assumed to be independent of
any parameters
8 RE 0.1 Assumed to be independent of
any parameters
9 T T T =robot delay time
10 D D D =process delay time
4
SEM 4153
QUESTION 2
(a) What are the main benefits of using robotic arc welding as compared to a manual process?
(5 marks)
(b) Explain the differences between thyristor/silicon-controlled-rectifier based robotic arc
welding controller and inverter based controllers. In what ways can the differences affect
the robotic welding process?
(5 marks)
(c) A two-layered robotic arc welding work cell comprising of eight industrial robots is used
to assemble car white bodies as illustrated in Figure Q2. You are required to describe the
appropriate robotic arc welding system for this work cell in terms of:
1. Suitable features of the arc welding robot
11. The technology of appropriate arc welding process (please provide the schematic
diagram of the arc welding set-up)
111. The factors that affect the control of the welding quality.
(9 marks)
(d) Describe the implementation of synchronized motion between robot arc welding gun and
a two-axis robot-positioner unit for a robotic arc welding application. Detail out the
controller unit used, and the way synchronization will be carried out. You may
additionally illustrate it with a flow chart with appropriate explanation.
(6 marks)
5
SEM 4153
QUESTION 3
A robotized work cell used to assemble name initial cards is shown in Figure Q3. An AGV
equipped with two-level conveyors is used to retrieve parts to be assembled, from an Automated
Storage and Retrieval System (ASRS) and transports to the robotic assembly station.
(a) With the aid of sketches, compare the relative advantages of the different lighting
techniques in a robotic vision system.
(6 marks)
(b) For the set-up in Figure Q3, propose an appropriate vision set-up for inspection of the
ill cards.
(5 marks)
(c) Describe the controller architecture for the various cells consisting of SCARA robot for
assembly, Cartesian robot for automated screwing, an automated product inspection by
machine vision, and the multiple-flow conveyor.
(8 marks)
(d) Design the overall hierarchical levels of management of information flow for the set-up,
specifying the specific functions of each level. Please provide details of the type of
equipment involved if you were to implement the design.
(6 marks)
6
SEM 4153
QUESTION 4
(a) Briefly describe the three work cell controller programs with emphasizing on their
relative advantages and disadvantages.
(6 marks)
(b) By using V+ robot language as an example, describe the various ways of teaching robot
locations (single locations and array locations).
(6 marks)
(c) Develop a complete robot program for the palletizing task usmg the programmmg
commands for the Staubli-Unimation RX90 Robot, the V+ Robot Language. You are
required to write the V+ robot program for the following tasks:
(i) From a location named StartPoint, the robot has to perform the task of attaching
Gripper#I and then proceed Wait_Location#1.
(ii) The robot has to pick parts from a square pallet and then place them down onto a
circular pallet. The dimensions are as shown the Figure Q4(a) and Q4(b).
You will need to specify the locations required for the robot program.
(13 marks)
7
SEM 4153
QUESTIONS
(a) Discuss the three technologies used In commercial systems for vehicle guidance III
automated guided vehicles (AGV).
(9 marks)
(b) The Automated Guided Vehicle System (AGVS) includes load station I where raw parts
enter the system for delivery to any of three production stations 2, 3 and 4. Unload station
5 receives finished parts from the production stations. Load and unload times at stations I
and 5 are each 1.5 min. Productions rates for each workstation are indicated by the
delivery requirements in Table QS. A complicating factor is that some parts must be
transshipped between stations 3 and 4. Vehicles move in the direction indicated by the
arrows in Figure QS.
(i) Determine the average delivery distance, L
d
.
(4 marks)
(ii) If the vehicles operate according to the following scheduling rule to minimise the
distances the vehicles travel empty: Vehicles delivering raw work parts from
station 1 to stations 2, 3 and 4 must pick up finished parts at these respective
stations for delivery to station 5. Determine the empty travel distances associated
with each delivery and develop a From-to Chart.
(8 marks)
(iii) Suppose the AGVs travel at a speed of 40mlmin, and the traffic factor = 0.90,
delivery distance = 103.8m, (a) determine the value of L
e
for the layout based on
your table. (b) how many automated guided vehicles will be required to operate
the system? Assume availability A = 100% and efficiency E = 1.0.
(4 marks)
8
SEM 4153
Table Q5: From-To Chart showing flow rates,
load/hr (value before the slash mark) and travel distances, m
(value after the slash mark) between stations in a layout
To 1 2 3 4 5
From 1 0 9/X 5N 6/Z 0
2 0 0 0 0 9/A
3 0 0 0 0 3/B
4 0 0 0 0 8/C
5 0 0 0 0 0
Figure Ql(a): Two Robot Fire Extinguisher Assembly Work Cell
9
SEM 4153
Safety fence
Upper tank
conveyor
o
Neck 1=1

Skirt =
Lower tank01

Circumferential weld
Sub Assembly
1 2
rr-----T1@]

Preweld assembly
FE cool 10 -fJ1
Output
[STATION 11 rSTATION 31 convey r
0
o
Robot
Robot ------'
Controller I Controller 2
Figure Ql(b): Layout from the rear entry perspective
II ----
Neck
/
+--__ Upper lank
+---- Lower lank
I
\ /
Skirt
y
Figure Ql(c): Part of Fire Extinguisher
10
SEM 4153
Figure Ql(d): Yaskawa Motoman K30 Revolute Robot
Figure Q2: An arc welding work cell for car body assembly, showing a two-layer robot
arrangement involving eight revolute robots
11
SEM 4153
Figure Q3: A Computer Integrated Manufacturing Robotic Cell
12
SEM 4153
... ~
0
y-direc
0
0
0
0
x-direc
(a) Rectangular Pallet
000
o
radius 0
o
(b) Circular Pallet
Figure Q4: Pallets for Robot Palletizing
13
SEM 4153
\Proc \
3 AGV Guide Path
Aut
\ ....
~
30
50
35
50
4
2
\proc \
Aut Aut
t
t15

--...
.
17
Direction
30
10
of
Vehicle ~ ....
30
~
I ~
movement
5
\unld! !Load! ~
Man Man 1
Figure Q5: AGVS Layout for production system
Key: Proc = processing operation
Aut = automated
Vnld = unload
Man = manual operation
Dimensions in meters (m)

Soalan Peperiksaan Semester Disember 2008/2009: Fakultikejuruteraan Elektrik UTM

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Soalan Peperiksaan Semester Disember 2008/2009: Fakultikejuruteraan Elektrik UTM

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

30000010208721

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi